F-14 Manual

Contents

  1. Introduction
  2. Cockpit Overview
  3. Systems Overview
  4. Weapons & Stores
  5. Jester & Iceman
  6. Normal Procedures
  7. Emergency Procedures
  8. DCS
  9. Abbreviations
  10. Tutorials
  11. Imprint

This document is available online, as PDF version, embedded in-game as offline website and can be contributed to as open-source project at GitHub.

đź’ˇ This manual provides comprehensive details on the F-14 Tomcat. For a more hands-on approach it is recommended to check out Chuck's Guide as well.

đź’ˇ The PDF version has limited support and might be outdated. For the full experience, prefer using the online version.

Introduction

Origins

U.S. Navy photo by LT J.G. Thomas Prochilo. (DN-SC-83-06680) U.S. Navy photo by LT J.G. Thomas Prochilo. (DN-SC-83-06680)

The F-14 Tomcat can trace its origin back to the 1950's and the US Navy's need for a carrier based long range interceptor to fill the Fleet Air Defence role. It was decided that it needed an aircraft with a more advanced and longer ranged radar as well as longer ranged air-to-air missile than the F-4 Phantom.

The Navy was directed, by then defense secretary Robert McNamara, to join the Tactical Fighter Experimental or TFX program to procure this aircraft in a joint venture with the US Air Force. The Navy was opposed to this from the beginning and the proposed General Dynamics F-111B did not meet the Navy's expectations.

Grumman, which had been brought on board by General Dynamics for the Navy F-111B, was eventually awarded a contract to begin development of an aircraft more suited to the Navy's requirements. This led to the design that would eventually become the F-14, carrying over the radar (AN/AWG-9) and missiles (AIM-54 Phoenix) from the failed F-111B project.

The F-14 Tomcat first flew on the 21st of December 1970 and entered service on the 22nd of September 1974. The name "Tomcat" follows Grumman's tradition of naming their aircraft after cats and also partially from the nickname "Tom's Cat" for Vice Admiral Thomas F. Connolly who was instrumental for the development of the F-14.

Service Life Upgrades

The first version of the F-14, the F-14A was equipped with the Pratt & Whitney TF30 and carried an IRST system in the chinpod under the nose.

The TF30 engines were generally regarded as temperamental and underpowered for the F-14A and were eventually replaced by the General Electric F110-400 engines in the F-14A+ (later F-14B).

The IRST system was rather quickly determined to be underperforming and replaced with the TCS (Television Camera Set) in the chinpod allowing for greater than visual range identification of radar tracked targets.

Both the F-14A and F-14B received continuous upgrades during their life, including new programmable cockpit displays (PTID and PMDIG) as well as a new INS system, a digital flight control system (DFCS) and an RWR system amongst others.

Eventually the Tactical Reconnaissance mission was also added to the F-14's portfolio, enabled by the TARPS system, allowing the Tomcat to gather photographic reconnaissance material.

Ground Attack Role

Photo by LCDR Dave Parsons. (DN-SC-93-01299) Photo by LCDR Dave Parsons. (DN-SC-93-01299)

During the 1990's when the aerial threat to the fleets of the US Navy lessened and with the advent of operations like Desert Storm, the ground attack role was resurrected.

The ability to carry and deliver air-to-ground munitions had been implemented in the F-14 from the beginning but ruled out by the Navy as cost and risk ineffective given the F-14's role as a Fleet Air Defence fighter.

With the renewed interest for this role, some of the F-14As and F-14Bs were equipped to carry the LANTIRN targeting pod allowing the RIO to find and designate laser guided bombs for his own aircraft and others. Later on the ability to carry and deliver gps-guided JDAMs was also added.

Most of the LANTIRN equipped aircraft were the ones upgraded with the programmable TID or (PTID) allowing for greater integration of the LANTIRN.

F-14D

In the 1990's the ultimate F-14 version was beginning to see service, the F-14D.

The F-14D used the same engines as the F-14B, the GE F110-400s in addition to using the digital flight control system, which was eventually retrofitted into operational F-14As and F-14Bs as well.

In addition the F-14D also had a newer, more advanced version of the AN/AWG-9, the AN/APG-71, as well as a whole suite of upgraded avionics along with a new chinpod combining the TCS with a new, improved IRST system.

End of Service

The F-14 Tomcat did eventually show its age, forcing the Navy to retire it due to increased maintenance costs and the general status of the now dated airframes. Additionally the Tomcat's primary role, the Fleet Air Defence role, seemingly disappeared with the end of the Cold War.

The Tomcat was finally retired in a ceremony on the 22nd of September 2006 at NAS Oceana.

Iran

IRIAF photo circa 1986 IRIAF photo circa 1986

The only other operator of the F-14 Tomcat was the Imperial Iranian Air Force, later the Islamic Republic of Iran Air Force, for which the Shah of Iran, Mohammad Reza Pahlavi acquired 80 Tomcats.

The eventual fall of the Shah and the rise of the Islamic Republic of Iran meant that a country now opposed to the United States had access to one of its most advanced fighter aircraft. This meant that the Iranian F-14s now lost access to new spare parts and missiles, apart from black market sources, greatly increasing the difficulty of maintaining the aircraft.

The F-14 Tomcat was used during the Iran-Iraq war, claiming a great number of air-to-air victories over the Iraqi Air Force, with some sources going so far as to claim that Iraqi pilots at times left the contested air space to avoid facing the AN/AWG-9 - AIM-54 combo.

To this date the IRIAF continues to fly the F-14 Tomcat as the sole operator. It's not entirely known how the Iranians source their spare parts but it's assumed that they've had to cannibalize inoperable aircraft to keep a portion of their fleet flying. In addition rumours exist mentioning black market sources as well as indigenous production of some parts.

The Iranian operated Tomcats are of the earlier F-14A revisions, using the TF30 engines and lacking a TCS or IRST system.

AIM-54 Phoenix

U.S. Navy photo by Capt. Dana Potts. (020924-N-1955P-001) U.S. Navy photo by Capt. Dana Potts. (020924-N-1955P-001)

The AIM-54 long-range air-to-air missile was born from the same TFX program as that which eventually led to the F-14 Tomcat.

It was designed for the F-111B and then adopted for the F-14 as a long-range missile capable of long range engagement of enemy bombers in addition to hostile cruise missiles. That's not to say that the AIM-54 Phoenix was a slouch at engaging other smaller targets as well.

Outstanding features of the AIM-54 missiles were their long range as well as their ability to be launched at up to six simultaneous targets, guided first by the AN/AWG-9 radar in the launching aircraft and then its own active radar seeker independently.

The original AIM-54 Phoenix was the AIM-54A with a mk47 rocket motor. The motor was later on upgraded, creating the mk60 motor, increasing the missile's range. Eventually the AIM-54 itself was also upgraded, resulting in the AIM-54C with, amongst other things, an upgraded seeker head and a newer version of the mk47 producing less smoke, making the missile hard to spot visually.

The US Navy fired only three AIM-54 missiles in combat, all three over Iraq. The missiles never hit their intended targets though as two of the missiles' rocket motors failed with the third also missing its target as it turned tail and ran.

While little is known for certain in the western hemisphere, the IRIAF claims at least 78 air-to-air victories using the AIM-54 against Iraqi MiG-21s, MiG-23s, MiG-25s, Mirage F-1s, Super Etendards and even some anti-ship cruise missiles.

Technical Specifications

F-14A

AttributeValue
Wingspan (Extended)64’1.5” (~19.5 m)
Wingspan (Swept)38’2.5” (~11.6 m)
Wingspan (Oversweep)33’3.5” (~10.1 m)
Length62’8.5” (~19.1 m)
Height16’ (~4.9 m)
Wing Area565 ft² (~52.5 m²)
Empty Weight40,104 lbs (~18,200 kg)
Max Weight72,000 lbs (~32,700 kg)
Max Thrust (Dry)34,154 lbf (152 kN)
Wing Loading92 lb/ft² (449.2 kg/m²)
Max SpeedMach 2.38 (~2,500 km/h)
Ceiling50,000+ ft (~15,200 m)
Range1,730 NM (~3,200 km)

F-14B

AttributeValue
Wingspan (Extended)64’1.5” (~19.5 m)
Wingspan (Swept)38’2.5” (~11.6 m)
Wingspan (Oversweep)33’3.5” (~10.1 m)
Length62’8.5” (~19.1 m)
Height16’ (~4.9 m)
Wing Area565 ft² (~52.5 m²)
Empty Weight41,780 lbs (~19,000 kg)
Max Weight74,349 lbs (~33,700 kg)
Max Thrust (Dry)56,400 lbf (251 kN)
Wing Loading94 lb/ft² (458.9 kg/m²)
Ceiling53,000+ ft (~16,200 m)
Range2,050 NM (~3,800 km)

Variants

F-14A-95-GR IRIAF

Early F-14A version as sold to the IIAF (Imperial Iranian Air Force) which later became the IRIAF (Islamic Republic of Iran Air Force).

This version has the early Pratt & Whitney TF30-P-414A engines, AN/ALR-45 radar warning receiver and lacks the Television Camera Set (TCS) and Link-4 data link system as well as being limited to the earlier air to air missiles available to Iran.

đźš§ This variant will be added later during Early Access.

F-14A-135-GR (Early)

Early US Navy F-14A version.

This version has the early Pratt & Whitney TF30-P-414A engines and AN/ALR-45 and AN/ALR-50 radar warning receivers.

F-14A-135-GR (Late)

Later US Navy F-14A version.

This version has the early Pratt & Whitney TF30-P-414A engines and the AN/ALR-67 radar warning receiver.

F-14B

US Navy F-14B (renamed from F-14A+).

This version has the newer General Electrics F110-GE-400 engines, the AN/ALR-67 radar warning receiver as well as having the ability to mount and use the LANTIRN targeting pod.

Definitions

Should an acronym, such as IRST be unclear at any point, look it up in the exhaustive list provided at the Abbreviations chapter.

The following symbology is used throughout this manual.

General

SymbolMeaningDescription
đź’ˇNoteItem that is given special emphasize
🟡CautionShould be followed to prevent damage to equipment
đź”´WarningIgnoring might lead to personal injury or loss of life
đźš§Under ConstructionA section is work in progress and will be improved still

Cockpit Overview

Cockpit

The following chapter gives a detailed overview of the pilot's cockpit, as well as that of the Radar Interceptor Officer (RIO). Each single switch will be outlined and explained briefly, while giving context to the functions.

More in-depth details on the various systems and consequences of using a switch beyond their brief explanation are available in the Systems Overview Chapter.

Pilot Cockpit Overview

Layout

pilot_cockpit

Left Side Console

G-valve Button

g-valve

Pressed to test inflation of g-suit.

Oxygen-Vent Airflow Control Panel

oxygen-vent

Controls ventilation airflow to pressure suit or seat cushions and oxygen to pilot mask.

No.ControlFunction
1VENT AIRFLOW dialUsed to control airflow through the pressure suit or seat cushions if no pressure suit is worn.
2OXYGEN switchSwitch with ON/OFF positions. Controls oxygen flow to the mask.

Volume/TACAN Command Panel

volume

Panel controlling volume to Pilot headset and crewmember in control of TACAN.

F-14B and F-14A (Late):

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1ALR-67 knobControls audio volume from the ALR-67 to the pilot.
2SW knobControls volume of Sidewinder audio tone to the pilot.
3V/UHF 2 knobControls volume of audio from AN/ARC-182 to the pilot.
4TACAN CMD switchSets crewmember in command of the TACAN. Also indicates current setting.

F-14A (Early):

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1ALR-45 knobControls audio volume from the ALR-45 to the pilot.
2ALR-50 knobControls audio volume from the ALR-50 to the pilot.
3SW knobControls volume of Sidewinder audio tone to the pilot.
4V/UHF 2 knobControls volume of audio from AN/ARC-182 to the pilot.
5TACAN CMD switchSets crewmember in command of the TACAN.

TACAN Control Panel

tacan

TACAN control panel letting the pilot control TACAN if in command of it.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1Dual rotary switchOuter dial selects first two digits and inner dial selects last digit for TACAN channel selection.
2GO & NO-GO lightsLights indicating result of TACAN BIT.
3BIT buttonButton initiating TACAN BIT.
4MODE switchesSwitches mode for TACAN operation and selects X or Y channels. INVERSE mode not functional.
5VOL knobVolume control knob for TACAN audio to the pilot.
6Mode knobSelects TACAN mode

The following modes are available:

  • OFF - TACAN is off
  • REC - Receive only
  • T/R - Transmit and receive, enables range readout
  • A/A - Air to air TACAN mode
  • BCN - Beacon TACAN mode (not functional)

ICS Control Panel

ics

Control panel for ICS.

No.ControlFunction
1VOL knobVolume control knob for intercommunication audio from the RIO to the pilot.
2Amplifier selection knobKnob selecting which amplifier to use for pilot’s headset audio.
3ICS switchSelects ICS function.

The following amplifiers are available:

  • B/U - Backup amplifier
  • NORM - Normal amplifier
  • EMER - Emergency amplifier, uses RIO's amplifier and his volume settings. Disallows listening to audio only available to the pilot such as the Sidewinder tone and engine stall/overtemperature warnings

Available ICS functions are:

  • RADIO OVERRIDE - Makes ICS audio override radio audio.
  • HOT MIC - Allows talking to the RIO without pressing the PTT. Also allows the groundcrew to talk to the crew via the external interphone.
  • COLD MIC - Allows talking to the RIO only while the PTT is pressed.

AFCS Control Panel

afcs

Control panel for AFCS and autopilot.

No.ControlFunction
1PITCH switchEnables pitch stability augmentation.
2ROLL switchEnables roll stability augmentation.
3YAW switchEnables yaw stability augmentation.
4VEC/PCD/ACL switchSwitch controlling the remote control modes of autopilot.
5ALT switchON/OFF switch, enables altitude hold. Engaged by NWS button on pilot stick.
6HDG switchSelects HDG hold mode.
7ENGAGE switchENGAGE/OFF. Engages autopilot.

đź’ˇ All switches are spring-loaded to OFF position but held in position with solenoid to enable automatic disengagement when applicable.

VEC/PCD/ACL Switch

Remote controlling offers the following functions:

  • VEC/PCD - Vector/PCD mode. Roll and pitch axis is controlled by data link. Engaged by NWS button on pilot stick.
  • OFF - Function off
  • ACL - Automatic carrier landing mode. Engaged by NWS button on pilot stick.

HDG Switch

Available Heading Hold modes include:

  • HDG - Engages heading hold mode
  • OFF - Heading hold off
  • GT - Ground track mode, engaged by NWS button on pilot stick

UHF 1 (AN/ARC-159) Radio

arc-159

UHF radio 1. Radio and controls.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1VOL knobControls volume of UHF 1 audio to pilot headset.
2SQL switchON/OFF switch enabling squelch.
3Frequency select switchesToggle switches selecting set frequency.
4FREQ/(CHAN) displayReadout display showing selected frequency or channel.
5READ buttonButton toggling display of selected channel while held.
6BRT knobKnob controlling display brightness.
7LOAD buttonButton toggling load of set frequency to set channel.
8Function selector knobSelector knob selecting radio function.
9CHAN SEL knobSelects preset channel to use.
10Preset channels chartChart used to record frequencies or use for preset channels.
11Mode selector knobKnob selecting radio frequency select mode.
12TONE buttonTransmits a TONE on current frequency.

đź’ˇ ADF is nonfunctional with the AN/ARC-159, use the V/UHF 2 instead.

ASYM Limiter/Engine Mode Select (F-14B only)

asym

Control panel for the asymmetric thrust limiter system and the control mode of each engine.

No.ControlFunction
1ASYM LIMITER switchON/OFF switch enabling afterburner thrust asymmetry limiter.
2ENG MODE SELECT switchesSwitches selecting engine mode for their respective engine.

Selectable Engine modes are:

  • PRI - Primary engine control mode
  • SEC - Secondary engine control mode

Target Designate Switch

target

Used to designate ground targets on the HUD and to control pilot ACM radar modes except PLM. Can be moved up/down and forward which is the designate position.

In air-to-ground mode up and down moves the designator and forward designates. In all other cases up and down selects VSL HI and VSL LO ACM-modes respectively and forward selects PAL.

Inlet Ramps/Throttle Control Panel

inlet

Control panel for various engine systems, throttle settings and rudder trim.

No.ControlFunction
1THROTTLE MODESwitch selecting throttle operation mode.
2THROTTLE TEMPSwitch selecting throttle computer gain.
3INLET RAMPSSwitches selecting operational modes for respective engine inlet ramps.
4ENG CRANKSelector switch selecting engine crank for either left or right engine.
5BACK UP IGNITIONSwitch toggling engine backup ignition ON or OFF.
6RUDDER TRIMSwitch adjusting rudder trim.

Throttle Mode

Switch selecting throttle operation mode.

  • AUTO - Automatic
  • BOOST - Boosted
  • MAN - Manual

Throttle Temp

Switch selecting throttle computer gain.

  • HOT - Hot
  • NORM - Normal
  • COLD - Cold

Inlet Ramps

Switches selecting operational modes for respective engine inlet ramps.

  • STOW - Stowed
  • AUTO - Automatic Mode

Throttle

throttle

The throttle grips contains various flight controls and HOTAS functions.

No.ControlFunction
1Speed brake switchSwitch controlling extension of the speed brake.
2Wing-sweep switchSwitch controlling wing-sweep function. Manual mode only allows positions aft of CADC set position.
3PLM buttonButton used to command pilot lockon mode of AWG-9. Also used to disengage autopilot while in ACL.
4CAGE/SEAM buttonButton used to command CAGE/SEAM to AIM-9 initiating lockon. Also used to disengage APC when in use.
5Exterior light switchSwitch used to control exterior lights.
6ICS PTT switchSwitch allowing pilot to key one or both radios and intercommunication to RIO.

Speed Brake Switch

Switch controlling extension of the speed brake.

  • EXT - Momentary position returning to center when released. Incrementally extends speed brake while held. Speed brake remains in position it's at when released.
  • RET - Toggle position retracting speed brake.

Wing-Sweep Switch

Switch controlling wing-sweep function. Manual mode only allows positions aft of CADC set position.

  • AUTO - Wing-sweep automatically set by CADC.
  • FWD - Sweeps wings forward manually.
  • AFT - Sweeps wings aft manually.
  • BOMB - Sets wing-sweep to 55° if forwards of that. When the CADC position is aft of 55° it will follow that setting instead.

Exterior Light Switch

Switch used to control exterior lights.

  • OFF - disable all exterior lights and increases approach light intensity.
  • ON - enables all exterior lights and dims approach lights.

ICS PTT Switch

Switch allowing pilot to key one or both radios and intercommunication to RIO.

  • ICS - Keys intercommunication to RIO.
  • BOTH - Keys both UHF 1 and V/UHF 2 for transmission.
  • UHF1 - Keys UHF 1 for transmission.
  • UHF2 - Keys V/UHF 2 for transmission.

Throttle Quadrant

QuadrantSchema
throttlesthrottles-schema

The main throttle quadrant contains the two main-engine throttle controls, the flap lever and manual wing-sweep handle in addition to the HOTAS controls on the throttles themselves. The throttles have detents in the OFF, IDLE and MIL positions.

Moving the throttles to the IDLE position from OFF arms the ignition and disengages the fuel cutoff. The sideways movements of the throttles are not spring loaded, this is so the pilot can have the throttle resting at MIL power for catapult launches and prevents accidental spool down of the engines. A friction lever for selection of desired throttle movement friction is located on the left side of the throttle quadrant, beneath the flap lever.

The flap lever has a stepless range of motion between up and down and has two emergency positions, one emergency up and one emergency down. Both emergency positions have detents, the lever needs to be moved outboards to continue movement into these positions. Emergency up forces the flaps up, overriding the normal flap logic. Emergency down is non-functional.

The manual/emergency wing-sweep handle is protected by a guard and is normally pushed in and stowed. The handle-top is extended for manual operation. For more information see Wing-Sweep System.

Hydraulic Hand Pump

The hydraulic hand pump is located inboards of the throttle quadrant, near the pilot’s left leg. It is used to manually add hydraulic pressure for brake operation (with gear handle in the down position) or for refueling probe operation in case of a failure in the hydraulic system.

Left Vertical Console

Fuel Management Panel

Fuel Management

Control panel for various fuel-related systems, CADC master reset, and the anti-skid system.

QTY SEL switch

Switch (1) selecting what the fuel quantity tapes on the fuel quantity display shows. Spring-loaded to FEED.

  • FEED - Shows respective feed and fuselage tank fuel quantity.
  • WING - Shows respective wing tank fuel quantity.
  • EXT - Shows respective external fuel tank quantity.

FEED switch

Switch (2) selecting fuel feed to the engines. Guard locks the switch to NORM until lifted.

WING/EXT TRANS switch

Switch (3) selecting operation of the wing and external tanks.

  • ORIDE - Override.
  • AUTO - Normal position.
  • OFF - Turns off fuel feed from the wing and external tanks.

Refueling probe indicator light

Transition light (4) illuminated when refueling probe is not in extended or retracted position.

DUMP switch

OFF/DUMP switch (5). Allows fuel dump when speed brakes are retracted, afterburner off and weight off wheels.

REFUEL PROBE switch

Selection switch (6) toggling operation of refueling probe.

  • ALL EXTD - All extended, extends refueling probe and allows refueling of all tanks. Also resets WING/EXT TRANS switch to AUTO.
  • FUS EXTD - Fuselage extended, extends refueling probe and allows refueling of only fuselage tanks.
  • RET - Retracted, retracts refueling probe.

ANTI SKID SPOILER BK switch

Selection switch (7) determining operation anti-skid and spoiler brake systems.

  • BOTH - Enables both anti-skid and spoiler brake function with weight on wheels.
  • OFF - Turns off both systems.
  • SPOILER BK - Spoiler brake, enables spoiler brake function with weight on wheels.

MASTER RESET button

Button (8) that resets CADC failure detection system and associated fault displays.

Control Surface Position Indicator

Control Surface

Indicator for indication of control surface positions.

IndicatorFunction
1SPOILERSpoiler position indicators.
2RUDDERRudder position indicators, shows position of left and right rudders.
3HORIZ TAILHorizontal stabilizer position indicators.

Left and right Rudder and Horizontal Tail Stabilizers are represented by symbols L and R respectively.

The Spoiler position indications are as follows:

  • DN - Down, flush with wings
  • Up-arrow - Extended above wing
  • Down-arrow - Drooped below wing surface

Launch Bar Abort Panel

Launch Abort

Selection switch that when held in ABORT lifts the launch bar for launch abortion. Spring-loaded to NORM (Normal) which is the standard position.

đź’ˇ Not currently used in DCS.

Landing Gear Control Panel

Gear Control

Control panel for the main landing gear and emergency stores jettison.

Control/IndicatorFunction
1LDG GEARLanding gear handle
2DOWN LOCK ORIDEIndicates weight on wheels when moved down by solenoid.
3HYD ISOLSwitch isolating gear, nosewheel steering and brakes from the hydraulic system.
4Transition lightIlluminates to indicate gear position not according to handle position.
5Wheels-flaps indicatorIndicates various positions, see below for details.
6EMERG STORES buttonEmergency stores jettison. Illuminates to indicate activation when pressed.
7NOSE STRUT switchSwitch selecting nosewheel strut retraction.
8BRAKE-PULL handleParking brake, pull out to apply parking brake, push in to release.
9EJECT CMD indicatorIndicates ejection system mode for the back seat.

Landing Gear Handle

Selects gear UP or DOWN.

For emergency extension in DOWN position, push handle in, turn clockwise and pull out. This releases a compressed nitrogen charge for emergency extension.

Down Lock Override

Indicates weight on wheels when moved down by solenoid. Can be lifted up to override.

đź’ˇ Non-functional in DCS.

Hydraulic Isolation

Switch isolating landing gear, nosewheel steering and wheel brakes from the combined hydraulic system. Is automatically moved to T.O./LDG by LDG GEAR in DOWN position.

  • FLT - In flight operation, isolates systems listed above.
  • T.O./LDG - Take-off/landing, connects systems listed above, allowing them to operate.

Wheels and Flaps Position Indicator

Gear Control

Indicates position of flaps and slats, speed brakes, and the landing gear. The slats are indicated as follows:

IndicationState
Power offPower off or maneuver slats extended.
Slats extendedSlats extended.
Slats retractedSlats retracted.

Flap Position is displayed by an indicator moving between UP and DOWN. The first marked section of the indicator indicates maneuver flap-range. The landing gear is indicated as follows:

IndicationState
Power off or unsafe gearPower off or unsafe gear.
Gear downGear down.
Gear retracted and doors closedGear retracted and doors closed.

Speed brakes are indicated as follows:

IndicationState
Brake offSpeed brake system power off.
Brake partialSpeed brake partial extension, not in motion.
Brake outSpeed brake fully extended.
Brake inSpeed brake retracted.

Nose Strut Switch

Switch selecting nosewheel strut retraction.

  • EXTD - Extend, extends nosewheel strut and raises and locks launch bar.
  • OFF - Turns off nosewheel strut movement, spring-loaded to this position.
  • KNEEL - Releases pressure from nosewheel strut to retract it, kneeling aircraft. Also unlocks launch bar.

EJECT CMD Indicator

Indicates ejection system mode for the back seat.

  • PILOT - Pilot ejects both crewmembers, RIO only himself.
  • MCO - Each position ejects both crewmen.

Left Knee Panel

Hydraulic Pressure Indicator

Hydraulic Pressure Indicator

Shows hydraulic pressure of the combined and flight hydraulic systems.

  • SPOIL (Spoiler): ON/OFF-flag indicates pressurization of outboard spoiler module.
  • EMER FLT HI: ON/OFF-flags indicates backup flight hydraulic system pressures when HI or LOW is selected respectively.

Oil Pressure Indicator

Oil Pressure Indicator

Displays oil pressure for each engine. Range is 0 - 100 psi, normal range is 25 - 65 psi, varying with engine rpm.

Exhaust Nozzle Position Indicator

Exhaust Nozzle Position Indicator

Displays position of engine nozzles. Range 0 - 5 with 5 being fully open.

Electronic Instrument Group

Electronic Instrument Group

Displays engine RPM (High-pressure compressor rotor speed (N2)), EGT (Exhaust Gas Temperature) and FF (Fuel Flow) for respective engine.

đź’ˇ Image shows TF-30 engine instruments, F110 EIG coming soon.

FF is not indicated for the additional fuel used in afterburner.

Left Instrument Panel

Radar Altimeter

Radar Altimeter

Control and indicator for the radar altimeter.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1Radar altimeter control knobFully counterclockwise position turns the altimeter off. Rotation clockwise sets the altitude warning level, increasing clockwise. Depressing the knob starts the altimeter BIT.
2OFF flagShown if the system is off, power is off or the system loses ground lock.
3Low altitude warning lightRed light illuminated when below set altitude warning level.
4Self-test lightGreen light that should illuminate when the altimeter BIT is run. The readout should also display 100 feet ±10.
5Low-altitude limit indexSmall triangular bug moving along outer edge, displays set altitude warning level.

đź’ˇ Radio override does not disable low-altitude warning tone.

Servopneumatic Altimeter

Servopneumatic Altimeter

Control and indicator for the servopneumatic altimeter.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1Altimeter readoutDisplays altitude digitally on three drums showing 10,000, 1,000 and 100 of feet respectively. It also displays altitude on a pointer on a circular scale indicating 100’s of feet.
2Baroset knobSets local pressure in inches of mercury (in.Hg). Only used locally on the altimeter readout, all other digital indicators (via CADC) uses a set 29.92 in.Hg value.
3Mode switchThree-position switch, spring-loaded to return from RESET. If power and altitude data from CADC is present, switch can be held in RESET for 3 seconds to allow normal (servoed) mode of operation. If set to STBY or power or CADC data is absent for more than 3 seconds system switches to backup (pressure) mode.
4STBY flagRed flag reading STBY that appears if system is in backup (stand-by) mode.

đź’ˇ At high speeds and below 10,000 feet, due to pressure changes, errors in readout up to as much as 1,200 feet when transonic and up to as much as 4,000 feet when supersonic can occur.

Airspeed Mach Indicator

Airspeed Mach Indicator

Indicated airspeed and Mach number display.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1Airspeed dialShows indicated airspeed on three scales, two for indicated airspeed and one moving for Mach number.
2Indicated airspeed scale (outer)Readout for indicated airspeed up to 200 knots.
3Indicated airspeed scale (inner)Readout for indicated airspeed from 200 knots to 850 knots. Covered by airspeed dial until relevant.
4Mach number scaleReadout for Mach number. Moved to show correct Mach number relative indicated airspeed.
5Indicated airspeed index pointerCan be set to desired indicated airspeed.
6Mach number index pointerCan be set to desired Mach number. Not visible in image.
7Safe Mach number index pointerShows safe Mach number calculated by the CADC. Not visible in image.
8Index knobKnob with a pull-out and push-in position. One sets indexer for indicated airspeed and the other for Mach number.

Vertical Velocity Indicator

Vertical Velocity Indicator

Shows vertical velocity in thousands of feet. Can show erroneous readings if sudden or abrupt changes of attitude occur because of the changing airflow over the static probe.

Left Engine Fuel Shutoff Handle

Left Engine Fuel Shutoff Handle

Pull to shut off fuel to the left engine in case of emergency. Push in to re-enable fuel-flow to the engine. Should not be used to secure the engine.

Left engine fire extinguishing button is located behind the handle, accessible when the handle is pulled out.

Angle-of-Attack Indicator

Angle-of-Attack Indicator

Tape indicating angle of attack (AOA) on a scale of 0 to 30 units. (Equivalent to -10° to +40° rotation of the AoA probe.)

The indicator has markers on the right for climb (5), cruise (8.5), and stall (29), and a reference bar for on-speed approach (15).

Left Windshield Frame

Approach Indexer

Approach Indexer

Contains three lights showing angle-of-attack (AOA) relative on-speed AOA:

  • Green: too slow
  • Amber: on-speed AOA
  • Red: too fast

If the HOOK BY-PASS switch is set to CARRIER the lights will flash if the arresting hook is up while the landing gear is down.

These lights are repeated on the approach lights on the nosewheel strut, allowing the LSO to see aircraft AOA during carrier landings.

Caution Lights

HUD left side indicators

To the left of the HUD are several caution light indications.

No.IndicatorTypeFunction
1WHEELSWarningFlashes with landing gear not down and locked, flaps below 10° and either throttle below 85%.
2BRAKESWarningIndicates antiskid or brake failure. Also lights when parking brake is set.
3ACLS/APCautionShows that ACLS or autopilot is disengaged.
4NWS ENGACautionLit when nosewheel steering (NWS) is engaged.
5AUTO THROTCautionWhen shown disengagement of the automatic throttle control mode is not resulting from the throttle mode switch.

Center Panel

Heads-Up Display

hud

Projects flight and weapons data onto the forward section of the canopy/windscreen. Night mode can be selected using the control on the right side of the VDI.

Has two engine stall warning lights (L STALL & R STALL) mounted on the left and right sides, respectively. They indicate the presence of an engine stall condition in their respective engine.

đź’ˇ For more information see relevant chapters under Navigation and Weapons and Weapons Employment Overview.

Cockpit Television Sensor (CTVS)

ctvs

The cockpit television sensor (CTVS) records the HUD for registration of weapons delivery.

đź’ˇ Not implemented in DCS.

Air Combat Maneuver Panel

acm

Main pilot armament control panel.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1ACM switch/coverLifting the ACM (Air combat maneuver) cover activates the ACM mode and allows access to the ACM jettison button.
2ACM JETT buttonButton under the ACM cover that enables jettison of stores selected on the RIO’s ARMAMENT panel. Will not jettison Sidewinders regardless if selected.
3SEAM LOCK lightLight that illuminates to show that Sidewinder acquisition is in progress while in slaved and boresight SEAM modes. Lights up during the 4.5 second SEAM acquisition attempt and remains lit thereafter if the seeker has locked onto a target.
4COLLISION lightLight that illuminates to show that collision steering has been selected during AWG-9 STT operation.
5HOT TRIG lightRed light that indicates that the HOT TRIGGER conditions are met. When this is lit, the trigger will release a weapon.
6GUN RATE switchToggle switch with light indication of selected option.
7SW COOL switchToggle switch with light indication of selected option. Manual control of Sidewinder seeker cooling. Automatically set to ON when ACM mode is selected.
8MSL PREP switchToggle switch with light indication of selected option. Commands WCS to prepare AIM-54 and AIM-7 missiles. Automatically set to ON when ACM mode is commanded.
9MSL MODE switchToggle switch with light indication of selected option. Selects NORM (normal) or BRSIT (boresight) operation for missile launch. Controlled by WCS when in ACM mode.
10MASTER ARM switchEnables weapons release and selective and auxiliary jettison.
11Station status flagsShows indication of weapon status for the different stations.
12MASTER CAUTION light and buttonFlashes to indicate status change on the pilot caution/advisory panel. Press to reset and turn off light until the next event.
13L FIRE and R FIRE lightsEngine fire warning lights. Illuminates when a fire has been detected in the respective engine.
14Turn-and-Slip indicatorIndicator showing rate of turn around the aircraft vertical axis. The upper part contains an electrically driven pointer, one needle deflection equaling a 360° turn in 4 minutes. The lower part contains an inclinometer with a ball suspended in a dampening fluid.

GUN RATE switch

Toggle switch with light indication of selected option.

  • HIGH - Selects gun rate of 6 000 rounds per minute. Normally for A/A operation.
  • LOW - Selects gun rate of 4 000 rounds per minute. Normally for A/G operation.

Automatically set to HIGH when ACM mode is selected.

MASTER ARM switch

Enables weapons release and selective and auxiliary jettison.

  • OFF - Disables electrical power to release circuitry.
  • ON - Enables electrical power to release circuitry. Position locked until the master arm cover is lifted.
  • TNG (training) - Enables the in-flight training mode.

đź’ˇ The MASTER ARM bus is also interlocked with the landing gear control lever, disabling all releases except emergency jettison while the gear is down.

đź’ˇ The ACM and Emergency jettison are not disabled by the MASTER ARM.

Station status flags

Shows indication of weapon status for the different stations.

  • BLACK - Station not loaded or weapon not ready.
  • WHITE - Station and weapon ready.
  • CHECKERBOARD - Weapon is selected and ready for launch. On the ground indicates that fuselage rails are up and locked and that loaded weapons are armed.

Vertical Display Indicator (VDI)

vdi

Display that complements the HUD in displaying flight and weapons data.

đź’ˇ The VDI has a red night filter that can be installed by clicking in the middle of the VDI screen.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1HUD BRT controlControls HUD brightness.
2VDI BRT controlControls VDI brightness.
3VDI CONT controlControls VDI contrast.
4FILTER handleWhen pulled inserts filter for HUD night operation.
5HUD TRIM controlAllows adjustment/trim of pitch lines on HUD.
6VDI TRIM controlAllows adjustment/trim of pitch lines on VDI.
7VDI caution lightsVDI-mounted caution lights. See images and tables below.

VDI Caution Indication

VDI Caution

Data link warning and caution lights situated at the VDI panel.

No.IndicatorFunction
1ADJ A/CAdvisory light indicating other aircraft close to own traffic pattern.
2LANDING CHKAdvisory light indicating carrier has a channel ready for ACL and that the crew should prepare for carrier landing.
3ACL READYWarning light indicating CATCC has acquired the aircraft and is transmitting glidepath information to the aircraft.
4A/P CPLRWarning light indicating CATCC is ready to control the aircraft.
5CMD CONTROLWarning light indicating the aircraft is under data link control for landing.
610 SECONDSWarning light indicating that carrier motion is added to data link info and commands during landing. Indicates 10 seconds to arrival at the next point in approach pattern in other modes.
7TILTWarning light indicating no data link command received for the last 2 seconds during ACL. When not in ACL, it indicates no data link messages during the last 10 seconds.
8VOICEWarning light indicating CATCC not ready for ACL, switch to standard voice procedures.
9A/P REFWarning light indicating autopilot selected but not engaged. Exception: altitude and heading hold.
10WAVEOFFWarning light indicating waveoff commanded.
11WING SWEEPWarning light indicating failure in both wing-sweep channels or disengagement of spider detent.
12REDUCE SPEEDWarning light indicating flap retraction failure with greater than 225 knots indicated airspeed. Also indicates safe Mach number exceeded.
13ALT LOWNon-functional, light on radar altimeter is used instead.

Horizontal Situation Display Indicator (HSD)

HSD

The horizontal situation display is used to display navigational information to the pilot. It can also be used to repeat the RIO’s TID to the pilot.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1BRT controlControls HSD brightness.
2HDG controlControls heading reference bug in TACAN mode.
3CRS controlControls desired course in MAN (manual) and TACAN mode.
4TEST buttonAllows reset of the HSD to re-enable display if the overload protection is tripped. Also displays the HSD IR field test display on the HSD.
5BIT indicatorIndicates failure in HSD by showing white flags. Reset by rotating it clockwise.

đź’ˇ For more information see relevant chapters under Navigation and for the TID repeat Tactical Information Display (TID) and Associated Controls.

Cabin Pressure Altimeter

cabin pressure

Displays cabin pressure in 1,000-foot increments from 0 to 50,000 feet.

Emergency Brake Pressure Indicator

brake pressure

Displays hydraulic pressure available from the emergency brake accumulators to the auxiliary and parking wheel brake systems.

No.IndicatorFunction
1PARKShows brake pressure available for parking brakes. Green segment indicates 2,150 to 3,000 psi, red indicates 1,900 to 2,150 psi. When green there is pressure enough for approximately 3 applications.
2AUXShows brake pressure in the auxiliary brake pressure which can be used via the toe brakes on the pedals. Green segment indicates 2,150 to 3,000 psi (approximately 13 to 14 applications) while red indicates 1,900 to 2,150 psi (approximately 5 applications).

Control Stick

stick

Used to control aircraft roll and pitch. Also various other functions according to table below.

No.ControlFunction
1Bomb release buttonStores release button, used for air-to-ground ordnance (except rockets) and loaded external countermeasures.
2Pitch and roll trim hatHat used to control trim, up/down trims pitch and left/right trims roll.
3Weapon select hatSelector hat moveable up and down and depressible.
4DLC & maneuver flap command wheelThumbwheel used to control DLC or maneuver flaps. With DLC engaged forward rotation extends spoilers and aft rotation retracts spoilers. With flaps up and DLC disengaged forward rotation retracts maneuvering flaps/slats and aft rotation extends them. The logic behind the function being that pulling the wheel towards you increases lift and pushing it away decreases lift.
5DLC engage/disengage & countermeasure dispense buttonMomentary depression with flaps down, throttles less than MIL and no spoiler system failure engages DLC. With flaps up button sends command to ALE-39 to dispense chaff or flares according to RIO setting. DLC is disengaged by further momentary depression of the button, raising flaps, or advancing either throttle to MIL.
6Autopilot reference & nosewheel steering buttonButton toggling nosewheel steering with weight on wheels. Without weight on wheels is used to engage enabled autopilot modes.
7Autopilot emergency disengage paddleDisengages all autopilot modes and DLC and releases all autopilot switches and roll and pitch SAS switches to OFF position. With weight on wheels additionally reverts throttle mode to MAN (manual) while depressed.
8Weapon firing triggerTwo-stage trigger. First detent enables CTVS and gun camera. Second detent releases selected forwards firing weapon.

đź’ˇ CTVS not implemented in DCS.

Weapon Select Hat

Selector hat moveable up and down and depressible.

  • SP or PH - Selects AIM-7 or AIM-54, depression toggles between type.
  • SW - Selects AIM-9, depression toggles between stations.
  • GUN - Selects M-61A1 Vulcan gun.
  • OFF - Inhibits weapon release.

Right Windshield Frame

ECM Warning Lights

rwr caution

Warning lights connected to the ALR-67 indicating different types of threats.

ALR-67

IndicatorFunction
SAMSteady illumination when detecting lock-on from a SAM tracking radar. Flashes when missile launch is detected.
AAASteady illumination when detecting lock-on from a AAA tracking radar. Flashes when AAA firing is detected.
AISteady illumination when detecting lock-on from an airborne interceptor radar.

ALR-45

IndicatorFunction
SA TRKLights steady whenever a SAM tracking radar is received.
SAMMaster SAM warning indication, lights steady for MA (missile alert), flashes for ML (missile launch)
AI/AAALights steady whenever an ambiguous AI/AAA radar is received.
AILights steady whenever an airborne interceptor radar is received.

Standby Compass

compass

Conventional standby compass.

Right Instrument Panel

Wing-Sweep Indicator

wing-weep

Indicator detailing the status of the wing-sweep system.

No.IndicatorFunction
1Leftmost indicator pointerShows wing-sweep program position which is also the max forward angle at present airspeed and altitude.
2Middle tapeShows commanded wing-sweep position.
3Rightmost tapeShows actual wing-sweep position.
4Indicator windowsThe five indicator windows show the current operating mode.

Right Engine Fuel Shutoff Handle

right engine shutoff

Pull to shut off fuel to the right engine in case of emergency. Push in to re-enable fuel flow to the engine. Should not be used to secure the engine.

Right engine fire extinguishing button is located behind the handle, accessible when the handle is pulled out.

Standby Attitude Indicator

standby attitude

Standalone standby attitude indicator.

No.Indicator/ControlFunction
1OFF flagVisible on the left side when caged or when un-powered.
2KnobCages/un-cages the indicator and allows trim to correct pitch. In pulled-out position the indicator is caged. When pushed in, un-cages the indicator and allows pitch trim by turning the knob.

UHF/VHF Remote Indicators

front remote

Remote indicators displaying set frequency or channel of UHF 1 (AN/ARC-159) and V/UHF 2 (AN/ARC-182).

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1UHF 1 remote channel/frequency indicator (pilot)Displays a readout of the frequency or channel set for the UHF 1 radio.
2V/UHF 2 remote channel/frequency indicator (pilot)Displays a readout of the frequency or channel set for the V/UHF 2 radio.

The knobs labelled DIM and BRT control display brightness.

The TEST button initiates a test for the respective indicator, no fault results in a readout of 888.888.

Bearing Distance Heading Indicator (BDHI)

bdhi

Display indicating azimuth and bearing information.

No.IndicatorFunction
1No. 2 bearing pointerIndicates magnetic course to tuned TACAN station.
2Compass roseShows current aircraft magnetic heading.
3No. 1 bearing pointerIndicates bearing to tuned UHF/ADF station.
4Distance counterIndicates slant range to tuned TACAN station in nautical miles. (Not visible in this image.)

ALR-67 Indicator

alr-67

Indicator showing emitters detected by the ALR-67 RWR (radar warning receiver) set.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1System status circle, area IUpper left quadrant of 1. Shows symbol indicating type of threats selected to be shown.
2System status circle, area IIUpper right quadrant of 1. Indicates if limited mode is selected.
3System status circle, area IIILower half of 1. Displays failure codes and if offset display is selected.
4Non-lethal bandDisplays emitters not a direct threat to own aircraft, either because deemed out of range or lacking weaponry.
5Lethal bandDisplays threats that are deemed within range and capable of engaging own aircraft but not currently doing so.
6Critical bandDisplays direct threats to own aircraft. Systems capable of engaging own aircraft and showing current intent of doing so.
7INT knobIntensity/brightness knob. Controls the brightness of the display.

System Status Circle

The upper left quadrant (Area I) can show the following symbols:

  • N - Normal
  • I - AI, airborne interceptors prioritized.
  • A - AAA, anti-air artillery prioritized.
  • U - Unknown emitters prioritized.
  • F - Friendly emitters shown in addition to other threats.

The upper right quadrant (Area II) can either be blank (limited mode not selected) or show L if selected. Limited mode will only show the 6 highest prioritized threats on the display.

The lower half shows system status codes:

  • Blank - No failure detected and offset not selected.
  • B - BIT failure.
  • T - Thermal overload.
  • O - Offset display selected. Threats will be separated to allow readout of overlapping symbols. Bearing accuracy degraded for displaced threats.

Canopy Jettison Handle

canopy jettison

Used to jettison canopy manually.

Right Knee Panel

Fuel Quantity Indicator

fuel quantity

Shows fuel quantity in the different aircraft tanks.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1BINGO readoutShows currently set BINGO fuel quantity.
2TOTAL counterTotal fuel quantity readout, shows totalled fuel quantity in all aircraft tanks.
3L & R countersShows fuel quantity in currently selected respective (L or R) tanks (feed, wing, or ext) set by the QTY SEL switch on the fuel management panel.
4FUS & FEED tapesShows fuel quantity in respective fuselage tanks. Left tape indicates left feed and aft fuselage tanks. Right tape indicates right feed and forward fuselage tanks.
5SET knobKnob used to set BINGO fuel quantity. Turn to set desired quantity.

Accelerometer

accelerometer

Instrument showing current aircraft g-load (acceleration along the aircraft vertical axis). It’s graded in g from -5g to +10g. One pointer will show current g-load while the other two will indicate max reached negative and positive g-load. These can be reset by pushing the PUSH TO SET button on the lower left corner of the instrument.

Clock

clock

Mechanical wind-up clock.

The knob on the lower left corner is used to wind up the clock by turning it clockwise and pulled out and turned to set the hour and minute hands.

The control on the upper right corner is used to start, stop, and reset a 1-hour elapsed time counter.

Right Vertical Console

Arresting Hook Panel

Hook Panel

Panel controlling arrestor hook.

HOOK handle

Arresting hook handle, selects arresting hook position.

  • UP - Electrically actuates hydraulic retraction of the hook and locks it in the up-lock.
  • DOWN - Electrically releases hydraulic pressure allowing hook to extend via dashpot pressure and gravity.
  • EMERG DOWN - When handle is pulled and twisted counter-clockwise the hook is mechanically released for extension.

Hook Transition Light

Lights when hook position does not correspond to handle position. Will not turn off until fully extended and may remain illuminated when lowered at high speeds due to hook blowback.

Rounds Remaining Counter

Rounds remaining indicator for M-61A1 gun. Counts down from 676 but can be reset to desired readout with the knob on the right side.

Displays Control Panel

Displays Panel

đź’ˇ Image shows an F-14A with AN/ALR-45 having a third option on the HSD MODE and an ECM ORIDE which are not present in aircraft with the AN/ALR-67.

Control panel for front cockpit displays.

STEERING CMD selectors

Selects current source for steering commands. Selectors are mutually exclusive and turn to indicate the selected option.

  • TACAN - Selects TACAN as steering command source.
  • DEST - Selects RIO set waypoint as steering command source.
  • AWL/PCD - All-weather landing/precision course direction, selects glideslope guidance (ILS/ACLS) for landing or PCD for air-to-ground engagement directions as steering command source.
  • VEC - Vector, selects data link deviation steering as steering command source.
  • MAN - Manual, selects manually selected course and heading as steering command source.

MODE selectors

Selects display mode. Selectors are mutually exclusive and turn to indicate selected mode.

  • T.O. - Selects takeoff mode.
  • CRUISE - Selects cruise mode.
  • A/A - Selects air-to-air mode.
  • A/G - Selects air-to-ground mode.
  • LDG - Selects landing mode.

HUD DECLUTTER switch

Selects declutter mode for HUD.

HUD AWL switch

Selects which AWL information to display on HUD.

  • ILS - Selects ILS as source for AWL information.
  • ACL - Selects ACL as source for AWL information.

VDI MODE switch

Selects what to display on VDI.

  • TV - Displays video from TCS or LANTIRN on VDI.
  • NORM - Displays normal VDI display.

VDI AWL switch

Selects which AWL information to display on VDI.

  • ILS - Selects ILS as source for AWL information.
  • ACL - Selects ACL as source for AWL information.

HSD MODE switch

Selects what to display on HSD.

  • NAV - Navigational display, shows steering information depending on selected steering command source.
  • TID - Display repeating the RIO TID information. If RIO has TID set to TV the screen will be blank.
  • ECM - Display ECM information from AN/ALR-45 and AN/ALR-50. (F-14A with AN/ALR-45 only.)

POWER switches

Power switches for VDI, HUD, and HSD/ECMD.

PITCH LAD BRT knob

Controls brightness of pitch ladder on HUD.

HSD ECM ORIDE switch

Sets if the ECM is allowed to override the current display on the HSD if a threat is detected. ORIDE allows override and OFF disables it. Only present in aircraft with AN/ALR-45.

Elevation Lead Panel

Gun Elevation

Used to set gun elevation lead in mils for the manual A/A and A/G gun modes. Limits are -263 and +87 mils.

Right Side Console

Spoiler Failure Override

spoiler

Contains controls to override failed spoiler sections, allowing the rest to continue to work after a MASTER RESET.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1INBDInboard spoiler override switch.
2OUTBDOutboard spoiler override switch.

Both controls have two positions:

  • ORIDE - Overrides spoiler symmetry protection, allowing a functional spoiler to continue to operate after a MASTER RESET if one fails.
  • NORM - Normal (guarded position), in this mode, if a spoiler fails up the rest are commanded to drop and the SPOILERS light illuminates on the caution panel.

Liquid Oxygen Quantity Indicator

liquid oxygen

Contains an indicator showing the remaining quantity of liquid oxygen available. Graduated in 1-liter increments. Also has an OFF flag that is shown in case of power failure to the indicator. The indicator is tested through the INST mode on the MASTER TEST panel and should read 2 liters.

Compass Control Panel

compass control

The compass control panel contains controls for selecting compass mode when using AHRS.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1SYNC INDIndicator showing sync between AHRS gyro and magnetic azimuth detector. Used in SLAVED mode.
2N-S switchSwitch used to select which hemisphere aircraft is in for DG and SLAVED modes. Critical for correct earth-rate correction.
3LAT knobControl knob used to select latitude from 0Âş to 90Âş to allow for correct earth-rate correction in DG and SLAVED modes.
4Mode switchSelects source of AHRS heading information.
5HDG knob/buttonUsed in DG and SLAVED modes.

Compass Mode Switch

Selects source of AHRS heading information.

  • COMP - Compass, uses magnetic azimuth detector directly without stabilization from the directional gyro, used only for emergency operation and the displays automatically uses the manual magnetic variation.
  • SLAVED - Normal mode, uses the magnetic azimuth detector stabilized by the directional gyro.
  • DG - Directional gyro mode, uses only gyro and not the magnetic azimuth detector.

Compass HDG Knob

Used in DG and SLAVED modes.

In SLAVED mode it's used to sync the directional gyro with the magnetic azimuth detector and set magnetic heading on the BDHI. Button should be held until the synchronization indicator needle is over the null mark.

In DG mode the button is depressed and rotated to select desired heading on the BDHI.

The button can also be used to fast erect pitch and roll of the AHRS by depressing the button for up to 3 minutes. A new fast erect attempt can be done if a 1 minute wait is first observed.

ARA-63 Control Panel

ara-63

Panel used to control the AN/ARA-63 ILS (ICLS).

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1CHANNEL selectorSelector selecting one of 20 available ICLS channels.
2BIT buttonButton used to test AN/ARA-63, displays landing symbology on the HUD and VDI if set up for ILS.
3POWER switchON/OFF switch to energize the AN/ARA-63, switch must be pulled out to allow OFF position.
4Indicator lightLights to indicate AN/ARA-63 power on.

Caution - Advisory Indicator

caution

Main pilot caution panel.

No.IndicatorFunction
1PITCH STAB 1 & 2Caution lights indicating inoperative pitch channels.
2ROLL STAB 1 & 2Caution lights indicating inoperative roll channels (roll SAS failure).
3YAW STAB OPCaution light indicating one inoperative yaw channel.
4YAW STAB OUTCaution light indicating two inoperative yaw channels (yaw SAS failure).
5EMERG JETTCaution light indicating activation of EMERG STORES JETT button.
6LADDERCaution light indicating boarding ladder not correctly stowed.
7ECS TURBINENon-functional
8INLET ICECaution light indicating accumulation of ice on the ice detector in the left engine inlet.
9FLAPCaution light indicating failure in the flap system or airspeed greater than 225 knots indicated airspeed with flaps down.
10HZ TAIL AUTHCaution light indicating failure of lateral tail authority actuator (or CADC failure).
11RUDDER AUTHCaution light indicating failure of rudder authority actuators (or CADC failure).
12SPOILERSCaution light indicating spoiler system failure causing several or all spoilers to be locked down.
13AUTO PILOTCaution light indicating failure in the auto pilot system.
14L & R INLETCaution lights indicating AICS programmer and/or system failure.
15OIL PRESSCaution light indicating left or right engine oil pressure below 11 psi.
16BLEED DUCTCaution light indicating high-temperature air leak in the engine compartments.
17L & R RAMPSCaution lights indicating ramps not locked in position during critical flight conditions.
18START VALVECaution light indicating that the starter solenoid air valve is open after start. (F-14B only.)
19OXY LOWCaution light indicating low oxygen pressure or less than 2 liters of oxygen remaining. (F-14A only.)
20L & R ENG SECCaution lights indicating that respective engine AFTC is in secondary mode. (F-14B only.)
21L & R OVSP/VALVECaution lights indicating engine starter system malfunction or N1 rotor over-speed in respective engine. (F-14A only.)
22L & R GENCaution lights indicating respective engine generator is inoperative.
23CANOPYCaution light indicating that the canopy is not down and locked.
24BINGOCaution light indicating aircraft fuel quantity at or below set BINGO quantity.
25L & R OIL HOTCaution lights indicating that respective engine oil is too hot.
26CADCCaution light indicating failure in the air data computer.
27HYD PRESSCaution light indicating pressure in either engine hydraulic pump below 2,100 psi.
28L & R FUEL PRESSCaution lights indicating pressure below 9 psi in the respective engine fuel boost pump.
29L & R FUEL LOWCaution lights indicating fuel quantity below 1,000 pounds in aft and left or forward and right fuel feed group respectively.
30WING SWEEPAdvisory light indicating failure of a single channel in the wing-sweep system.
31RATSAdvisory light indicating RATS enabled. (F-14B only.)
32TRANS/RECTAdvisory light indicating failure in one or both transformer-rectifiers.
33MACH TRIMAdvisory light indicating failure in Mach trim actuator.
34WSHLD HOTAdvisory light indicating central windshield overheat.
35LAUNCH BARAdvisory light indicating either: Weight on wheels - Aircraft kneeled, either throttle below MIL and launch bar not up and locked. Weight off wheels - Launch bar not up and locked, launch bar not within 15Âş of center (cocked nose-gear), or nose strut not fully extended.
36INTEG TRIMAdvisory light indicating failure in the trim system or computer failure.
37AHRSAdvisory light indicating unreliable attitude or heading information from AHRS.
38ENG FIRE EXTAdvisory light indicating low pressure in the fire extinguishing container (90 psi below nominal 600 psi).
39AUX FIRE EXTAdvisory light indicating low pressure in the auxiliary fire extinguishing container (90 psi below nominal 600 psi).

Master Generator Control Panel

generator

Panel controlling left and right engine generator.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1L & R MASTER GEN switchSwitches controlling connection and test of respective generator. Switch needs to be lifted to move from OFF/RESET.
2EMERG switchGuarded switch controlling connection of the emergency generator to the essential buses. (Guarded position is NORM)

Master Generator Switch

Switches controlling connection and test of respective generator. Switch needs to be lifted to move from OFF/RESET.

  • NORM - Normal, activating and connecting the generator to the main buses.
  • OFF/RESET - Disconnects and deactivates generator and resets tripped protection circuits.
  • TEST - Activates generator but does not connect it to the main buses, for testing purposes.

Generator Emergency Switch

Guarded switch controlling connection of emergency generator to the essential buses. (Guarded position is NORM)

  • NORM - Normal, generator is automatically connected to essential buses if both main generators fail.
  • OFF/RESET - Disconnects the generator from the essential buses regardless of main generator status. Resets protection circuits.

Master Light Control Panel

master light

Master light control panel, controlling most lights in/on the aircraft.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1ANTI COLLISION switchON/OFF switch controlling anti-collision lights.
2POSITION switchSwitch controlling whether the wing or supplementary tail and position lights light up steadily or flash. With weight on wheels, the supplementary lights are always steady.
3TAIL POSITION switchSwitch controlling tail position lights, DIM and BRT (bright) settings available.
4WING POSITION switchSwitch controlling wing position lights, DIM and BRT settings available.
5ACM thumbwheelThumbwheel controlling ACM panel lights, 0 equals off, 1-14 sets the lights to an increasingly bright setting.
6INDEXER thumbwheelThumbwheel controlling AoA-indexer light intensity from 0-14.
7HOOK BYPASSSets AOA lights to either FIELD or CARRIER mode, with the switch in CARRIER and wheels down, the AOA lights flash if the hook isn’t down.
8TAXI switchSwitch controlling taxi lights.
9INSTRUMENT thumbwheelThumbwheel controlling instrument panel lights, 0 equals off, 1-14 sets the lights to an increasingly bright setting.
10WHITE FLOOD switchSwitch enabling white flood lights in the pilot cockpit. DIM and BRT settings available, switch locked to OFF unless pulled out.
11CONSOLE thumbwheelThumbwheel controlling console lights and red floodlights. 0 turns off both console and red floodlights, 1-14 sets the console lights to an increasingly bright setting.
12RED FLOOD switchSwitch controlling red instrument and console floodlights. BRT sets bright red instrument flood and console lights. MED sets red console floodlights and DIM sets dim red console floodlights.
13FORMATION thumbwheelThumbwheel controlling external formation lights. 0 equals off, 1-14 sets the lights to an increasingly bright setting.

Air Conditioning Control Panel

air condition

Panel controlling the environmental control system (ECS).

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1TEMP switchSwitch controlling the cabin and pressure suit temperature mode.
2CABIN PRESS switchSwitch controlling cabin pressurization. Locked to NORM until lifted.
3RAM AIR switchSelector switch used to modulate the amount of air from the ram air door after AIR SOURCE is set to RAM or OFF. Can be held to INCR (increase) or DECR (decrease), spring-loaded back to center.
4AIR SOURCE selectorsFive mutually exclusive air source selectors. Rotates to indicate selection.
5TEMP thumbwheelSelects cockpit and pressure suit air temperature. 0-14 is selectable with COOL and WARM placarded at each end stop. In auto 7 approximately corresponds to 21Âş C or 70Âş F. In manual the thumbwheel needs to be set for each variation in airspeed and altitude.

Temperature Switch

Switch controlling the cabin and pressure suit temperature mode.

  • AUTO - Temperature is automatically set from the TEMP thumbwheel regardless of airspeed and altitude.
  • MAN - Temperature is manually set from the TEMP thumbwheel but varies with airspeed and altitude and might need to be reset.

Cabin Pressure Switch

Switch controlling cabin pressurization. Locked to NORM until lifted.

  • NORM - Normal mode, cabin is pressurized at a level of 8,000 feet up to an aircraft level of 23,000 feet after which it maintains a 5 psi difference from outside atmosphere.
  • DUMP - Opens the cockpit dump valve depressurizing the cockpit.

Air Source Selectors

Five mutually exclusive air source selectors. Rotates to indicate selection.

  • RAM - Closes other air sources and opens ram air door which is combined with hot bleed air to supply all users.
  • L & R ENG - Selects either engine as the source for bleed air.
  • BOTH ENG - Selects both engines as source for bleed air. Normal position.
  • OFF - Closes all air sources but the ram air door. In this mode the ram air door can not supply pressurization or air conditioning. Inhibits gun firing.

Master Test Panel

master test

Panel controlling OBC and various onboard BITs in addition to the emergency flight hydraulic setting.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1MASTER TEST selectorSelector used to select and initiate OBC and BIT for various systems. Pull out to enable selection, push in at selected option to start test.
2GO/NO-GO lightsLights used in relevant tests to indicate GO or NO-GO conditions of those systems.
3EMERG FLT HYDSwitch controlling the emergency mode of the flight hydraulic system. Guarded to the AUTO (LOW) position.

đź’ˇ Specific tests are detailed in a later BIT chapter.

Master Test Selector

Selector used to select and initiate OBC and BIT for various systems. Pull out to enable selection, push in at selected option to start test.

  • OFF - Disables test functions.
  • LTS - Lights, tests cockpit indication lights.
  • FIRE DET/EXT - Fire detection system test.
  • INST - Instruments, tests various cockpit instrumentation.
  • OBC - On board checkout, starts OBC.
  • EMERG GEN - Tests emergency generator.
  • MACH LEV - Initiates dynamic MACH lever check. F-14A only.
  • WG SWP - Tests wing-sweep system.
  • FLT GR DN - Initiates ground check of auto throttle interlocks.
  • FLT GR UP - Tests external fuel tank pressurization.
  • D/L RAD - Tests the data link converter.
  • STICK SW - Checks left and right spoiler symmetry switches and 1-inch stick switches for yaw SAS.

Emergency Flight Hydraulic Switch

Switch controlling the emergency mode of the flight hydraulic system. Guarded to the AUTO (LOW) position.

  • HIGH - Activates the power module (high speed mode), bypassing flight and combined 2,100 psi switches.
  • LOW - Activates the backup power module bypassing flight and combined 2,100 psi switches.
  • AUTO (LOW) - Automatically activates LOW mode when both flight and combined system pressures are below 2,100 psi.

External Environmental Control Panel

external environment

Panel controlling windshield air and external anti-ice settings.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1WSHLD switchSwitch controlling external heating of the windshield by blasting the exterior with warm air. AIR enables the system. OFF disables it.
2ANTI-ICE switchControls engine, probe, and AICS anti-ice settings.

Anti-Ice Switch

Controls engine, probe and AICS anti-ice settings.

  • ORIDE/ON - Engages engine and probe anti-ice regardless of external conditions and enables the anti-ice setting in AICS.
  • AUTO/OFF - Automatically engages engine and probe anti-ice as needed, turns off AICS anti-ice.
  • OFF/OFF - Turns off both engine and probe anti-ice and AICS anti-ice.

Hydraulic Transfer Pump Switch

hydraulic transfer pump

Panel containing the control for the hydraulic transfer pump which equalizes pressure between the combined and flight hydraulic systems in case of a failure in one of them.

The HYD TRANSFER PUMP switch has two positions, SHUTOFF and NORMAL (guarded position).

The NORMAL position (also the standard setting) will have the hydraulic transfer pump pressurize a failed hydraulic system from the other, functioning system, when it drops below 2,100 psi.

The SHUTOFF position (which can be accessed by lifting the guard) is used to turn off the transfer pump in case it can’t supply enough pressure to the failed system as that would risk disabling the still operational system.

HUD-Video Control Panel

hud video control

Control panel for the CTVS system which records the HUD when activated.

đź’ˇ Not implemented in DCS.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1HUD CAM(E)RA switchSelects when recording is enabled.
2Switch 2 & 3.VTR - Video tape recorder.

HUD Camera Switch

Selects when recording is enabled.

  • TRG - Trigger, records while the second (firing) detent on the stick trigger is depressed.
  • NORMAL - Records while the first detent on the stick trigger is depressed.
  • OFF - Disables power to the CTVS.
  • RUN - Records continuously

Canopy Defog/Cabin Air Lever

canopy defog

The canopy air diffuser lever controls the flow of cabin air. The normal position, CABIN AIR, directs 70% of the conditioned air through the cockpit air diffusers and 30% through the canopy air diffusers.

The CANOPY DEFOG position directs all airflow through the canopy air diffusers for canopy defog.

Canopy Control Handle

canopy handle

The canopy control handle controls canopy operation and is located on the right cockpit wall. The handle is mounted downwards beneath the box containing the handle mechanism and the handle position texts. The canopy control handle is duplicated in the RIO cockpit.

ControlFunction
BOOSTCloses the canopy using boost, used during cold weather or with a strong headwind.
CLOSECloses the canopy, default position during flight.
HOLDHolds the canopy at the current position for any position other than closed.
OPENOpens the canopy.
AUX OPENAllows manual opening of the canopy if system pressure is too low.

RIO Cockpit Overview

Layout

RIO Cockpit Layout

Left Side Console

G-Valve Button

g-valve

Pressed to test inflation of g-suit.

Oxygen-Vent Airflow Control Panel

oxygen-vent

Controls ventilation airflow to pressure suit or seat cushions and oxygen to RIO mask.

No.ControlFunction
1VENT AIRFLOW dialUsed to control airflow through the pressure suit or seat cushions if no pressure suit is worn.
2OXYGEN switchSwitch with ON/OFF positions. Controls oxygen flow to the mask.

Data Stowage Compartment

data stowage

The data stowage panel is a small compartment for equipment storage and mission briefing materials etc.

TACAN Control Panel

tacan

TACAN control panel letting the RIO control TACAN if in command of it.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1Dual rotary switchOuter dial selects first two digits and inner dial selects last digit for TACAN channel selection.
2GO & NO-GO lightsLights indicating result of TACAN BIT.
3BIT buttonButton initiating TACAN BIT.
4MODE switchesSwitches mode for TACAN operation and selects X or Y channels. INVERSE mode not functional.
5VOL knobVolume control knob for TACAN audio to RIO.
6Mode knobSelects TACAN mode.

The following modes are available:

  • OFF - TACAN is off.
  • REC - Receive only.
  • T/R - Transmit and receive, enables range readout.
  • A/A - Air to air TACAN mode.
  • BCN - Beacon TACAN mode.

đź’ˇ Beacon mode is not functional.

Communication/TACAN Command Panel

Panel

Panel controlling ICS radio settings and crewmember in control of TACAN.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1XMTR SEL switchSelects which VHF/UHF radio the RIO PTT keys.
2V/UHF 2 ANT switchSelects which antenna the V/UHF 2 uses.
3TACAN CMD switchSets crewmember in command of the TACAN. Also indicates current setting.
4UHF 1 VOL knobVolume knob controlling RIO headset volume of UHF 1 audio.
5KY MODE switchFunctional only with KY-58 installed. The simulated Tomcat variant is equipped with the KY-28, so this switch is non-functional.

XMTR SEL Switch

Selects which VHF/UHF radio the RIO PTT keys.

  • UHF 1 - Selects the ARC-159 UHF radio.
  • BOTH - Selects both radios.
  • V/UHF 2 - Selects the ARC-182 VHF/UHF radio.

V/UHF 2 ANT Switch

Selects which antenna the V/UHF 2 uses.

  • UPR - Selects the upper antenna.
  • LWR - Selects the lower antenna.

V/UHF 2 (AN/ARC-182) Radio

arc-182

V/UHF radio 2. Radio and controls.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1VOL knobControls volume of V/UHF 2 audio to RIO headset.
2SQL switchON/OFF switch enabling squelch.
3Frequency select switchesToggle switches selecting set frequency.
4FREQ/(CHAN) displayReadout display showing selected frequency or channel.
5UHF switchSelector switch selecting modulation in use. Operational in the 225.000 to 399.00 MHz band.
6BRT knobKnob controlling display brightness.
7MODE knobMODE selector knob controlling V/UHF 2 radio mode.
8Frequency mode knobOuter dial on the knob, selects frequency mode.
9CHAN SEL knobInner dial on the knob, selects preset channel to use.

đź’ˇ Have Quick anti-jam functionality is not implemented in DCS.

KY-28 Control Panel

ky-28

No.ControlFunction
1ZEROIZE switchSwitch/guard used to zeroize KY-28.
2Power-mode switchSwitch selecting KY-28 mode of operation.
3Radio select switchSwitch selecting which radio to use with KY-28.

Radar Beacon Control Panel

beacon

Panel controlling AN/APN-154 radar beacon.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1MODE selectorSelector switch controlling beacon mode of operation.
2ACLS TEST buttonButton with green light used to indicate operation or test. When pressed with MODE in ACLS illumination indicates a successful test. The light also flashes when detecting an AN/SPN-42 radar sweeping past and illuminates when that radar has locked on for ACLS guidance.
3PWR switchSwitch controlling beacon power.

Radar Beacon Mode Selector

Selector switch controlling beacon mode of operation.

  • SINGLE - Enables beacon response to single pulse codes.
  • DOUBLE - Enables beacon response to set double pulse code.
  • ACLS - Enables augmenter operation for ACLS. Required for CATCC radar lockon for ACLS.

Radar Beacon Power Switch

Switch controlling beacon power.

  • PWR - Enables beacon and all replies depending on MODE selector.
  • STBY - Used to warmup system, also enables ACLS replies if the MODE selector is set to ACLS.
  • OFF - Beacon off.

Liquid Cooling Control Panel

liquid cooling

LIQ COOLING switch controlling the liquid cooling system for the AWG-9 and AIM-54. The AWG-9 circuit can be enabled independently of the AIM-54. This switch needs to be enabled for the respective system before AWG-9 operation or AIM-54 missile preparation.

ICS Control Panel

ics

Control panel for ICS.

No.ControlFunction
1VOL knobVolume control knob for intercommunication audio from the pilot to the RIO.
2Amplifier selection knobKnob selecting which amplifier to use for the RIO’s headset audio.
3ICS switchSelects ICS function.

Amplifier Selection Knob

Knob selecting which amplifier to use for the RIO's headset audio.

  • B/U - Backup amplifier.
  • NORM - Normal amplifier.
  • EMER - Emergency amplifier. Uses pilot's amplifier and his volume settings. Disallows listening to audio only available to RIO.

ICS Switch

Selects ICS function.

  • RADIO OVERRIDE - Makes ICS audio override radio audio.
  • HOT MIC - Allows talking to the pilot without pressing the PTT. Also allows the groundcrew to talk to the crew via the external interphone.
  • COLD MIC - Allows talking to the pilot only while the PTT is pressed.

Eject Command Lever

eject command

A pilot initiated ejection will always eject both crew members. The EJECT CMD lever controls what happens when the RIO ejects: In PILOT mode (lever forward), only the RIO will be ejected. In MCO mode, both pilot and RIO initiated ejection will eject both crew members.

Sensor Control Panel

radar ir control

Control panel for AWG-9 scan settings, the TCS, and the airborne video tape recorder.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1STAB switchSelector switch controlling ground stabilization of the radar.
2AZ CTR knobAzimuth control knob selecting the center of azimuth scan area.
3EL CTR knobElevation control knob selecting the center of elevation scan area.
4VSL switchSelector switch spring-loaded to center which enables VSL. VSL HI or LO can be selected.
5AZ SCAN knobAzimuth scan knob selecting azimuth scan volume.
6EL BARS knobElevation bar knob selecting the number of bars to scan in elevation.
7TCS TRIM knobsTrim knobs used to calibrate TCS video in azimuth and elevation.
8SLAVE switchSelector switch selecting which sensor is slaved to the other.
9ACQ switchSelector switch selecting acquisition mode for the TCS. AUTO, MAN or AUTO SRCH.
10FOV switchSelector switch selecting field of view for the TCS, WIDE or NAR (narrow).
11MODE knobKnob controlling what the AVTR records.
12MIN REMAIN displayCounter showing minutes remaining for the AVTR.
13RECORD switchSelector switch controlling the AVTR. OFF/STBY/ON.
14Indicator lightsLights indicating AVTR operation. STBY, EOT (end of tape), and REC.

Computer Address Panel

cap

The CAP is used to enter data into the WCS. The MESSAGE indicator drum and buttons work similarly to the buttons on MFDs on newer aircraft.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1CLEAR buttonButton clearing current TID buffer without inserting entered data.
2ENTER buttonButton inserting current data from TID buffer into the WCS.
3Prefix & Numerical buttonsNumerical buttons with additional prefix selection functionality.
4MESSAGE button switchesButtons used to select functions from the MESSAGE drum.
5MESSAGE indicator drumIndicator drum used to indicate currently available MESSAGE functionality.
6PRGM RESTRT buttonButton used to restart the program running in the WCS.
7CATEGORY knobSelector knob selecting current category in use on the MESSAGE indicator drum.
8TUNE DSBLNon-functional.

đź’ˇ All of the buttons have indicator lights indicating operation depending on function.

Left Vertical Console

Armament Panel

armament panel

Main armament control panel in the RIO cockpit.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1WPN TYPE selectorSelector wheel selecting type of weapon used for WCS A/G calculation.
2ATTK MODE knobKnob selecting which A/G attack mode to use.
3ELEC FUSE knobKnob selecting electric fuse setting for A/G ordnance.
4A/G GUN switchSelector switch controlling gun mode in A/G master mode. MIXED enables the gun in addition to selected A/G ordnance.
5QTY selectorsSelector wheels controlling quantity of A/G ordnance (including rockets) to be released.
6INTERVAL selectorsSelector wheels controlling interval between weapons release in ripple delivery mode in milliseconds.
7Station 6 select switchSwitch used to select station 6 for jettison or weapons A/G delivery.
8A/A LAUNCH buttonButton used for RIO launch of AIM-7 or AIM-54, hot trigger is indicated by button illumination.
9MSL SPD GATE knobKnob controlling the position of missile speed gate.
10Station 8 select switchSwitch used to select station 8 for jettison or weapons A/G delivery. B selects the lower pylon for release or jettison, the SW option is non-functional.
11MSL OPTIONS switchSelector switch used to activate AIM-7 pulse doppler mode or AIM-54 active launch mode.
12Station 5 select switchSwitch used to select station 5 for jettison or weapons A/G delivery.
13NEXT LAUNCH buttonButton used by RIO to select a hooked target as the next target to launch at in TWS.
14Station 4 select switchSwitch used to select station 4 for jettison or weapons A/G delivery.
15Station 1 select switchSwitch used to select station 1 for jettison or weapons A/G delivery. B selects the lower pylon for release or jettison, the SW option is non-functional.
16TANK JETT station 7 switchSwitch selecting station 7 for tank jettison.
17TANK JETT station 2 switchSwitch selecting station 2 for tank jettison.
18Station 3 select switchSwitch used to select station 3 for jettison or weapons A/G delivery.
19JETT OPTIONS switchSwitch selecting whether to jettison only WPNS (weapons) or MER/TER (weapon racks) in addition to weapons. Non-functional in modeled F-14.
20SEL JETT switchSelector switch used to jettison selected stations in normal (JETT) mode or AUX (backup) mode. The AUX position is guarded.
21MECH FUSE switchSelector switch used to enable and set which mechanical fuse to use for A/G ordnance.
22DLVY MODE switchesTwo selector switches used to select A/G delivery mode. One switch controls whether to release in singles or pairs and the other sets whether to release once or multiple times according to settings.

Left Instrument Panel

Servopneumatic Altimeter

altimeter

Control and indicator for the servopneumatic altimeter.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1Altimeter readoutDisplays altitude digitally on three drums showing 10,000, 1,000, and 100 of feet respectively. It also displays altitude on a pointer on a circular scale indicating 100’s of feet.
2Baroset knobSets local pressure in inches of mercury (in.Hg). Only used locally on the altimeter readout, all other digital indicators (via CADC) use a set 29.92 in.Hg value.
3Local Barometric PressureIndicates barometric pressure setting, also called the Kollsman Window.
4Mode switchThree-position switch, spring-loaded to return from RESET. If power and altitude data from CADC are present, the switch can be held in RESET for 3 seconds to allow normal (servoed) mode of operation. If set to STBY or power or CADC data is absent for more than 3 seconds the system switches to backup (pressure) mode.
5STBY flagRed flag reading STBY that appears if the system is in backup (stand-by) mode.

Airspeed Mach Indicator

mach

Indicated airspeed and Mach number display.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1Airspeed dialShows indicated airspeed on three scales, two for indicated airspeed and one moving for Mach number.
2Indicated airspeed scale (outer)Used to indicate indicated airspeed up to 200 knots.
3Indicated airspeed scale (inner)Used to indicate indicated airspeed from 200 knots to 850 knots. Covered by the airspeed dial until relevant.
4Mach number scaleMoving scale used to indicate Mach number. Moved to show the correct Mach number relative to indicated airspeed.
5Indicated airspeed index pointerCan be set to the desired indicated airspeed.
6Mach number index pointerCan be set to the desired Mach number. Not visible in image.
7Safe Mach number index pointerShows safe Mach number calculated by the CADC. Not visible in the image.
8Index knobKnob with a pull-out and push-in position. One sets the indexer for indicated airspeed and the other for Mach number.

Standby Attitude Indicator

standby attitude

Standalone standby attitude indicator.

An OFF flag is visible on the left side when caged or when un-powered.

The knob below and to the right of the indicator cages/un-cages the indicator and allows trim to correct pitch. In the pulled-out position, the indicator is caged. When pushed in, un-cages the indicator and allows pitch trim by turning the knob.

UHF Remote Indicator

back remote

Remote indicator displaying set frequency or channel on UHF 1 (AN/ARC-159). Displays a readout of the frequency or channel set for the UHF 1 radio.

The TEST button initiates a test for the indicator, no fault results in a readout of 888.888.

The DIM knob controls display brightness.

Center Panel

Chaff/Flare Dispense Switches

CM Hats

Two switch hats on the center RIO hand hold used to initiate release of countermeasures. The switches are mirrored in regards to functionality.

  • Up: Initiates a single chaff release.
  • Down: Initiates set chaff release program.
  • Inboard: Initiates set jammer release program.
  • Outboard: Initiates set flare release program.

Detail Data Display Panel

DDD

Main radar control panel.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1TGTS switchSwitch selecting target size for missile launch zones, WCS track calculations as well as missile ATC calculation.
2MLC switchSwitch selecting MLC mode of operation.
3AGC switchSwitch controlling AGC speed. Currently non-functional in DCS.
4PARAMP switchSwitch controlling the parametric amplification. Currently non-functional in DCS.
5PULSE VIDEO knobKnob controlling video strength of pulse video on the DDD. No effect on pulse doppler video.
6Radar track indicator lightsIndicator lights indicating radar tracking in the STT modes.
7RANGE displayRotary drum indicator displaying currently selected radar range. Can also be blank if no range scale is used on the DDD.
8RANGE buttonsButtons used to select radar range.
9BRIGHT knobKnob used to control the brightness of the DDD by means of a polarized filter in front of the DDD.
10IR AUDIO THRLD knobKnob used to control IR AUDIO threshold, non-functional with TCS.
11IR AUDIO VOL knobKnob used to control IR AUDIO volume, non-functional with TCS.
12IR GAIN knobKnob used to control IR GAIN, non-functional with TCS.
13XMTR CHAN wheel12-position wheel used to control AWG-9 operating frequency. Currently non-functional in DCS.
14MSL CHAN wheel6-position wheel used to control missile channel used by AIM-7 or AIM-54. Currently non-functional in DCS.
15DISPLAY buttonsButtons used to control what to display on the DDD. IR button non-functional with TCS.
16WCS MODE buttonsButtons used to select the current AWG-9 operating mode.
17WCS MODE displayRotary drum indicator displaying current WCS mode.
18Vc switchSwitch used to select different closing velocity scales on the DDD in PD modes.
19ERASE knobKnob used to control the intensity of the ERASE beam on the DDD, controlling how quick the image on the DDD fades.
20PULSE GAIN knobKnob used to control the gain of the AWG-9 in pulse mode, normally left in detent unless needed because of clutter or jamming.
21ASPECT switchSwitch used to control the rate region covered by the doppler filters in pulse doppler modes and if to use edge or centroid tracking in pulse mode. These settings correspond to expected target aspect.
22EL indicatorMeter with indicator needles indicating sensor elevation. Left indicator shows current actual radar antenna elevation. The right indicates commanded radar elevation while RDR is selected on HCU and TCS elevation while IR/TV is selected.
23CCM MODES buttonsButtons used to set AWG-9 functionality countering jamming targets. Currently non-functional in DCS.
24JAM/JET knobControl knob used to set the threshold at which a radar return is considered a jamming target. Currently non-functional in DCS.
25ACM THRLD knobControl knob used to control radar sensitivity level at close ranges. Usually set automatically with the knob in the detent position.
26PD THRLD knobsControl knobs used to set pulse doppler video threshold in the CLEAR (upper half of DDD) region and in the CLUTTER (lower half of the DDD) region.
27DDD radar displayMain AWG-9 radar display.

Radar Track Indicator Lights

Indicator lights indicating radar tracking in the STT modes.

  • ANT TRK - Indicates the radar is tracking the target's angle.
  • RDROT - Indicates the target is within the range or rate gate and being tracked.
  • JAT - Indicates the radar is tracking a jamming source's angle.
  • IROT - Indication of TCS angle tracking, called IROT as this was originally used for the IRST in the early-A Variant of the Tomcat.

Center Console

Tactical Information Display (TID)

tid

Tactical information display and corresponding and navigational controls.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1INS status indicatorIndicator light showing the status of the INS during alignment. STBY indicates power applied but not aligned. READY indicates minimum launch criteria for AIM-54. Both lights turn off when INS mode is selected. Can otherwise indicate faults.
2CONTRAST knobControl knob that controls the contrast of TCS video.
3DATA READOUT drumReadout drum indicating the source of the data displayed on the TID readouts. Might be blank for sources not having their own text on the drum.
4BRIGHT knobControl knob controlling TID brightness.
5STEERING indicator drumReadout drum indicating current steering information being displayed to the pilot.
6DEST selectorSelector knob controlling what destination to use for the navigation destination mode.
7CLSN buttonButton with indication used to select collision steering towards a tracked target or TWS centroid.
8DISPLAY buttonsButtons controlling what elements are shown on the TID. Contains indicator lights showing selection.
9RANGE selectorSelector switch selecting the current scale of the TID. Corresponds to the distance the diameter represents.
10TID MODE selectorSelector switch controlling current TID presentation.
11TRACK HOLD buttonButton extending the amount of time before a track is dropped after the last radar observation to two minutes. Normal time is 14 seconds.
12NAV MODE selectorSelector switch controlling navigation reference systems. Controls which system is in use and also alignment of the INS.

DISPLAY buttons

Buttons controlling what elements are shown on the TID. Contains indicator lights showing selection.

  • RID DISABLE - Not implemented.
  • ALT NUM - Toggles display of altitude numeric on the left side of the track symbols.
  • SYM ELEM - Toggles display of all supplementary elements of target tracks. Deselection causes only the target track dot to be shown.
  • DATA LINK - Toggles display of all data link tracks.
  • JAM STROBE - Toggles display of jamming strobes.
  • NON-ATTK - Toggles display of non-attackable tracks.
  • VEL VECTOR - Toggles display of velocity vectors on tracks.
  • LAUNCH ZONE - Toggles display of missile launch zones on tracks. Replaces velocity vectors if applicable. Automatically activated by WCS 60 seconds prior to maximum missile launch range.

Hand Control Unit (HCU)

hcu

Main radar and TCS control stick.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1IR/TV switchSwitch controlling TCS power. Enables selection of OFF/STBY and ON.
2IR/TV overtemp indicatorLight indicating the presence of an overtemperature condition in the TCS.
3LIGHT TEST buttonButton allowing a test of all AWG-9 lights.
4PWR RESET indicatorLight indicating one or more inoperative secondary power supplies.
5PWR RESET buttonButton allowing a reset of inoperative secondary power supplies. If the condition triggering the in-operational state remains the affected supplies will remain in-operational.
6WCS indicatorLight indicating selection of STBY or XMT with the radar not yet timed out or selection of XMT with radar transmission remaining off.
7WCS switchSwitch controlling WCS power (computer and radar). STBY turns on power to the WCS and begins radar warmup without transmission. XMT enables radar transmission if the radar is ready. Display warmup time is 30 seconds, radar warmup is 3 minutes.
8MRL buttonButton selecting manual rapid lockon mode. Overrides all operational modes except PLM and VSL.
9OFFSET buttonButton used to offset TID to hooked location on the display.
10ELEV thumbwheelThumbwheel used to fine-tune elevation of the radar antenna for STT lockon acquisition.
11HCU triggerUsed to select and trigger different functions in the WCS depending on current mode and HCU function. First detent is HALF ACTION, second detent is FULL ACTION. Examples of use are target acquisition and symbol hook.
12Hand control function buttonsButtons with an indication used to control the function of the HCU stick. Mutually exclusive.

Hand Control Function Buttons

Buttons with indication used to control function of HCU stick. Mutually exclusive.

  • IR/TV - Selects control of TCS azimuth, elevation and tracking. Enables display of TCS elevation on right elevation indicator on DDD.
  • RDR - Selects control of radar antenna for STT lock-on and return to search if already in STT. Enables display of currently commanded radar antenna elevation on right elevation indicator on DDD.
  • DDD CURSOR - Selects control of DDD cursor used to mark a geographical position while in pulse radar mode.
  • TID CURSOR - Selects control of TID cursor used to hook (select) symbols on the TID.

Footwells

ICS Foot Button

left

RIO left footrest containing ICS PTT for COLD MIC intercommunication.

Mic Foot Button

right

RIO right footrest containing PTT for transmission on UHF 1, V/UHF 2, or both depending on ICS setting.

Right Instrument Panel

Clock

clock

Mechanical wind-up clock.

The knob on the lower left corner is used to wind up the clock by turning it clockwise and pulling it out and turning it to set the hour and minute hands.

The control on the upper right corner is used to start, stop, and reset a 1-hour elapsed time counter.

ALR-67 Indicator

alr-67

Indicator showing emitters detected by the ALR-67 RWR (radar warning receiver) set.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1System status circle, area IUpper left quadrant of 1. Shows symbol indicating type of threats selected to be shown.
2System status circle, area IIUpper right quadrant of 1. Indicates if limited mode is selected.
3System status circle, area IIILower half of 1. Displays failure codes and if offset display is selected.
4Non-lethal bandDisplays emitters not a direct threat to own aircraft, either because deemed out of range or lacking weaponry.
5Lethal bandDisplays threats that are deemed within range and capable of engaging own aircraft but not currently doing so.
6Critical bandDisplays direct threats to own aircraft. Systems capable of engaging own aircraft and showing current intent of doing so.
7INT knobIntensity/brightness knob. Controls the brightness of the display.

System Status Circle

The upper left quadrant (Area I) can show the following symbols:

  • N - Normal
  • I - AI, airborne interceptors prioritized.
  • A - AAA, anti-air artillery prioritized.
  • U - Unknown emitters prioritized.
  • F - Friendly emitters shown in addition to other threats.

The upper right quadrant (Area II) can either be blank (limited mode not selected) or show L if selected. Limited mode will only show the 6 highest prioritized threats on the display.

The lower half shows system status codes:

  • Blank - No failure detected and offset not selected.
  • B - BIT failure.
  • T - Thermal overload.
  • O - Offset display selected. Threats will be separated to allow readout of overlapping symbols. Bearing accuracy degraded for displaced threats.

Fuel Quantity Totalizer

fuel

Total fuel quantity readout, shows total fuel quantity in all aircraft tanks.

Threat Advisory and Master Caution Lights

threat master

Master caution light and various ECM and IFF related advisory and warning lights.

ALR-67 Caution Lights

No.IndicatorFunction
1MASTER CAUTION light and buttonFlashes to indicate status change on the RIO caution/advisory panel. Press to reset and turn off light until the next event.
2IFFAdvisory light indicating received mode 4 interrogation without own system generating a reply.
3RCVAdvisory light indicating ALQ-126 is receiving a threat identification signal.
4XMITAdvisory light indicating ALQ-126 is transmitting.
5SAMWarning light, steady illumination when detecting lockon from a SAM tracking radar. Flashes when a missile launch is detected.
6AAAWarning light, steady illumination when detecting lockon from a AAA tracking radar. Flashes when AAA engagement is detected.
7CWWarning light indicating detection of a continuous wave emitter.
8AIWarning light, steady illumination when detecting lockon from an airborne interceptor radar.

ALR-45 Caution Lights

No.IndicatorFunction
1SA TRKLights steady whenever a SAM tracking radar is received.
2SA2SA-2 warning - Lights steady for MA (missile alert), flashes for ML (missile launch).
3SA3/NISA-3 / SA-N-1 warning - Lights steady for MA (missile alert), flashes for ML (missile launch).
4SA4SA-4 warning - Lights steady for MA (missile alert), flashes for ML (missile launch).
5AI/AAALights steady whenever an airborne interceptor and/or an ambiguous AI/AAA radar is received.
6RECLights steady whenever ALQ-100 is receiving signal identified as threat.
7IFFAdvisory light indicating received mode 4 interrogation without own system generating reply.
8SA6SA-6 warning - Lights steady for MA (missile alert), flashes for ML (missile launch).
9AILights steady whenever an airborne interceptor radar is received.
10REPLights steady whenever ALQ-100 is transmitting.

Bearing Distance Heading Indicator (BDHI)

bdhi

Display indicating azimuth and bearing information.

No.IndicatorFunction
1No. 2 bearing pointerIndicates magnetic course to tuned TACAN station.
2Compass roseShows current aircraft magnetic heading.
3No. 1 bearing pointerIndicates bearing to tuned UHF/ADF station.
4Distance counterIndicates slant range to tuned TACAN station in nautical miles. (Not visible in this image.)

Canopy Jettison Handle

canopy jettison

Handle used to manually jettison canopy.

Right Knee Panel

Caution-Advisory Panel

caution advisory

No.IndicatorFunction
1C&D HOTCaution light indicating overheat in RIO controls and displays.
2CABIN PRESSCaution light indicating cabin pressure is too low.
3FUEL LOWCaution light indicating fuel below 1,000 pounds in either aft and left or forward and right fuel feed groups.
4OXY LOWCaution light indicating oxygen quantity is below 2 liters or pressure too low.
5CANOPYCaution light indicating canopy not down and locked.
6FUSE HVCaution light indicating AWW-4 electric fuse inoperative.
7RDR ENABLEDCaution light indicating that radar operation with weight on wheels is possible.
8COOLING AIRAdvisory light indicating overtemperature condition in the electronic forced air cooling system.
9MSL CONDAdvisory light indicating overtemperature or under-pressure in missile coolant flow, either of which shuts down the missile coolant pump. Can also indicate that the LIQ COOLING switch is not in the AWG-9/AIM-54 position with the WCS in STBY or ON when the Phoenix fairings are installed.
10AWG-9 CONDAdvisory light indicating overheat or overpressure in the AWG-9 coolant flow or that the overtemperature switch has shut down the coolant pump.
11NAV COMPAdvisory light indicating failure in the INS or CSDC with the NAV MODE switch in INS.
12FILM LOWAdvisory light indicating low remaining quantity of mission recorder film.
13IMUAdvisory light indicating a failure in the inertial measuring unit or that the navigation system is in AHRS/AM mode.
14AHRSAdvisory light indicating that the attitude or heading information from the AHRS is unreliable.

Right Vertical Console

Electronic Countermeasures Display (ECMD)

mdi

Display used for navigational information and AN/ALR-45 ECM (only in F-14A with AN/ALR-45).

Has a brightness control knob, test button and a BIT indicator showing the status of the display (solid black when operational, showing white flags when indicating a fail condition).

Right Side Console

Radar Warning Receiver Panel

rwr

No.ControlFunction
1PWR switchSwitch controlling power to the ALR-67.
2DISPLAY TYPE selectorSelector switch controlling what type of threats to prioritize and display.
3MODE switchSwitch spring-loaded to center (OFF) position. Can be held to OFST (offset) and LMT (limit) position to enable respective function while held.
4TEST switchSwitch spring-loaded to center. Momentary selection of BIT indicates BIT in ALR-67. Selection of SPL (special) while BIT page 1 is displayed shows the special BIT status page while held and then for 3 seconds when released.
5VOL knobVolume knob controlling ALR-67 audio to RIO.

Digital Data Indicator (DDI)

ddi

Digital data indicator used to display commands received via the data link.

No.IndicatorFunction
1AFT VECAircraft is being vectored to approach target from the rear hemisphere.
2COL VECAircraft is being vectored on a collision course to target.
3NO MSGNo message at this time, indicates presence of data link communication while not receiving a command.
4TO WAY PTProceed to the point being indicated by target information.
5HANDOVERTDS is handing own aircraft over to another control center.
6ORBITAssume orbit at present position maintaining maximum endurance.
7CHALNGEIntercept and visually identify the target.
8ARM 1Intercept and destroy the indicated hostile target using AIM-54.
9ARM 2Intercept and destroy the indicated hostile target using AIM-7.
10ARM 3Intercept and destroy the indicated hostile target using AIM-9.
11NOT CMDIgnore currently received heading, speed, and altitude. Also means valid command BIT not yet available.
12FRE LANFree to attack the most suitable target.
13DIS’GAGECease fire.
14ABORTAbort action.
15BEAC ONEnable APN-154 tracking beacon.
16BEAC DUBSet APN-154 to double-pulse mode.
17DROPCommand to release a weapon in data link A/G attack, manually or automatically if in data link attack mode.
18BEAC OFFTurn off APN-154 tracking beacon.
19RET BASEReturn to the indicated home base.
20WAVE OFFWave off, automatic AFCS disengagement.
21LAND CHECKCATCC has a data link channel available for AFCS, complete landing checklist.
22ACL BEACDirected by carrier to enable APN-154 beacon.
23ACL RDYACL has locked onto aircraft APN-154 beacon and is transmitting zero pitch and bank signals. Glideslope information is now available to the pilot.
24A/P CPLRACL is ready to take control of the aircraft for the ACL approach, autopilot should be engaged.
2510 SECIndicates 10 seconds to the next action or waypoint. In ACL indicates that the ship's motion is taken into account for ACL.
26ADJ A/CIndication from the control station of another aircraft near own aircraft.
27VOICEIndicates ACL not available, switch to voice procedures.
28TILTIndicates no data link message received in the last 10 seconds. In ACL indicates no messages in the last 2 seconds, will disengage AFCS.
29CMD CHGIndicates imminent or recently changed command instructions.
30ALT CHGIndicates imminent or recently changed altitude command.
31MON ALTMessage indicating altitude command not being followed with enough precision.
32MANUALIndicates autopilot should not be engaged.
33SPD CHGIndicates imminent or recently changed speed command.
34MON SPDMessage indicating speed command not being followed with enough precision.
35CMD CTRLIndicates aircraft under data link control for landing.
36CHG CHNCommand to change data link channel.
37HDG CHNIndicates imminent or recently changed heading command.
38CANC RPYTDS has canceled reply messages.
39FWD VECAircraft is being vectored to approach the target from the front hemisphere.

đź’ˇ The majority of the DDI lights depend on data link reply messages not currently modelled in DCS.

DECM Control Panel

decm

Control panel for the DECM jammer (AN/ALQ-126).

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1STANDBY lightOrange light indicating warm-up when the system is placed in STBY. Goes out after complete warm-up. Indication during test or operation indicates a fault has occurred.
2DECM selectorDECM power/mode switch. Used to control power and function of DECM.
3AUDIO knobVolume knob, sets audio volume from AN/ALQ-126 to RIO headset.

The following modes can be selected:

  • OFF - Turns off power to AN/ALQ-126.
  • STBY - Standby, applies power to warmup system.
  • TEST/HOLD 3 SEC - Should be held in this position for 3 seconds to prepare for system test.
  • TEST/ACT - Starts AN/ALQ-126 BIT, used after 3 seconds in TEST/HOLD 3 SEC position.
  • REC - Receive, enables AN/ALQ-126 to receive and analyze threat signal. Detected missile launch may force the system into repeat mode.
  • RPT - Repeat, enables AN/ALQ-126 to use programmed responses to received threat signals.

datalink

Control panel for the data link.

No.ControlFunction
1Transmission mode switchSets data link transmission mode.
2Frequency select wheelsThumbwheels used to set data link frequency.
3Data link power switchEnables power to data link, also used to set AUX (auxiliary) mode.

The following transmission modes are available:

  • TEST - Starts system test
  • NORM - Normal operational mode
  • A/J - Anti-jam mode

datalink antenna

Panel used to control data link alignment, reply, and antenna.

No.ControlFunction
1ANTENNA switchSwitch selecting antenna in use for UHF 1 and data link.
2REPLY switchUsed to transmit data link reply, transmits in NORM (normal), disabled in CANC (cancelled).
3MODE switchSwitch spring-loaded to TAC but held by solenoid. Enables data link alignment and waypoint update.
4ADDRESS thumbwheelSets what data link address own aircraft uses. (Sets two least significant digits, others set by ground crew.)

The following modes can be used:

  • CAINS/WAYPT - Enables data link alignment and waypoint update.
  • TAC - Enables manual selection of frequencies, stops data link alignment.

AN/ALE-39 Control Panel

ale39

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1Inventory countersAnalog counters used to indicate remaining quantities of loaded countermeasures. Are manually set by pushing in and rotating the knob below each counter.
2PWR/MODE switchSwitch enabling power and selecting the operational mode of the AN/ALE-39.
3SALVO FLARES switchEnables parallel rapid firing of all flares. Switch needs to be lifted to move to the ON position.
4FLARE MODE switchSwitch selecting operational mode for launching flares. Also controls what countermeasure the DLC button on the pilot stick ejects while airborne.
5Countermeasure release switchesSwitches spring-loaded to center which controls respective countermeasure release actuation.

AN/ALE-39 Power Mode

Switch enabling power and selecting operational mode of the AN/ALE-39.

  • AUTO(CHAFF)/MAN - Allows manual release of countermeasures and automatic release of chaff by threat detection in the ecm systems.
  • MAN - Allows manual release of countermeasures.
  • OFF - Disables AN/ALE-39.

Flare Mode switch

Switch selecting operational mode for launching flares. Also controls what countermeasure the DLC button on the pilot stick ejects while airborne.

  • MULT - Multiple, each flare ejection command will eject one flare from each launcher subsection loaded with flares. Affects both manual and programmed releases.
  • NORM - Normal, each flare ejection command will eject one flare in total. Affects both manual and programmed releases.
  • PILOT - Enables the pilot to manually release flares with the pilot stick DLC button, the other positions releases chaff with DLC button depression.

Countermeasure Release switches

Switches spring-loaded to center which controls respective countermeasure release actuation.

  • PRGM - Program, switch needs to be lifted to enter this position, momentary actuation initiates programmed release.
  • STBY - No release.
  • SGL - Single, momentary actuation releases a single countermeasure.

AA1 Control Panel

aa1

AN/APX-76 interrogator control panel.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1M4 ALARM OVERRIDE switchSwitch disabling the mode 4 tone alarm in the RIO headset.
2TEST-CHAL CC switchSwitch spring-loaded to center controlling IFF challenge and test.
3CODE selector thumbwheelsThumbwheels controlling mode and code used for interrogation. First wheel sets mode, last four set code.
4CHAL lightLight indicating active interrogation in progress.
5FAULT lightLight indicating fault in AN/APX-76.

đź’ˇ Due to DCS limitations in regards to IFF the AA1 control panel is currently non-functional.

TEST-CHAL CC switch

Switch spring-loaded to center controlling IFF challenge and test.

  • TEST - Momentary actuation, tests the AN/APX-76 by interrogating own transponder, if same codes are set two solid lines appear on DDD at 3 and 4 miles.
  • CHAL CC - Momentary actuation, starts a 10 second interrogation cycle only showing returns with correct mode and code on DDD.

AN/ALE-39 Programmer

ale39programmer

Programming panel used to program current countermeasure inventory into AN/ALE-39.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1JAMR thumbwheelsThumbwheels used to set jammer release program.
2CHAFF thumbwheelsThumbwheels used to set chaff release program.
3FLARE thumbwheelsThumbwheels used to set flare release program.
4LOAD control thumbwheelsThumbwheels inputting into AN/ALE-39 what is loaded into each launcher subsection.
5RESET switchSwitch loading programmed settings into AN/ALE-39 and resetting sequencer switches to their starting positions.

JAMR thumbwheels

Thumbwheels used to set jammer release program.

  • QTY - Quantity, sets quantity of jammers to release in program.
  • INTV - Interval, sets interval in seconds between jammer releases in program.

CHAFF thumbwheels

Thumbwheels used to set chaff release program.

  • B-QTY - Quantity, sets quantity of chaff to release in one program salvo, can also be set to C (continuous) or R (random).
  • B-INTV - Interval, sets interval between chaff burst to release in one program salvo, can also be set to R (random).
  • S-QTY - Quantity, selects number of salvoes to release in a program.
  • S-INTV - Interval, selects interval between salvoes in a program.

FLARE thumbwheels

Thumbwheels used to set flare release program.

  • QTY - Quantity, sets quantity of flares to be released in a program.
  • INTV - Interval, sets interval between flare releases in a program.

LOAD control thumbwheels

Thumbwheels inputting into AN/ALE-39 what is loaded into each launcher subsection.

  • L10 - Sets loaded countermeasure in Left 10 subsection.
  • L20 - Sets loaded countermeasure in Left 20 subsection.
  • R10 - Sets loaded countermeasure in Right 10 subsection.
  • R20 - Sets loaded countermeasure in Right 20 subsection.

Interior Light Control Panel

light

Panel controlling lights in the RIO cockpit.

No.ControlFunction
1INSTRUMENT thumbwheelThumbwheel controlling instrument panel lights, 0 equals off, 1-14 sets the lights to an increasingly bright setting.
2WHITE FLOOD switchSwitch enabling white floodlights in the RIO cockpit. DIM and BRT (bright) settings available, switch locked to OFF unless pulled out.
3CONSOLE thumbwheelThumbwheel controlling console lights and red floodlights. 0 turns off both console and red floodlights, 1-14 sets the console lights to an increasingly bright setting.
4RED FLOOD switchSwitch controlling red instrument and console floodlights. BRT sets bright red instrument flood and console lights. MED sets red console floodlights and DIM sets dim red console floodlights.

Data/ADF Switch

data

Switch controlling the display of data and ADF on the HSD and ECMD.

  • BOTH enables the display of the ADF bug and navigation data block.
  • DATA enables the display of only the navigation data block.
  • OFF disables the display of either.

IFF Transponder Control Panel

transponder

Control panel for the AN/APX-72 transponder.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1MODE 4 switchSwitch enabling mode 4.
2MODE 4 AUDIO/LIGHT switchSwitch enabling mode 4 audio and light monitoring.
3MODE 4 CODE selectorCODE selector switch, controlling what cipher code to use.
4MODE 4 REPLY lightLight indicating when a mode 4 reply is generated and transmitted. Can be pushed to test the light.
5TEST lightLight indicating correct test when the respective test switch is used. The light itself can be tested by pushing it.
6MASTER selectorSelector switch controlling AN/APX-72 mode of operation.
7MODE switchesSwitches controlling the operation of the different IFF modes.
8RAD TEST-OUT-MON switchSwitch allowing ground test and monitoring of non-mode 4 replies.
9IDENT-OUT-MIC switchSwitch controlling the operation of the mode 1-3 IDENT function.
10CODE thumbwheelsSix thumbwheels selecting the code in use for mode 1 and 3.

MODE 4 AUDIO/LIGHT switch

Switch enabling mode 4 audio and light monitoring.

  • AUDIO - Enables audio monitoring of mode 4 interrogation and REPLY light monitoring of mode 4 replies.
  • OUT - Disables audio and light monitoring of mode 4.
  • LIGHT - Enables REPLY light monitoring of mode 4 replies.

MODE 4 CODE selector

CODE selector switch, controlling what cipher code to use.

  • ZERO - Erases both ciphers from the system.
  • B - Selects the B cipher code for use.
  • A - Selects the A cipher code for use.
  • HOLD - Non-functional.

MASTER selector

Selector switch controlling AN/APX-72 mode of operation.

  • OFF - Disables power to the AN/APX-72.
  • STBY - Standby, enables standby for immediate operation upon selection of other operational mode.
  • LOW - Activates replies to set modes in low sensitivity mode, only strong nearby interrogators are replied to.
  • NORM - Normal, replies normally to all received interrogations.
  • EMER - Activates emergency mode replies to mode 1, 2 and 3/A and normal reply to mode C, regardless of mode switches.

MODE switches

Switches controlling operation of the different IFF modes.

  • TEST - Tests respective mode, correct operation if TEST light illuminates.
  • ON - Enables respective IFF mode.
  • OUT - Disables respective IFF mode.

RAD TEST-OUT-MOON switch

Switch allowing ground test and monitoring of non mode 4 replies.

  • RAD TEST - Not used by aircrew.
  • OUT - Disables test and monitoring.
  • MON - Monitor mode 1, 2, 3 and C by illuminating the test light when replies are generated and transmitted.

IDENT-OUT-MIC switch

Switch controlling operation of the mode 1-3 IDENT function.

  • IDENT - Momentary position enabling IDENT reply for 15 to 30 seconds after switch release.
  • OUT - IDENT function off.
  • MIC - Transfers IDENT control to crewmember UHF PTT, enabling IDENT reply as per IDENT each time the PTT is keyed.

IFF Antenna Control/Test Panel

rio test

Panel containing controls for IFF antenna, tests, and ground cooling.

No.ControlFunction
1IFF ANT switchSwitch allowing control of which antenna the IFF transponder uses. Possible to select AUTO (automatic) or LWR (lower).
2IND LT/DDI BIT switchTest switch allowing manual DDI BIT and test of RIO indicator lights.
3GND CLG switchSwitch allowing the use of external air to cool aircraft systems while on the ground.

GND CLG switch

Switch allowing the use of external air to cool aircraft systems while on the ground.

  • OBC/CABIN - Allows for external air into the cabin and to cool electronics and AWG-9/AIM-54 with reduced performance for OBC.
  • OFF - External air not used for these functions.
  • AWG-9/AIM-54 - Uses the external air to cool AWG-9 and AIM-54 coolant with better performance but disables external air to cabin.

Mid Compression Bypass Test Panel (F-14A only)

mcb

Panel containing controls and indicators used to verify Mid Compression Bypass (MCB) circuit functionality.

No.Control/IndicatorFunction
1Left and Right test lightsIndicators illuminating with MCB Test switch activation to indicate left and right successful MCB circuit test respectively.
2MCB Test switchTest switch activating MCB circuit test to verify MCB circuit functionality.

Electrical Power System Test Panel

power system test

Panel used by ground crew to test aircraft electrical systems.

đź’ˇ Non-functional in DCS.

Canopy Defog/Cabin Air Lever

canopy defog

The canopy air diffuser lever controls the flow of cabin air. The normal position, CABIN AIR, directs 70% of the conditioned air through the cockpit air diffusers and 30% through the canopy air diffusers. The CANOPY DEFOG position directs all airflow through the canopy air diffusers for canopy defog.

Canopy Control Handle

canopy handle

The canopy control handle controls canopy operation and is located on the right cockpit wall. The handle is mounted downwards beneath the box containing the handle mechanism and the handle position texts. The canopy control handle is duplicated in the pilot cockpit.

ControlFunction
BOOSTCloses the canopy using boost, used during cold weather or with a strong headwind.
CLOSECloses the canopy, the default position during flight.
HOLDHolds the canopy at the current position for any position other than closed.
OPENOpens the canopy.
AUX OPENAllows manual opening of the canopy if system pressure is too low.

Systems Overview

This chapter gives detailed in-sights and explanations into all major systems of the Tomcat.

From the engine system to fuel flow, control surfaces, how to navigate, use the radar and weapons effectively, or the insights of INS alignments and its gyro system.

Pilot Cockpit

Flight Controls and Gear

This chapter contains all necessary information about the flight controls, the controlling computer system, the wing sweep mechanism and systems used on the ground such as the landing gear.

Nosegear Carrier Takeoff

Central Air Data Computer (CADC)

The Central Air Data Computer or CADC is the computer acting as the spider in the web for most aircraft flight sensors and relaying this information to all systems needing them.

In addition, it also controls the wing-sweep via the wing-sweep schedule and also controls the flaps and slats as they are limited by that same schedule.

Flight Controls & AFCS

The flight control system on the F-14 Tomcat is driven by the two main hydraulic circuits, powered by pumps connected to each engine.

For longitudinal (pitch) control both tail stabilizers are deflected in unison, acting in the same way as traditional elevators.

Lateral (roll) control is produced by both the tail stabilizers and the spoilers working in unison. To produce roll the stabilizers are deflected opposite each other to act as ailerons in combination with the spoilers on the side to which roll is commanded.

The rudders on the F-14 is a standard rudder configuration albeit in a two tail, two rudder configuration.

Control surface position is indicated on the Control Surface Position Indicator and can also be used to check trim position with controls at neutral.

đź’ˇ Above 15 units AOA, the rudders should be used for lateral (roll) control due to the different airflow along the aircraft control surfaces.

Trim

Longitudinal and lateral trim is accomplished via the trim hat on the Control Stick. This changes the stick neutral position, thus trimming the aircraft. Rudder trim is accomplished via the RUDDER TRIM switch on the Inlet Ramps/Throttle Control Panel, changing the neutral rudder position.

The Mach Trim and ITS (Integrated Trim System) automatically trims to compensate for changes in longitudinal trim. The Mach Trim system compensates for transonic and supersonic trim changes and the ITS for trim changes due to flap and speed-brake position changes.

AFCS Automatic Flight Control System

The AFCS or Automatic Flight Control System provides additional aircraft stability (SAS or Stability Augmentation System) via automatic control surface commands generated from AFCS sensors. The AFCS is controlled by switches on the AFCS Control Panel and pitch, roll and yaw can each be set individually.

The pitch and roll switches are spring-loaded to off but normally held to on by solenoids meaning that if the system is turned off or inoperable the switches return to off. The yaw switch is purely mechanical.

Roll SAS should not be used for situations involving flight at AOA above 15 units and should therefore be set to off for combat maneuvers.

If the autopilot emergency disengage paddle on the control stick is held down the pitch and roll channels will be set to off.

Autopilot

Apart from stability augmentation the AFCS is also used to provide autopilot functionality. To use the autopilot all three stabilization channels must be enabled.

The controls for the autopilot system are situated on the AFCS Control Panel.

Autopilot modes available are attitude hold, heading hold, ground track, altitude hold, vector/pcd (precision course direction) and acl (automatic carrier landing).

By setting the autopilot ENGAGE switch to on the attitude hold is engaged, maintaining current aircraft attitude. Limited to within 30° pitch and 60° roll angles and the aircraft will be automatically moved within this range. Current attitude can be changed with the control stick and will be held when the stick is released.

The ENGAGE switch is also a prerequisite for all other autopilot modes.

The HDG position on the HDG switch enables heading hold, maneuver the aircraft to desired heading and with a bank angle of less than 5° to set heading.

The ground track mode is entered by setting the HDG switch to GT, wait for the A/P REF warning light on the left side of the Vertical Display Indicator (VDI) to illuminate and then press the nosewheel steering button on the control stick. The A/P REF warning light will then turn off and the ground track mode will be enabled, setting the autopilot to follow a ground track by compensating for aircraft wind drift.

The altitude hold mode is set via the ALT, altitude, switch and like the ground track mode the A/P REF warning light will illuminate until the nosewheel steering button is depressed, enabling the mode.

The Data Link Vector - Precision Course Direction mode is used to allow a Link 4 controller to remotely control the aircraft. This is not modelled in DCS.

Finally the ACL or Automatic Carrier Landing mode is used to conduct automatic carrier landings in conjunction with the Link 4 data link and the on-board radar beacon. To enable the ACL, set the VEC/PCD switch to ACL which will cause the A/P REF warning light to illuminate. When intercepting the ACL glideslope and with the ACL READY and A/P CPLR warning lights illuminated on the VDI, depress the nosewheel steering button on the control stick. This engages the ACL and lets the data link control the aircraft. The A/P REF warning light will turn off.

The ACL can be used in conjunction with the APC (see Throttle Controls) for a fully automatic landing. The ACL can be disengaged via the PLM button on the right throttle and the APC via the CAGE/SEAM button on the left throttle.

All the autopilot modes can be overridden by enough force on the control stick or by depression of the autopilot emergency disengagement paddle, automatically resetting all autopilot switches to off.

Spoilers

The spoilers located on the upper surfaces of the wings are used to control roll as detailed above under Flight Control System, for braking on the ground as part of the Antiskid system and as a part of the DLC system (see next section).

The spoilers are only used forwards of 62° wing-sweep as further aft these conflict with the fuselage.

In case of a spoiler malfunction the spoiler symmetry protection logic disables all of the spoilers in the same section as the failed spoiler, either inboard or outboard spoilers. If this occurs the SPOILERS caution light on the Caution - Advisory Indicator illuminates.

To override this the switch corresponding to the relevant section on the Spoiler Failure Override can be set to override by lifting the guard and setting the switch to ORIDE and then depressing the MASTER RESET button on the Fuel Management Panel.

Spoiler position can be seen on the Control Surface Position Indicator.

DLC Direct Lift Control

The DLC or Direct Lift Control is used to control vertical glideslope position without pitch control inputs or engine throttle commands. The DLC uses the two inboard spoiler sections in conjunction with small corrections on the tail stabilizers to control lift.

The DLC is engaged by depression of the DLC switch on the control stick with flaps down and throttles less than MIL. This causes the inboard spoilers to extend to half and enables the DLC & maneuver flap command thumbwheel on the control stick to control them. The DLC also requires the AFCS roll and pitch channels, the inboard spoilers and the hydraulic systems to be operative as well.

Rotation of the thumbwheel forwards extends the spoilers towards the max up position, decreasing lift and adjusting glideslope position downward. Rotation of the thumbwheel aft retracts the spoilers towards the flush position, increasing lift and adjusting glideslope position upward.

Another depression of the DLC switch disengages the system.

Flaps and Slats

The flaps and slats on the F-14 Tomcat can be used in two modes.

The normal flap and slat extension is controlled using the FLAP handle on the Throttle Quadrant. The flaps can be set to anywhere between retracted and fully extended where the flaps will extend to 35° and the slats to 17°. The auxiliary flaps, the innermost section, only have two positions, retracted and extended. They will extend fully when the FLAP handle is at more than 5° extension.

If a fault exists preventing retraction of flaps the FLAP handle should be moved to the UP position and then moved outboard and up to the EMER UP position, overriding faulty interlocks.

The other mode is the maneuver flap system in which the CADC uses the flaps and slats automatically to improve aircraft performance. In this mode the flaps extends to 10° maximum and the slats to 7° maximum and the innermost flap section is disabled.

While normally automatic the maneuver flap system can be manually controlled using the DLC & maneuver flap command thumbwheel on the control stick. Forward thumbwheel rotation retracts the flaps and slats and aft thumbwheel rotation extends them.

When sweeping the wings the flaps are limited by the wing-sweep position. Aft of 21° sweep the auxiliary (inboard flaps) are disabled up. Aft of 50° all flaps are disabled up. The slats are not inhibited by wing-sweep.

Position of the flaps and slats are indicated on the Wheels-Flaps Position Indicator.

The FLAP light on the pilot Caution - Advisory Indicator indicates a malfunction in the flap system with flaps at non symmetrical positions. The REDUCE SPEED warning light on the left side of the Vertical Display Indicator (VDI) indicates flaps not retracted above 225 knots indicated airspeed.

Speedbrakes

The speedbrakes on the F-14 Tomcat consists of three sections on the tail located between the engines and these are powered by the combined hydraulic system.

The speedbrake controls are located on the right Throttle and can be set to desired position depending on how long the switch is held to the extend position. Retraction always fully retracts the speedbrakes.

To protect the speedbrakes they will start retracting above 400 knots and will continue to do so with increasing airspeed, additionally selection of MIL power or above automatically retracts them.

As the speedbrakes disturb airflow around the tail the fuel dump is disabled with speedbrake extension as to not have the fuel hit the aircraft.

Position of the speedbrakes can be seen on the Wheels-Flaps Position Indicator.

Wing-Sweep System

sweep schedule

Wing-sweep schedule as function of Mach number and related flap interlocks.

The wing-sweep system controls the geometry of the F-14’s wings, allowing the wings to move from a 20° to a 68° position in the air. While on the deck an oversweep of 75° is also possible reducing the F-14’s wing span to 33 feet (about 10 meters).

The wings are moved by hydro-mechanical screw-jack actuators which are interconnected mechanically, making sure they’re synchronized. As long as both main hydraulic systems are functioning the maximum wing-sweep change rate is about 15°/s. This can be affected negatively by negative g or large amounts of positive g.

In normal operation the CADC, Central Air Data Computer, controls the wing position as a function of current Mach via the wing-sweep program, this is known as the AUTO mode. The pilot can also select a wing position aft of the wing-sweep program manually or choose the BOMB mode that sets the wings to 55° or further aft depending on the program. Simply put, the CADC wing-sweep program determines the max forward position of the wings. All this is done electrically via two independent channels (for redundancy) to the wing-sweep actuators.

Currently commanded wing position, CADC program wing position and actual wing position can be seen on the wing-sweep indicator next to the ACM panel.

Emergency Mode

While the normal mode controls the wing-sweep electrically, to supplement this it’s also possible to control the wing-sweep mechanically via the emergency mode. This is done via the emergency wing-sweep handle on the right side of the throttle. That handle is connected mechanically to the hydraulic valves in the wing-sweep system, providing a physical back-up control.

Normally this handle is moved with the electronic wing-sweep program by a servo located beneath it, making sure it’s at the actual wing position. To disengage the electric system and enable the emergency mode the guard over the handle is opened and then the handle is extended for additional leverage. Then the handle can be forced out of the spider-detent normally connecting it to the electrical servo and then used to manually set the wing position.

In this mode the pilot has to make sure to follow the following schedule to avoid damage to the wings:

Speed (Indicated Mach)Max Forward Wing Position
0.420°
0.725°
0.850°
0.960°
1.068°

To return to the normal mode of operation, the handle should be pushed into the desired position and pressed down and the guard closed. The MASTER RESET button on the fuel management panel should then be depressed and the wing-sweep system set to the same position as the handle. The servo will then drive to the commanded position and re-engage the handle to the spider detent, resuming normal operation.

Oversweep

The emergency wing-sweep handle is also used to select the oversweep position of the wings. The oversweep is only used while on the ground to reduce the wing span to make it easier to spot the aircraft on the carrier deck. As the wing will sweep over the stabilizers on the tail the horizontal tail authority system is enabled to prevent the wings and stabilizers from damaging each other by restricting movement of the stabilizer.

To set the wings to oversweep the emergency wing-sweep handle should be moved to the 68° position and held in the extended position. This will deflate the wing-seal airbags and activate the horizontal tail authority system, indicated by the HZ TAIL AUTH caution light illuminating. When the HZ TAIL AUTH caution light goes out and the OVER flag on the wing-sweep indicator appears the oversweep interlocks are free and the handle can now be moved to the 75° position and stowed.

To move the wings out of oversweep the handle is pulled up and moved forwards of 68°. This will again illuminate the HZ TAIL AUTH caution light. When the wings have physically exited the oversweep the caution light and the OVER flag will turn off.

As with normal emergency mode operation the handle should now be set to the same position as the spider detent and the MASTER RESET button depressed.

Controls and Indicators

The controls for the wing-sweep system are on the right throttle (electrical) and to the right of the right throttle (mechanical). See the Throttle and the Throttle Quadrant.

The wing-sweep hat on the right throttle is normally set to AUTO enabling CADC control of the wings, this is the upper position. The down position sets the wing-sweep to the BOMB mode, 55° or aft.

The AFT and FWD (forward) positions enable manual movement aft of the CADC scheduled position.

The emergency wing-sweep handle on the throttle quadrant is used to control the mechanical emergency mode, see emergency mode above.

wing sweep

The wing-sweep indicator to the right of the ACM panel is used to indicate the current wing-sweep positions. The pointer on the left side shows the CADC scheduled wing position. The left tape shows the manually commanded position and the right tape shows the actual wing position.

The five windows on the right side show:

  • OFF: System inoperable.
  • AUTO: CADC controlling wing-sweep.
  • MAN: Wings set manually with the control on the right throttle.
  • EMER: Wings set with the emergency wing-sweep handle.
  • OVER: Wings in oversweep.

The relevant warning and advisory lights are located on the Vertical Display Indicator (VDI) and the pilot Caution - Advisory Indicator.

The WING SWEEP advisory light on the right side of the VDI illuminates when both wing-sweep electrical channels are inoperable or the emergency mode is in use. If it illuminates without the emergency mode being used that mode should then be used as the electrical system might not work.

The WING SWEEP caution light on the pilot caution - advisory indicator illuminates when at least one electrical wing-sweep channel is inoperable.

Wing-Sweep System Test

The wing-sweep system can be tested on the ground in pre-flight without moving the wings using the Master Test Panel.

To conduct the test, set the wing-sweep mode to AUTO and push the MASTER RESET button. Set the MASTER TEST switch to WG SWP.

The CADC commanded position indicator on the wing-sweep indicator will now move to 44°. The WING SWEEP and FLAP light will illuminate on the pilot Caution - Advisory Indicator and the REDUCE SPEED warning light on the Vertical Display Indicator (VDI).

đź’ˇ The WING SWEEP advisory light will illuminate after 3 seconds into test, turn off and then illuminate again at 8 seconds.

When the CADC commanded position indicator moves forward to the 20° position the test is over and the above light will turn off. The MASTER TEST switch can now be set to OFF and the test is complete. The test will take about 25 seconds to complete.

đź’ˇ The RUDDER AUTH and/or MACH TRIM lights might illuminate and the control stick might move. This can be ignored.

đź’ˇ The WG SWP test on the Master Test panel is not implemented yet.

Landing Gear System & Ground Handling

The F-14 Tomcat has a tricycle landing gear designed to be fully retractable as well as hardened enough to withstand the rigours of carrier traps. The landing gear extension and retraction is powered by the combined hydraulic system as well as having an emergency extension system. The emergency extension system has a nitrogen bottle that can be used to power a one-shot emergency extension. With the emergency system triggered, the system needs to be reset by technicians on the ground to allow further normal retraction.

For additional information on controls and indicators see Landing Gear Control Panel for controls and Wheels-Flaps Position Indicator for the indicators.

Nosewheel Steering

The nosewheel steering system on the F-14 can be activated with weight on wheels by depression of the nosewheel steering button on the Control Stick. The activation of this system is indicated via the NWS ENGA caution light on the left side of the HUD, see Wheels Warning/Brakes Warnings/ACLS/AP Caution/NWS Engage Caution/Auto Throttle Caution Lights.

Disengagement of this system occurs automatically with weight off wheels (take-off), electrical supply failure or lowering of the launch bar. It’s also possible to deactivate the system by depression of the nosewheel steering button.

The nosewheel, with the system engaged, is controlled via the rudder pedals. It’s capable of a deflection of up to 70° meaning that it will turn tightly enough that the inner wheel will in fact move backwards.

Wheelbrakes

The wheelbrakes can be applied either via the rudder pedals by pressing on the upper part of them, rotating them forwards. The other application is via the parking brake handle located on the Landing Gear Control Panel panel.

The rudder pedals can be used to apply the brakes gradually while the parking brakes are either on or off.

Normally both systems are supplied from the combined hydraulic system but if that system becomes depressurized the brake system automatically switches to the backup accumulators. The Emergency Brake Pressure Indicator shows current pressure in the emergency accumulators.

If fully charged the auxiliary accumulator allows for about 13 to 14 wheelbrake applications from the pedals and the parking brake accumulator 3 parking brake applications minimum. These accumulators can be recharged via the Hydraulic Hand Pump.

The BRAKES warning light on the left side of the HUD indicates either parking brake applied, antiskid system fail or that the brakes are operating in the emergency mode (only when the pedals are depressed).

Antiskid

The antiskid system modulates the wheelbrakes to prevent skidding while on the ground. When armed in the air the system prevents braking until both main wheels are on the ground and the wheels have spun up. Also the system is not operational below 15 knots.

The antiskid system switch also controls the spoiler brake system that deploys the spoilers as brakes when the throttles are set to IDLE while on the ground.

đź’ˇ The antiskid should be disabled during taxi as below 15 knots, the system may disturb normal braking even though the antiskid feature is not operational at those speeds.

The ANTI SKID SPOILER BK switch on the Fuel Management Panel panel controls the system. OFF disables the system, BOTH enables antiskid and the spoiler brake system and SPOILER BK enables only the spoiler brake system.

Catapult Launch and Arresting Gear

Nosegear Catapult System

The nosegear of the F-14 contains the system allowing for catapult assisted takeoff during carrier based operations.

The three components mounted in or on the nosegear are the nosewheel kneel functionality, the launch bar and the holdback fitting.

To enable the system the aircraft is kneeled using the NOSE STRUT switch on the Landing Gear Control Panel. This is done by holding the switch to the KNEEL position until downward movement stops.

This drains hydraulic fluid from the shock absorber, compressing the nosegear strut 14 inches. When compressed this also releases the lock on the launch bar which can then be lowered manually by the deck crew or by turning the nosegear more than 10° from center.

đź’ˇ In DCS, the launch bar is automatically lowered with nosegear kneel.

The aircraft can then be guided onto the catapult and connected to the shuttle, in DCS via default keybind U. The holdback bar is currently not modelled in DCS.

đź’ˇ Deselection of nosewheel steering should be done before final movement onto the shuttle and hookup to avoid misalignment.

The final command to launch the aircraft, after proper procedures, is then to salute the “shooter” or officer in command of catapult launch, default keybind LShift + U in DCS.

After the catapult stroke, when the launch bar is released from the shuttle, stored hydraulic energy is released to impart a positive pitch moment to the aircraft. This also automatically raises the launch bar into its stowed position.

Indication of the launch bar status is available on the Caution - Advisory Indicator via the LAUNCH BAR advisory light. The advisory light is on with weight on wheels when the launch bar is not up and locked and turns off if throttles are advanced to MIL to enable a lights out for launch criteria. With weight off wheels the LAUNCH BAR advisory light is on if the nose strut hasn’t fully extended, launch bar is not up and locked or nosewheel hasn’t centered correctly. This inhibits nosegear retraction.

The Launch Bar Abort Panel contains the LAUNCH BAR switch used to disengage the launch bar in case of an aborted launch. This functionality is currently not implemented in DCS, unhooking the launch bar is currently accomplished by another depression of the hookup key, default key U.

Arresting Gear

The arresting hook located on the underside of the tail of the F-14 is used for arrested landings during carrier operations.

The system uses hydraulic power from both flight and combined hydraulic systems and is controlled electrically, thus requiring electrical power as well.

Operation of the system is via the arresting HOOK handle on the Arresting Hook Panel. UP raises the arresting hook and DN, down, lowers it to 37° allowing it to catch the wire during a correctly executed carrier “trap”. The transition light next to the arresting HOOK handle illuminates whenever the arresting hook position does not correspond with handle position.

If on board failures do not allow for normal hook lowering it’s possible to use a mechanical backup to deploy the hook. To activate the mechanical backup, pull the handle out and rotate it 90° counterclockwise. This releases the mechanical up-lock and drain the hydraulic pressure keeping the hook up, thus lowering it.

If electrical power and hydraulic power are restored, it’s then possible to retract the hook by rotating the handle 90° clockwise and pushing the handle back in and then setting it in the default UP position.

đź’ˇ Hook position also affects the AoA indexer and approach lights, making them flash with gear down if the hook is not also down. This feature can be disabled using the HOOK BYPASS switch on the Master Light Control Panel.

Engines & Fuel Systems

Depending on the variant, the F-14 Tomcat is either equipped with two Pratt & Whitney TF30-P-414A or two General Electrics F110-GE-400 turbofan engines.

Carrier Afterburner Takeoff

Each engine is fed by an independent fuel system from fuel tanks installed in the airframe.

Engines

The F-14A is powered by two Pratt & Whitney TF30-P-414A while the F-14B is powered by two General Electrics F110-GE-400, both of which are afterburning turbofan engines.

To provide the engines with an even subsonic airflow the F-14 has the AICS or Air Inlet Control System. This system controls the variable geometry intakes by moving the variable ramps mounted in them to slow the airflow. This is accomplished using various sensor inputs run through a calculation using set schedules which decides the positions of the ramps.

In addition, the TF30 uses two systems to improve reliable operation, the Mid Compression Bypass System (MCB) and the Mach Lever.

The MCB helps mitigate high angle of attack airflow onto the compressor fans to reduce the risk of an engine stall. This system vents air from the compressor section to bypass duct to stabilize the airflow for later compressor stages. Normally this system uses angle of attack and Mach number sensor data to activate, but with the landing gear handle in the down position this it is only activated with zone 5 afterburner. Additionally the WCS commands the MCB to activate with extension of the refuelling probe as well as when launching AIM-7 or AIM-9 missiles, air to ground rockets or firing the M61 Vulcan gun.

The Mach Lever also mitigates the risk of an engine stall by controlling min and max rpm allowed as a function of Mach number. In addition it also increases the minimum rpm in high angle of attack regimes while subsonic.

The two F110s in F-14B, on the other hand, are controlled by the AFTC (Augmenter Fan Temperature Control unit). The AFTC is an early engine control computer akin to an early version of a FADEC (Full Authority Digital Engine Control) used on newer turbine engines. This system controls both the engine itself as well as the variable exhaust nozzles controlling the engine exhaust gases and removes the need for the MCB and Mach Lever for the F110. The lack of such a system in the F-14A controlling its TF30s is one of the reasons for them being deemed less reliable than the F110s.

In case of a failure in the AFTC the MEC (Main engine control) is capable of assuming control of the engines to provide a fall-back, mechanical control. The normal mode, AFTC, is the primary mode (PRI) and called as such while the fall-back MEC is the secondary (SEC) mode. The selection of primary or secondary is automatic in case of a failure in the AFTC but can also be manually selected. Of note is that in secondary mode the engine nozzles are fully closed and disabled in addition to the afterburners being disabled with a corresponding loss of engine performance.

In addition both engines also drive separate fuel, hydraulic and electric generators to create redundancy.

💡 The main difference between the TF30 and F110 engines (apart from lesser thrust in the TF30s) is that the TF30s are more sensitive to the quality of the airflow entering the compressor face. In general it is wise to avoid anything less than military power or afterburner while in high angle of attack maneuvers as well as avoiding large rudder inputs or asymmetric engine throttle settings. That said, the TF30s in the HB F-14A module have been extensively tuned using available data and SME expertise, resulting in an accurate modelling of an engine undeserving of its bad reputation. One “advantage” of the TF30’s mechanical fuel control is its high speed thrust, resulting in higher top speeds than the F110 can achieve. If flown within normal parameters, the TF30 engines behave well if a tad underpowered compared to the F110s.

Throttle Controls

throttles

The throttles in the F-14 have detents preventing unintentional engine start and shutdown and unintentional selection of afterburner. In addition the throttles also controls several different systems depending on throttle position as shown in the diagram above. The most critical of these being the fuel cutoff and ignition systems in the respective engines.

For throttle operations there are three modes:

The manual mode is a mechanical mode in which the engines are controlled by mechanical linkages directly from the throttles to the engines. The manual mode is designed as a backup mode and may be inexact because of the mechanical nature of the controls.

Boost mode is the normal mode of operation in which electrical paths control actuators moving the same engine controls as the mechanical linkages but more exactly and with lesser force required.

The third mode is the approach power compensator mode or the auto throttle mode which is a system which allows for automatic throttle control for optimal angle-of-attack during approaches.

The controls for the throttle mode are located on the inlet ramps/throttle control panel to the side of the main throttles and allows for selection of all three modes. The auto throttle mode is solenoid held and will revert to boost mode if the criteria for automatic controls are not met.

To allow selection of auto mode the throttles need to be between 75 to 90% rpm, the gear handle needs to be down and with no weight on the wheels. If these criteria are no longer met, the throttles are manually overridden with force or the Cage/SEAM button on the left throttle is depressed the solenoid releases the switch and it reverts to boost.

For additional auto-throttle tune the gain of the system can be set on the inlet ramps/throttle control panel. The settings are hot, normal or cold with hot increasing the throttle gain (and effective thrust) and cold decreasing it. These settings correspond to cold or hot external temperatures but should be set according to observed throttle control.

The RATS or reduced arrestment thrust system is a system limiting engine thrust after touchdown to limit it to levels appropriate for carrier environments. The system is enabled by weight on either main landing gear and is disabled by selection of afterburner on the throttles.

Finally, and implemented only for the F110-GE-400, is the asymmetric limiter, preventing asymmetric afterburner engagement if only one afterburner lights by keeping that afterburner at minimum afterburner thrust until the other afterburner also lights.

Engine and Throttle Control Switches and Indicators

inlet

The inlet ramps/throttle control panel contains most other engine related controls.

The inlet ramps/throttle control panel contains most other engine related controls.

The THROTTLE MODE (1) switch sets throttle mode to AUTO, BOOST or MAN modes respectively, with auto being spring-loaded back to boost but held in place electrically as mentioned above.

The THROTTLE TEMP (2) switch controls the gain of the automatic throttle system also described above.

The INLET RAMPS (3) switches enable (AUTO) or disable, stow (STOW) the variable intake ramps.

The engine crank switch (4) is used to crank the engines to 20% rpm allowing for engine start by moving the respective throttle to idle from cut-off. The air to start the engine is sourced from an external air supply if connected or the other engine if no external source exists. At 50% rpm the crank switch automatically returns to off/center position. If this does not occur it should be manually set to off to prevent damage to the air turbine starter.

The BACK UP IGNITION (5) switch enables the backup ignition system in case of a failure in the main ignition circuits that are normally enabled by moving the throttles out of the cut-off position.

asym

đź’ˇ F-14B only.

The ASYM LIMITER (1) on the ASYM limiter/engine mode select panel enables or disables the asymmetric afterburner thrust limiter. Default position is ON and the switch has a guard cover keeping it in that position.

The other switches on that same panel are the ENG (engine) MODE SELECT switches (2), setting the left (L ENG) and right (R ENG) to PRI, primary or SEC, secondary modes respectively.

mcb

đź’ˇ F-14A only.

The MCB Test Panel, located in the RIO pit on the right horizontal panel, is used to test if the MCB system functions. The TEST switch (2) set to the TEST position activates the test circuit which lights the two test lights (1) for the left and right engine respectively if their MCB circuits function.

external environment

The ENG/PROBE ANTI-ICE (2) switch on the external environmental control panel enables the engine anti-ice and intake ramp anti-ice mode in addition to the various probe heaters. The ORIDE position enables the system, the AUTO position enables the system if icing is detected and the OFF position disable it.

instrument-group

The ENGINE INSTRUMENT GROUP displays engine RPM, TIT (Turbine Inlet Temperature, F-14A) or EGT (Exhaust Gas Temperature, F14B) and FF (fuel flow) to the pilot to allow for engine monitoring.

đź’ˇ Pictured above are the TF30 engine indicators, F110 EIG coming soon.

exhaust

The exhaust nozzle position indicators display respective engine’s current engine exhaust nozzle position, with zero being fully closed and full clockwise rotation being fully open. The F-14A indicates 0 to 6 units while the F-14B indicates 0 to 100 percent open (tens indicated on gauge).

oil

The oil pressure indicators display respective engine oil pressure allowing the pilot to check that engine oil pressure is at acceptable levels.

The caution lights relevant to engine operation are located on the pilot’s caution - advisory panel, and at the sides of the HUD.

The caution lights on the sides of the HUD are the engine stall warning lights which flashes at a 3 Hz rate when an engine stall is detected. The warning light on the left side of the HUD indicates an engine stall in the left engine and the one on the opposite side the right engine. This is also combined with an audio warning, a modulated tone at 320 Hz.

Below the left engine stall warning light is, amongst others, the AUTO THROT (auto throttle) caution light which illuminates for 10 seconds when the auto throttle system is disengaged by other means than the throttle mode switch.

On the main caution - advisory panel the relevant engine caution and warnings lights are:

  • INLET ICE: Caution light indicating ice detection on the detector in the left engine inlet.
  • L & R INLET: Caution lights indicating failure in AICS for respective variable intake system.
  • OIL PRESS: Caution light indicating low oil pressure in either engine.
  • BLEED DUCT: Caution light indicating hot air leakage in either engine.
  • L & R RAMPS: Caution lights indicating respective engine intake ramp not being locked into position when supposed to.
  • L & R GEN: Caution lights indicating that respective engine generator is inoperative.
  • L & R OIL HOT: Caution lights indicating that respective engine oil is too hot.
  • L & R FUEL PRES: Caution lights indicating engine fuel pressure below 9 psi in respective engine fuel boost pump.

F-14A TF30-P-414A only lights:

  • L & R OVSP/VALVE: Caution lights indicating engine starter system malfunction or N1 rotor over-speed in respective engine.

F-14B F110-GE-400 only lights:

  • START VALVE: Caution light indicating that the starter valve is open. Control engine crank position if lit after engine start completion.
  • L & R ENG SEC: Caution lights indicating that respective engine is operating in secondary mode.
  • RATS: Caution light indicating that RATS (reduced arrestment thrust system) is enabled.

đź’ˇ F-14A specific lights not yet implemented.

Fuel System

tanks

1. Refueling Probe, 2. Ground refueling Port (Right Side), 3. Forward Fuselage Tank, 4. Left External Drop Tank, 5. Left Box Beam Tank, 6. Left Wing Tank, 7. Vent Tank, 8. Fuel Dump Mast, 9. Aft Fuselage Tank, 10. Right Box Beam Tank, 11. Right Wing Tank, 12. Right External Drop Tank.

The main fuel storage in the F-14 consists of two feed systems, one for each engine. The right engine feed system consists of the right wing and right box cells and the front fuselage cells while the left engine feed system consists of the left wing and left box cells in addition to the aft fuselage cells. This fact needs to be kept in mind when reading the fuel gauges.

The total useable fuel quantity is roughly 20,000 pounds distributed as in the table below.

Tank groupPounds
Forward Fuselage4,700
Aft Fuselage4,400
Right Feed Group1,600
Left Feed Group1,500
Internal Wings4,000
External Tanks3,600

Fuel Quantity Indicators and Controls

fuel quantity

The fuel quantity indicator on the pilot right knee panel displays internal and external fuel carried.

The uppermost indicator (1) displays currently set BINGO fuel level, this quantity is set by rotating the knob (5) to desired amount. This indicator and control activates the BINGO caution light when total fuel level is below set amount.

The TOTAL (2) indicator displays total carried fuel.

The L and R (3) normally shows fuel carried in left and right fuel feeds respectively. A rocker switch on the fuel management panel enables selection of the wing internal tanks (WING) or external fuel tanks (EXT) for display but is spring-loaded to return to showing the feed tanks (FEED) automatically. When displaying wing internal tanks or external fuel tanks, the left wing or left external tank is shown on the L counter and the right wing or right external tank on the R counter.

The FUS & FEED tapes (fuselage and feed) shows the AFT & L (aft fuselage and left feed) and FWD & R (forward fuselage and right feed) in thousands of pounds.

Additionally the RIO has a total fuel quantity display on the right instrument panel. This display counter can only show total fuel quantity. (See Fuel Quantity Totalizer.)

fuel

The fuel management panel on the pilot’s left vertical console contains the applicable controls for the fuel system.

The QTY SEL (1) rocker switch is detailed above under the description above about the L & R fuel displays.

The FEED switch allows the pilot to correct fuel imbalances caused by single engine operation or feed failures by selecting both engines to feed from either the FWD (forward and right tanks) or AFT (aft and left tanks) instead of from one feed system each as normal NORM. The switch guard locks the switch to the NORM position when down.

The WING/EXT TRANS switch controls fuel transfer from the wing and external tanks into the fuselage feed systems. The normal AUTO position enables this transfer as soon the landing gear is retracted. The ORIDE position enables this transfer regardless of landing gear position, enabling transfer when on the ground or during a malfunction in the electrical system inhibiting landing gear retraction detection. Additionally the OFF position disables this transfer but can be overridden automatically to AUTO when the INST test is performed on the MTS panel, the refuel probe is set to ALL EXTD or when dumping fuel.

The DUMP (5) switch enables fuel dump through the beaver tail fuel dump mast, it also enables all fuel transfer systems, enabling dump of fuel in wings and external tanks in addition to the fuselage. If there’s weight on the wheels or the speed brake is not fully retracted the fuel dump is inhibited.

🟡 CAUTION: Even though technically possible to engage the afterburners after a fuel dump is in progress, this is not allowed due to the possibility of igniting the dumped fuel.

In-Flight Refueling

The above panel also contains the control for the in-flight refueling system.

The REFUEL PROBE (6) switch controls the extension of the refueling probe as well as setting up the fuel system to receive fuel. The two extended positions (EXTD) are ALL, enabling refueling of all tanks, including wings and external tanks and FUS, allowing refuel of only the fuselage tanks. When selecting the ALL position the fuel feed from the wings and external tanks are disabled to allow refueling of these tanks. RET (Retract) retracts the refueling probe and resumes normal fuel system operation.

đź’ˇ Selecting EXTD ALL resets the WING/EXT TRANS switch to AUTO.

Navigation & Communication

The F-14’s primary navigation system is a multi-unit Carrier Aircraft Inertial Navigation System (CAINS) designated as AN/ASN-92. An INS system measures and integrates sensed inertia forces (acceleration) and rotational velocities to calculate aircraft position and linear velocity. A good navigation system can precisely guide an aircraft on a route to a mission objective hundred or thousand miles-long, and then back to the home base, safely and reliably. Such a system is even more important when an aircraft is designed to operate over the ocean, far away from any ground-based TACAN or visual references.

Designing an INS (IMU) is an engineering challenge, which requires consideration of such problems as calibration, alignment, Earth’s rotational motion, inertia forces, thermal stability, analogue-digital converters precision, all different types of corrections which have to be applied to keep the device precise over extended time, and many more. Simulating an INS platform is very similar - it is a complex undertaking.

At Heatblur, we decided to develop an entirely new mathematical model to simulate the AN/ASN-92 for our F-14. We included all the potential sources of errors contributing to the final precision of the device, and recreated the characteristic behavior of a gimballed INS platform. The result is a set of algorithms providing an authentic representation of the AN/ASN-92 in DCS, yet optimized to have almost no impact on CPU performance.

The main components of the INS are the inertial measurement unit (IMU), the power supply unit and pilot and RIO navigation controls and displays.

Although from the crew member’s point of view, the INS is used mostly for navigation, it is also essential for proper operations of other aircraft equipment. For example, the attitude is necessary for the radar. The attitude and the own position are required for some weapon delivery modes, particularly for long shots. Even more distressing to the crew, a complete failure of the INS renders the more advanced modes of weapons such as the AIM-7 and AIM-54 missiles inoperable.

The same information is used for data-link operations - when using erroneous INS data, own tracks and targets received from cooperating aircraft will not match and result in false contacts being displayed on the TID. These are only a few examples, and the INS data is used whenever aircraft position or attitude is required.

Thus the inertial navigation system (INS) integrates with the AWG-9 computer (WCS computer) and the CSDC, the computer signal data converter. Other related equipment includes the attitude and heading reference system, central air data computer, radar altimeter, instrument landing system, and TACAN.

Navigation System

WCS Computer

The WCS or weapon control system computer and CSDC use several alignment routines stored on a magnetic tape to perform the necessary computations to align the INS.

These stored alignment routines in the WCS computer are called SMAL single mode alignment program. When alignment is initiated, the routines are loaded in the computer’s destructive readout memory from magnetic tape.

This process is called “tape read-in” and is represented by an M on the TID. During the alignment of the IMU platform, the WCS communicates with the CSDC to address specific CSDC navigation routines.

IMU Platform Alignment

When alignment mode is selected, the IMU platform first erects to a coarse alignment with the help of accelerometer output and gives an aircraft heading that represents the angular displacement from true north. This displacement is referred to as wander angle. The CSDC sends inertial velocity data to the WCS during the alignment process.

The second stage – fine alignment – uses the precise measurement of gyroscope drift to calculate the aircraft’s true heading. This is possible because of the Earth’s rotation. At no point of alignment, is the magnetic heading used, and the whole process relies only on the sensing of the non-inertial movement of the platform within the 3d space.

The WCS calculates terms for platform alignment corrections and estimates the value of the wander angle, it then sends this data to the CSDC. The CSDC uses these correction terms in the CSDC inertial equations to generate pulses for the platform torquing that are then transmitted to the IMU. The CSDC in return receives velocity information from the IMU and sends this new inertial velocity data to the WCS alignment program, upon which the cycle repeats. The exchange of data continues until INS is entered.

The leveling process of the platform is achieved by the CSDC generating torquing pulses based on IMU accelerometer off-level indications being sent to the IMU by the CSDC. With each data exchange, the WCS calculates an error value (delta) between the values of the previous and current wander angle. This delta is largest at the beginning of the alignment and smallest at the end of alignment.

The alignment is finished when the delta is near zero and near zero velocity is sensed along the platform X and Y axes. Variable factors required to align the platform are continuously calculated, updated, and saved as calibration data. When the alignment is complete, the system is ready to enter INS. The last used calibration data and wander angle are stored in the CSDC upon entry into INS. When in INS, the WCS accepts the velocity and position data and the wander angle from the CSDC.

Three navigation data mode sources are used for general navigation:

  1. INS - The primary navigation mode set by the RIO once IMU alignment is complete. The IMU is the primary sensor supplying velocity data that is used to compute all inertial outputs. The IMU is the source for roll and pitch data.

  2. IMU/AM - A backup mode that can either be selected by the RIO or is automatically entered when the CSDC determines the IMU inertial velocity data is unreliable. In this mode, true airspeed from the CADC and stored or entered winds are combined to provide ground speed and true heading for general navigation. The IMU is the source for pitch and roll.

  3. AHRS/AM - An even further degraded mode that can be either selected by the RIO or automatically entered when the CSDC detects a total INS failure. Heading in this mode is derived from magnetic heading plus entered or stored magnetic variation (MAG VAR). This heading, TAS from the CADC, and entered or stored wind are used for general navigation. The AHRS is the source of pitch and roll.

The CSDC and the WCS are aware of the selected navigation mode. The CSDC sends the WCS navigation data parameters (TAS from the CADC, latitude and longitude, inertial velocities, true heading, etc.) required to support general navigation calculations. The WCS uses stored and input navigation data (based on the current navigation mode) to perform the required navigational computations. The WCS also performs additional computations so that the crew is provided with:

  • Current latitude and longitude
  • Attitude
  • Heading true and magnetic
  • Own ground speed and ground track
  • Ability to store and display three waypoints, a fixed point (FP), an initial point (IP), a surface target (ST), a home base (HB), a defended point, and a hostile area
  • Range, bearing, command course, command heading, and time-to-go to a selected destination point
  • Calculated wind speed and direction
  • Calculated magnetic variation
  • Continuous monitoring of the status of the unit, and in case of failure inform the crew with advisory lights and appropriate acronyms displayed on the TID
  • Backup navigation modes in case of partial system failure
  • Backup present position

Displays

Navigation information is displayed on the TID, HSD, multiple display indicator (MDI), HUD, and VDI, depending on the mode selected by the pilot and RIO. If an IMU or navigation computer failure occurs, two backup modes are available: IMU airmass (IMU/AM) or AHRS airmass (AHRS/AM).

To control the INS, use the navigation control and data readout panel and the computer address panel. See Tactical Information Display (TID) and Associated Controls and Associated Controls and Computer Address Panel (CAP) for a more detailed description.

The desired operation mode, alignment mode, and destination point can be selected at the navigation control and data readout panel. The CAP allows entering navigation data and the selected information to be displayed on the TID. The CATEGORY switch on the lower end of the panel determines the function of the MESSAGE button. The categories used for navigation are NAV and TAC DATA. The STBY and READY advisory lights on the navigation control and data readout panel indicate the status of the alignment program and navigation system.

Failure indicators for the main components of the navigation system are on the caution/advisory light panels in both cockpits, however, the NAV COMP and IMU indicators are only present on the RIO cockpit caution/advisory light panel.

The pilot displays (HUD, VDI, and HSD) and the RIO multiple display indicator are controlled with either the pilot display control panel or the multiple display indicator control panel.

đź’ˇ For detailed information on CAP operation, refer to Computer Address Panel (CAP).

If the CATEGORY switch is in NAV, the following matrix appears in the MESSAGE windows:

OWN
A/C
TACAN
FIX
STORED
HDG
ALIGN
RDR
FIX
VIS
FIX
WIND
SPD HDG
FIX
ENABLE
MAG
VAR
(HDG)

Each window has a designated button. Pressing this button tells the WCS computer which function of the matrix to use. If OWN AC, WIND, or MAG VAR is pressed, data can be entered and displayed for each.

Own-aircraft airspeed and magnetic heading are displayed on the TID. If own-aircraft data file is hooked using the TID cursor, heading will be magnetic. If OWN AC button was selected (hooked) via the CAP, own-aircraft true heading, speed (groundspeed), altitude, or course can be displayed on the TID by depressing the appropriate prefix button:

  1. LAT or LONG button will display own-aircraft latitude and longitude.
  2. SPD button displays ground speed and magnetic course.
  3. True airspeed and true heading are displayed when the HDG prefix button is depressed.
  4. Altitude is displayed on the left TID readout (right is blank) when the ALT button is used.
  5. When pressing the WIND button, the TID displays present wind speed (left readout) and magnetic direction (right readout).
  6. The MAG VAR button is used for displaying and entering magnetic variation (MAG VAR).

In order to change own-aircraft lat, long, true heading, or altitude, press the according prefix button followed by the desired quantity. During entry, the data is displayed on the upper middle readout on the TID. At the same time, existing data is being displayed on the two lower readouts. If new data is correct, the RIO can press the ENTER button and the new values will appear on the readout.

To change wind data entry, press the WIND button, then either the SPD or HDG prefix button and the appropriate numbers: knots (0 to 512) for speed or degrees (000 to 359) for magnetic direction. The multiple display indicator data readout of WIND direction is always displayed as true.

đź’ˇ In the INS mode, wind is calculated and updated continuously. The manual entry of wind is ignored by the wind calculations even though the system accepts the entry.

Depressing the MAG VAR button displays alternating values of computed MAG VAR (vC) and manual MAG VAR (vM) on the left readout and displays magnetic heading (MH) on the right readout. The two values alternate every 2 seconds. On the CAP sign/direction buttons, plus (+) corresponds to east variation and minus (-) to west variation.

For manual MAG VAR, press the MAG VAR button. Press HDG, E, or W, the angle in degrees and tenths, and ENTER. Tenths of a degree must be entered even if zero. The TID displays including the NAV GRID will shift appropriately. Computed MAG VAR is constantly calculated in the AWG-9 by comparing the IMU’s true heading with the magnetic heading from AHRS. This difference is saved as computed MAG VAR. The table below shows the MAG VAR source used by the computer for displays and CAP entries.

Computed MAG VAR and manual MAG VAR are compared by the AWG-9 computer. If they differ by a certain value, the acronym MV will alternate with the IN or IM navigation mode acronym on the TID and HSD. The acronym is cleared when the difference falls below 5°.

ConditionMAG VAR source
COMP mode selected.Manual MAG VAR (vM).
RIO updating manual MAG VAR after AHRS selection.Manual MAG VAR (vM).
RIO updating manual MAG VAR after IMU or AHRS failure.Manual MAG VAR (vM).
All other situations.Current or last computed MAG VAR (vC).

If the selection of AHRS/AM occurs and no update (or re-entering of the same value) occurs last vC will be used.

đź’ˇ When operating in SLAVED or COMP mode near a magnetic disturbance, such as aboard a carrier, the MV acronym should be expected to appear.

The table below shows error source analysis and response to the MV acronym appearing in flight.

StepConditionActionResult
1MV alternates with selected nav mode on TID without a failure light present.Re-enter new corrected MAG VAR.MV acronym should disappear.
2MV remains after step 1 action.Compare heading on VDIG with standby compass while in INS, IMU/AM, or slaved compass mode and level un-accelerated flight.If headings correlate, the problem is likely in the IMU. Continue with step 3.
3Source of suspected vC error is the IMU.Pilot switches to COMP mode on AHRS controller and again compares headings.If the headings still correlate, the IMU heading is wrong.
4IMU heading is wrong.RIO selects AHRS/AM and enters correct MAG VAR.MV acronym should disappear.
5The VDIG does not agree with the standby compass in step 2.Synchronize AHRS with depression of the HDG button. If not possible set AHRS to COMP mode.If now in COMP mode all computer and displays will use IMU true heading with manual MAG VAR. The MV acronym might not disappear and the BDHI using the MAD might not be correct depending on the failure.

Tactical Data Category

If the CATEGORY switch is in TAC DATA, the following matrix appears in the MESSAGE windows:

WAY
PT
1
HOME
BASE
WAY
PT
2
DEF
PT
WAY
PT
3
HOST
AREA
FIX
PT
SURF
TGT
IPPT
TO
PT

The functions in this category have a TID symbol each, except the PT to PT FUNCTION. When pressing any one of these MESSAGE buttons, the TID symbol brightens and the activated MESSAGE push button illuminates, indicating a successful hook. The RIO can then use the functions for which hooking was required. Data regarding the hooked point can be displayed on the TID by pressing the according prefix button. Additionally, the latitude, longitude, and altitude of the hooked point can be entered by pressing either the LAT, LONG, or ALT button followed by the desired numbers. Like before, existing data is being displayed on the two lower readouts. If the new data is correct, the RIO can press the ENTER button and the new values will appear on the readout.

In addition to the NAV COMP, AHRS, and IMU lights mentioned above, the RIO caution/advisory panel contains two other advisory lights, C&D HOT and AWG-9 COND, that are indirectly related to navigation system operation. Illumination of either or both of these lights could mean degraded navigation operation and would require further investigation of the WCS.

Radar Altimeter System (AN/APN-194)

The radar altimeter is a low-altitude (0 to 5,000 feet), pulsed, range-tracking radar that measures the surface or terrain clearance below the aircraft. Altitude information is obtained by radiating a short-duration RF pulse from the transmit antenna to the Earth’s surface and measuring elapsed time until RF energy returns through the receiver antenna. The altitude is continuously presented to the pilot on an indicator dial in feet AGL. If either Landing or Take off mode is selected on the PDCP, radar altitude is displayed on the HUD from 0 to 1,400 feet.

The radar altimeter can operate in two modes. In the search mode, the system successively examines increments of range until the complete altitude range is searched for a return signal. When a return signal is detected, the system switches to the track mode and tracks the return signal to provide continuous altitude information.

If the radar altimeter drops out of the track mode, an OFF flag appears and the pointer is hidden by a mask. The altimeter will remain inoperative until a return signal is received, at which point the altimeter will display altitude above ground again. Reliable system operation in the altitude range of 0 to 5,000 feet permits close altitude control at minimum altitudes. The system will operate normally in bank angles up to 45° and in climbs or dives except when the reflected signal is too weak.

The system includes a height indicator (altimeter), a test light on the indicator, a low-altitude warning tone, a radar receiver-transmitter under the forward cockpit, and two antennas (transmit and receive), one on each side of the IR fairing, in the aircraft skin. During descent, the warning tone is heard momentarily when the aircraft passes through the altitude set on the limit index. When the aircraft is below this altitude, the red low-altitude warning light on the indicator will stay on.

đź’ˇ If radar altitude is unreliable, only the OFF flag is present.

The radar altimeter has a minimum warmup time of 3 minutes. During warmup, failure indications and erroneous readouts should be disregarded.

Radar Altimeter

The only controls for the system are on the Radar Altimeter on the pilot instrument panel. The indicator displays radar altitude above the Earth’s surface on a single-turn dial that is calibrated from 0 to 5,000 feet in decreasing scale to provide greater definition at lower altitudes. The control knob in the lower left corner of the indicator is a combination power switch, self-test switch, and positioning control for the low-altitude limit bug.

Altimeter BIT

To energize the self-test circuitry press and hold the control knob and the green test light will illuminate, the indicator will read 100 ±10 feet, and the HUD altitude scale should read approximately 100 feet. If the indicator passes below the altimeter limit bug setting, the aural and visual warnings are triggered. To resume normal operation simply release the control knob again.

Low-Altitude Audio Warning

A low-altitude 1,000-Hz tone provides an aural warning, modulated at two pulses per second, lasting for 3 seconds. The tone is played to both crew members when the aircraft descends below the altitude set on the low-altitude limit bug.

Three navigational modes exist in the F-14:

  1. Inertial Navigation Mode (INS)

    • Achieved by the INS, employing the IMU (and PSU) and the CSDC.
    • Provides the flight crew with own-aircraft position, velocity, attitude, and heading information.
  2. Inertial Measurement Unit/Airmass Mode (IMU/AM)

    • Serves as a backup navigation mode.
    • Entry into this mode permanently degrades INS platform heading alignment.
  3. AHRS/Air Mass Mode (AHRS/AM)

    • Utilizes the AHRS attitude and heading information in place of the IMU.
    • Serves as an additional backup mode if both INS and IMU/AM modes fail.

Inertial Navigation Mode

  • INS mode should be entered following an alignment.
  • READY light illuminates in GND and CVA alignment positions and stays on after launch in CAT alignment, indicating completion of alignment.
  • If the INS mode is selected, both the STBY and READY lights will go out. However, if the INS mode is selected before the caret turns into a diamond, both the STBY and READY lights will illuminate, and the system will revert to the IMU/AM backup mode.

Outputs provided by IMU and CSDC in INS mode

  • Aircraft latitude and longitude

  • Aircraft magnetic or true heading (depending on CAP prefix button selected)

  • System altitude (barometric damped inertial altitude)

  • Platform wander angle

  • Velocity components (x, y, z)

  • Vertical acceleration

  • Aircraft magnetic heading is derived from the AHRS. If the AHRS fails, magnetic heading is derived by subtracting the MAG VAR from the true heading.

  • The TID can display latitude, longitude, ground speed, ground track, true airspeed, wind (speed and direction), MAG VAR, altitude, and aircraft true or magnetic heading.

  • The WCS computer makes calculations in true north coordinates for steering and uses the magnetic heading input from the AHRS to update the value.

  • Wind is computed from the difference between inertial velocities and air mass velocities.

  • The WCS and CSDC also provide the steering and cueing functions required for display to the flight crew.

  • Destination or navigation points include waypoints 1, 2, or 3, fixed point, home base, surface target, and initial point, which may be designated by the DEST switch on the TID.

  • Navigational points (latitude and longitude) can also be inserted by the RIO using the CAP or by datalink message (when on the deck) using either cable or the RF link.

  • The course to set (heading to a selected navigational point), range, bearing, and time-to-go to a point are based on great circle calculations.

đź’ˇ If INS fails, the RIO should verify MAG VAR calculated and WIND data and update via manual entries as required.

IMU/AM Navigation Mode

  • If a failure of the navigation computer section of the CSDC or certain failures in the IMU are detected, the IMU/AM mode is entered automatically.
  • Failures are indicated by the STBY and READY lights illuminating and the NAV COMP light illuminating on the RIO CAUTION/ADVISORY panel.
  • The switch to IMU/AM is indicated by the IN acronym on the TID and HSD changing to IM. The RIO should select IMU/AM on the NAV MODE switch to extinguish the STBY and READY lights.
  • The IMU/AM mode can be entered manually by selecting IMU/AM with the NAV MODE switch.
  • If the switch is turned off before selecting IMU/AM mode, the computer cannot enter the IMU/AM mode for approximately 3 to 5 minutes. During this time, the aircraft must remain stationary on the ground or in level un-accelerated flight.

đź’ˇ If an alignment past coarse exists with no NAV COMP failure and the RIO switches to IMU/AM, the READY light will flash, indicating that if the switch is not returned to INS within 5 seconds the INS mode cannot be re-entered without completing a new alignment.

  • The WCS computer performs dead-reckoning navigation in the IMU/AM mode, using heading information from the IMU and true airspeed from the CADC.
  • Wind can be applied by either using the wind last computed in the INS mode or wind data manually entered through the CAP.

đź’ˇ After entering the IMU/AM mode, check wind and MAG VAR values. If MV is in error, enter own-aircraft true heading. If winds are in error, update.

IMU Reset Procedure

  1. NAV MODE switch - OFF, for a few seconds.
  2. NAV MODE switch - IMU.
  3. Fly straight and level for 5 minutes.
  4. Verify IM acronym.

AHRS/Air Mass Mode

  • The AHRS/AM mode is another backup mode for navigation. It uses the last known aircraft position, either from the last navigation computer value or by manual data entry from the RIO. It then extrapolates the present position of the aircraft.
  • AHRS/AM mode is automatically selected if the IMU fails or by switching to AHRS/AM on the NAV MODE switch. An IMU failure is indicated by the STBY and READY status lights and the IMU advisory light illuminating. Additionally, the attitude status readout on the TID changes to AH.

🟡 CAUTION: The navigation mode will not automatically switch to AHRS/AM upon an IMU failure when the navigation system is in IMU/AM mode with a failed IMU quantizer and NAV COMP advisory light illuminated. Because the VDIG/TID/DDD are displaying invalid IMU attitudes, the NAV MODE switch should be moved to AHRS/AM.

đź’ˇ Although the navigation mode automatically switches to AHRS when the IMU fails, the STBY and READY lights will remain on until the RIO selects AHRS/AM on the NAV MODE switch.

  • When AHRS/AM is selected on the NAV MODE switch, the AHRS provides heading information required for DR navigation in place of the IMU platform and the CSDC provides barometric altitude, altitude rate, and true airspeed as in the IMU/AM mode.
  • To update wind speed and direction and magnetic variation, use the CAP.

The AHRS can be operated in any of three subheading modes selected on the compass controller panel:

  • SLAVED - Magnetic north referenced (flux value), directional gyro is slaved to flux value, used where reliable magnetic heading reference is available.

  • DG - Free azimuth gyro, compensated for drift because of Earth’s (polar operations), used where magnetic reference is unreliable.

  • COMP - Magnetic north reference direct (flux value), no gyro damping. The HUD, VDI, HSD, and multiple display indicator use manual magnetic variation (vM) automatically in this mode.

  • The RIO can switch from either INS mode to AHRS/AM mode or from IMU/AM mode to AHRS/AM mode for comparison, without fear of degradation, since the AHRS is a separate system.

  • This cannot be done with the INS and IMU/AM modes since the IMU is used in both cases and it would result in permanent degradation to the IMU alignment.

  • In the case of an IMU failure, the nav system will automatically operate in the AHRS/AM mode with the navigation and data readout panel in INS, as long as the WCS computer receives heading from the AHRS and airspeed from the CADC.

đź’ˇ If takeoff is performed in the AHRS/AM mode, MAG VAR and WIND must be manually inserted via CAP for proper navigation computations.

  • When the platform is aligned and the AHRS/AM backup navigation mode is selected, the STBY light is off but the READY light is on, indicating that the inertial navigation mode can be selected if desired. The same functions and outputs for display are computed as in INS, however since different inputs are used for some calculations a degraded navigation performance is to be expected.

Steering

There are two basic types of steering: navigation and attack. Attack steering modes will be covered in the Weapons and Weapons Employment overview.

  • Navigation steering is computed on either a great circle course or rhumb line to a fixed point on the Earth’s surface or as a deviation from a selected course or heading.
  • The point used for steering can be the RIO’s selected destination (three waypoints, fixed point, identification point, surface target, or home base), a TACAN station, ADF information, ACLS information, or a data link waypoint.

Flight Modes and Steering Sub-Modes

The pilot can choose between five VDIG display formats (HUD modes) on the pilot display control panel. These five flight modes are arranged as five vertical, mutually exclusive buttons:

  • Take Off (T.O.)
  • Cruise (CRUISE)
  • Air to Air (A/A)
  • Air to Ground (A/G)
  • Landing (LDG)

đź’ˇ ACM cover open selection overrides all modes, except the T.O. and LDG modes.

  • Apart from the VDIG displays, the flight mode selections also control AFCS, armament, and WCS logic. In addition to the essential data such as altitude, vertical speed indicator etc. the VDIG format also provides steering cues.

In each of the flight modes, the pilot can choose between the following five types of steering commands:

  • TACAN (TACAN)

  • Destination (DEST)

  • AWL/PCD

  • Vector (VEC)

  • Manual (MAN)

  • The five selections are arranged horizontally along the bottom of the PDCP. These steering modes determine the display format on the pilot HSD and the RIO multiple display indicator.

  • The HSD and multiple display indicator present, in a horizontal plane, steering to the selected point.

  • The HSD follows the five sub-modes when the pilot places the HSD-MODE switch to NAV.

  • The RIO can do the same by setting the MODE switch on his multiple display indicator control panel to NAV.

  • Also, when LDG is selected, the pilot has the option of displaying ICLS or ACL information via switches on the PDCP that can be used to individually and independently select the HUD and VDI for display. A typical choice would be to select ICLS (SPN-41 /ARA-63) for the HUD and for D/L the VDI.

A/A (air-to-air) and A/G (air-to-ground) modes are further explained in the Weapons and Weapons Employment overview.

đź’ˇ The STEERING indicator drum on the navigation control and data readout panel provides a readout for the RIO to inform him of what steering sub-mode the pilot bas chosen.

Takeoff Steering

  • To enter the takeoff steering mode, press the T.O. button on the display control panel. The VDIG will display a vertical speed indicator on the left side and an altitude scale on the right side in the HUD.
  • Before takeoff, the pilot should check the magnetic heading on top of the HUD and VDI against a known reference (i.e., runway heading and most importantly BRC on the carrier, due to the large magnetic distortion on the ship). The vertical speed indicator should be used to verify a positive climb after takeoff.
  • After takeoff, the navigation system normally computes wind and magnetic variation, which are needed for steering. For backup modes, the WCS uses the last computed or RIO-entered wind speed, direction, and magnetic variation.

Take-Off-TACAN Steering

  • The TACAN steering sub-mode works the same, whether used for takeoff, cruise, or landing, by providing the pilot with a TACAN deviation.
  • The pilot can set the course or TACAN radial with the CRS control on the HSD. The TACAN displays are available on the HUD, VDI, HSD, and multiple display indicator. The HSD and the CMD display TACAN range and the relative bearing to a selected TACAN station.
  • To enter the sub-mode, press the TACAN button on the PDCP. After selection of TACAN course, the HUD and VDI display the TACAN deviation symbol and a TO and FROM symbology.
  • On the HSD and multiple display indicator, an arrow on the deviation bar pointing in the same direction as the TACAN course indicates a course toward the station, an arrow pointing in the opposite direction indicates a course away from the station. On the HUD, a dashed line indicates FROM, a solid line indicates TO. On the VDI, a dark bar indicates FROM, a bright bar indicates TO.
  • On the HUD, the deviation symbol moves 3° (linear) in the field of view for a 6° deviation from the selected TACAN radial. These limits prevent the symbol from leaving the field of view or interfering with the scales on the left and right side. On the VDI, the deviation symbol is scaled to move 1.5 inches (linear) for a 6° deviation.

Takeoff Manual Steering

  • The manual steering mode is similar to the basic takeoff mode.
  • The mode is entered by pressing the MAN button and selecting a desired course with the CRS control on the HSD.
  • The navigation system will then display a command heading on the VDI as a small diamond under the magnetic heading scale.

Cruise Steering

  • To enter the cruise flight mode, press the CRUISE button on the PDCP.
  • There are four steering sub-modes available during cruise operations: TACAN, destination, manual, and vector.
  • While it is physically possible to press the AWL/PCD steering button on the display control panel, the action is without function in cruise mode.

đź’ˇ Should the AWL/PCD sub-mode be selected while in CRUISE, it will inhibit the display of other steering cues.

Cruise TACAN Steering

  • This sub-mode works in the same way as take off TACAN steering and provides the same readouts and displays to the flight crew as described under take off TACAN steering.

Cruise Destination Steering

  • To enter the cruise destination steering mode, press the DEST button on the PDCP.
  • This will provide steering as a command heading symbol on the VDI and HSD to a waypoint selected by the RIO on the navigation control and data readout panel.
  • The RIO can change latitude/longitude of the destination by hooking the point on the TID and inserting new data.

đź’ˇ Destination steering to the defended point is provided by the RIO selecting MAN with the TID DEST switch. This option is not available in TARPS.

  • In the destination steering sub-mode, the destination selected by the RIO and the NAV MODE in use will be alternately displayed on the bottom center of the HSD.

cruise man ECMD showing the navigational display for Cruise with Manual steering selected.

cruise tac VDI and HSD showing navigational displays for Cruise with TACAN steering selected.

cruise dest HSD showing navigational display for Cruise with Waypoint 1 set as Destination.

Landing Steering Modes

  • To enter the landing steering mode, press the LDG button on the PDCP.
  • Usually, the LDG mode is engaged at any point from marshal point on. In the case of a go-around, waveoff, or bolter, the pilot can press the T.O. button on the PDCP to engage the take-off steering mode.
  • The landing mode symbology is in general the same as the takeoff mode symbology. Exceptions are the addition of angle-of-attack error symbol on the HUD (the E-bracket, referenced towards the displayed aircraft wings and not the velocity vector) and the velocity vector symbol, as well as 5° pitch increments on the VDI.

đź’ˇ In all landing sub-modes, a VDIG breakaway symbol can be displayed upon receipt of a D/L waveoff message.

  • There are three steering sub-modes available during landing: TACAN, VEC, and AWL/PCD.
  • For the TACAN or VEC sub-modes of LDG, the HUD, VDI, and HSD displays are similar to the same sub-modes in CRUISE except that in LDG the HUD display includes the velocity vector symbol, the radar altitude symbol, and the vertical speed indicator symbol.

AWL Steering

If ICLS information from the ARA-63 is available at the marshalling area, the pilot can select the AWL/PCD sub mode. To observe glideslope displays, the HUD and VDI AWL switches on the pilot display and control panel should be placed in the ILS position.

The HUD and VDIG will then provide vertical and lateral precision course vector symbols, forming crossed pointers that are driven by the ICLS. On the HUD, full-scale vector deflection is limited to 2°. Full-scale vector deflection on the VDI is 1.5°. In the AWL/PCD sub-mode of LDG, the HSD will additionally display TACAN information if the HSD is set to NAV mode on the PDCP.

At the acquisition window, the pilot can either continue with the ILS display, or, if ACL information from the SPN-42 data link is available, he can select ACL of the AWL switches for either the VDI or HUD displays or both. The ACL display uses the same vertical and lateral precision course vector symbols as the ICLS, but these are now driven by the SPN-42 data link. A typical display combination during the final stages of landing is ILS on the HUD and ACL on the VDI. With valid ACL data available, the AFCS may be engaged by selecting ACL on the VEC/PCD, OFF, and ACL switch located on the AFCS control panel.

landing tac HUD showing Landing mode display with TACAN set as destination source.

landing acl hud HUD showing Landing mode with AWL/PCD set as Destination source, ACL set as source of glideslope and localizer.

landing acl vdi VDI showing Landing mode with AWL/PCD set as Destination source, ILS (ICLS) set as source of glideslope and localizer.

Inertial Navigation System (INS)

An important feature of the INS is its fast alignment capability over a wide range of temperature. The INS is a dead-reckoning system that derives speed as a function of aircraft accelerations. Two accelerometers are used to measure acceleration in the horizontal plane. These outputs result in velocities along the X and Y axes after corrections for the Earth’s rotational velocity (coriolis acceleration) and integration inputs. These X and Y velocities can be resolved in the IMU platform coordinate system through wander angle and put in the Earth referenced north/east/down system. Integration about the north and east axes also provides increments of latitude and longitude. Navigation in such manner gives the flight crew detailed and precise knowledge of the position, direction and velocity of their aircraft at any time.

An INS device like the AN/ASN-92 requires a high precision of measurements of the acceleration and the attitude, because even the smallest inaccuracy can result in a significant error when accumulated over extended time.

Consider an example: the inertial platform is slightly tilted from the nominal position, let’s say by 0.002°. Then, the horizontal accelerometers are no longer parallel to the ground, and this means that they start to be sensitive to gravity. If not corrected, this gravitational component is interpreted by the navigation computer as a horizontal acceleration. If the wrong attitude is kept constant for one hour, it will result in an error of the measured position of over one nautical mile. It is a significant inaccuracy, and it comes as a result of such a minimal alignment error.

The accuracy of the INS degrades with time – usually the longer they operate in the navigation mode, the higher the error they accumulate.

Inertial Measurement Unit

The IMU is a three-axis, four-gimbal, all-attitude unit containing two gyros and three accelerometers. The gyros and the accelerometers are mounted to a platform that is free to rotate with respect to the base (aircraft). The four-gimbal system provides gimbal-lock free rotation and uses torquer motors to correct platform attitude errors. The gyros sense angular rotation about their sensitive axes and are the source of information about the aircraft attitude. They also stabilize the whole platform and keep the constant orientation of the accelerometers with respect to the ground (gravity). Two accelerometers are used to measure acceleration in the horizontal plane; the third accelerometer measures vertical acceleration. The sensitive axes of the accelerometers are orthogonal. Their displacement is sensed by pick-off coils that develop a signal that is amplified, then applied to a torquer that restores the mass to its null position. The magnitude of torquing current required is proportional to the acceleration. The sensed acceleration signal is integrated in the computer and used to calculate aircraft velocity and displacement from the initial position. The attitude of the platform is also corrected continuously to account for the effects associated with the Earth’s rotation and device inaccuracies.

This design is widespread for gimballed inertial navigation systems. It was used for the F-14, but also for the Space Shuttle and many other aircraft of the era.

IMU BIT

In case of IMU failure, the CSDC automatically switches to a backup navigation mode. The IMU BIT monitors the temperature, internal error signals, and electrical characteristics of the IMU.

If the CSDC detects a failure in the IMU, it informs the WCS computer and the IMU acronym indicating the component of the INS that failed is displayed on the TID. The IMU advisory light illuminates on the RIO caution/advisory panel.

If the NAV MODE switch is in INS, and the NAV COMP light illuminates, there is a failure in the INS or CSDC; the navigation system will automatically switch to a backup mode. The NAV COMP light remains illuminated and the RIO should set the NAV MODE switch to IMU/AM position. The NAV COMP advisory light indicates that the INS is operating in a degraded mode as a result of manual selection by the RIO using the NAV MODE switch or automatic selection because of a failure of the CSDC or the IMU.

đź’ˇ

  • When an IMU quantizer failure occurs in the INS mode, the system will automatically select the IMU/AM mode and the STBY/READY and NAV COMP lights will illuminate. The RIO should move the NAV MODE switch from the INS to IMU/AM. The STBY/READY lights go out - but the NAV COMP light will remain illuminated.

  • With a NAV COMP light and a CSI ACRO displayed on the TID, there is no auto-switch to a backup attitude source for the HUD or the VDI nor is the RIO able to manually switch to any backup mode.

IMU Light

If there is a failure in the IMU, the IMU advisory light will illuminate; the navigation system switches to the AHRS/AM mode and accuracy may become degraded Attitude information for the VDIG and missile control system are now provided by the AHRS. The IMU light remains illuminated until the RIO selects AHRS/AM. With an AHRS light computed magnetic variation (vC) should be verified and updated if necessary.

Standby lightReady lightDescription
ONONSelected navigational mode not functioning correctly due to failure. Normal during first 45 seconds of alignment initialization.
ONOFFAlignment underway (after first 45 seconds) or IMU/AM selected prior to coarse align. Leave switch in selected mode to complete alignment or to wait for IMU erection.
FlashingFlashingAlignment not initialized due to parking brake not being set.
FlashingOFFAlignment suspended (paused) due to parking brake not being set.
OFFFlashingAlignment suspended due to parking brake not being set after the second marker.
OFFONAlignment good enough for weapons employment (second marker on screen), or INS or IMU/AM available when in AHRS/AM. Wait for complete alignment or select mode as desired.
OFFOFFSystem functioning correctly in set mode or system off.
OFFFlashingIf selection of IMU/AM occurs with system aligned the ready light will flash for 5 seconds indicating that INS should be reselected. After this timeframe, the alignment is lost.

🟡 CAUTION: After RIO selection IMU/AM because of a failure, and a complete IMU failure occurs afterwards, the system will display erroneous attitude information to the pilot. The CSDC will neither automatically exit IMU/AM to the AHRS/AM mode (if a valid AHRS exists) nor remove VDIG/TID/DDD attitude displays. The RIO should manually switch to the AHRS/AM mode.

Whenever the NAV COMP light illuminates the flight crew should be cautious of attitude displays and frequently cross-reference the VDIG/TID/DDD and standby attitude indicator, particularly during non-VFR conditions and be alert for an IMU failure. If an IMU failure is indicated by the IMU light, display of IMU acronym in OBC continuous monitor, removal of the IM acronym in the TID attitude reference source buffer, and the NAV COMP light goes out, the RIO should move the NAV MODE switch from the IMU/AM to the AHRS/AM and disregard the READY light. If a valid AHRS exists, its attitude information will be displayed, otherwise the VDIG/TID/DDD attitude displays will be removed.

AHRS Light

If the AHRS self-test has detected a failure the AHRS Light will illuminate. The magnetic heading on the HUD and VDI is now controlled by the WCS computer. Because it uses the last known value for magnetic variation, the heading will degrade over long distances and time unless new values of magnetic variation are entered by the RIO via the CAP. IFR flight should be avoided completely.

The NPS provides electrical power for the IMU and CSDC. A nickel-cadmium battery provides power to the IMU and CSDC for up to 10 seconds if there is a power interruption or transient.

INS Alignment Modes

Before INS can be used for navigation, the inertial platform must be aligned so that it is level relative to local vertical and its orientation relative to true north. This is done automatically in two phases: coarse alignment and fine alignment.

The coarse phase begins when the initialization sequence is complete and performs initial coarse estimates of the IMU platform wander angle. The successful completion of this phase requires a minimum local level error in the IMU platform to proceed to the fine alignment phase.

IMU elements that require warmup are being heated by the IMU heaters. In addition, the IMU gimbals (roll, pitch, azimuth) are caged through their respective synchros to the IMU case (airframe reference). The IMU gyros are brought up to running speed, and coarse leveling is performed using the accelerometer outputs.

When power is applied to the NPS and IMU, the SMAL program from the bulk storage tape is read into the WCS computer non-write-protected memory. The alignment program estimates a wander angle, velocity errors, and gyro-torquing correction signals.

These values are sent to the CSDC to align the IMU and to initialize the CSDC NAV program. The following assemblies are used during alignment: IMU, NPS, CSDC, WCS computer, CAP (computer address panel), navigation control and data readout panel. For carrier alignment also the data link receiver-processor is used.

There are four primary alignment modes: SAT ground and carrier alignment, and NON SAT ground and carrier alignment. SAT operation allows OBC testing during the alignment. Either alignment mode can be used in SAT or NON SAT. (SAT modes are not yet implemented in DCS)

The basic TID display formats are represented in the image below. The automatic sequence is the same for all modes, except for CVA ALIGN, where the ship’s motion is inserted by the data link.

The CAT ALIGN overrides the requirement for the parking brake to be on (suspend align). There are two more alignment sub-modes: stored heading and handset. The handset mode is used for CVA ALIGN when SINS data is not available. The stored heading mode is used for rapid alignment, by using a previous alignment (reference alignment) to align the system quickly.

Initialization of any alignment mode requires entry of the following values in either own aircraft or HB (homebase) for the following:

  • Latitude
  • Longitude
  • Corrected pressure altitude.

In addition, if handset alignment is used on the carrier, the following values must also be entered:

  • Speed
  • Ship’s true heading.

đź’ˇ The parking brake must be on during initialization of any alignment. When the parking brake is released during coarse alignment, the STBY and READY lights flash and the align program will reinitialize. If the parking brake is released during fine alignment, a suspend align discrete is sent to the CSDC, the STBY or READY light blinks, and the time into alignment clock on the TID stops.

Alignment Display

Non-SAT Alignments

Ground Alignment

For land-based operations, the ground alignment procedure is used to align the IMU. Aircraft or homebase latitude, longitude, and altitude are entered into the WCS computer via the CAP. This may be accomplished before or after selecting GND align. Selecting GND ALIGN on the NAV MODE switch initiates the align operation. However note that whatever has been hooked when switching to ALIGN, is injected as your own coordinates. You can use homebase or preset own aircraft coordinates for example, but if you didn’t, you will have between 90 to 120 seconds to enter your own coordinates and you cannot wait for the alignment to finish, or it will trigger the observable error (O) and alignment will have to be reinitialized.

💡 If fine align has not been achieved, entry of the own aircraft’s latitude will restart the alignment. On completion of the alignment program read-in, the alignment display appears on the TID.

During the initialization, the TID will display an alignment time of 0.7. After 42 to 45 seconds, the NAV COMP light on the caution/advisory panel goes out, indicating that the IMU has entered the ready state; the READY light also goes out. The alignment program will begin with the computation of the alignment parameters.

At this time an alignment status indicator, called a caret (v), will start to move from left to right. The status of the alignment is indicated by where the caret appears in relationship to three alignment-tick indicators. The first tick indicator is called the coarse-align complete marker, the second is the alert launch criteria marker, and the third indicator is the fine-align complete marker. An elapsed time indicator provides alignment time in minutes and tenths.

The clock indicator will begin with 0.7 displayed and continue after a 42-second delay. After 9.9 minutes, the clock display will pass through zero and begin again. If the alignment is suspended (parking brake), the clock will stop counting until alignment is resumed.

Between the first and second ticks are the telltale status indicators that indicate a failure of one of four systems: C = calibration data fail, T = temperature (cold IMU), S = SINS data invalid, and 0 = observable (alignment data bad, i.e., LAT, LONG, SPEED, etc.). The letter that appears indicates which system has a failure.

A C indicates a failure in the transfer of calibration data between the IMU and the CSDC, and the alignment will not progress.

The T appears normally at the start of alignment and disappears when the IMU has reached operating temperature. If the T does not disappear, there is a failure in the system and a non-stored heading alignment will not progress.

The S can appear at the start of any CV alignment and will disappear shortly after. If the S does not disappear, there is a failure and the result will be a bad alignment. The S also appears if incoming SINS data is not valid, in which case the alignment should not be trusted.

đź’ˇ

  • The CSDC and IMU outputs as well as data inputs are constantly monitored and if either an excessive value in the X or Y acceleration is sensed, or a bad value from wrong lat or long data input, a 0 (bad observable) is posted on the TID and the alignment stalls (ceases to continue).

  • The IMU may be preheated by selecting IMU/AM on the TID NAV MODE switch when operating on ground or aircraft power. This energizes the IMU and navigation power supply, which turns on the IMU heater prior to start of a ground or carrier alignment. The IMU should not be preheated for longer than 5 minutes.

During coarse alignment, the alignment caret moves based on the wander angle error. If the parking brake is released during this phase, the alignment will reset.

The V will reach the first tick when coarse alignment is complete. When the program switches to fine alignment, the caret changes into a diamond, which indicates to the pilot that he may release the parking brake (suspend alignment) and taxi, if OBC is complete. After the parking brake is reset, alignment will continue and the diamond will move right as alignment improves.

At the second tick, which indicates that alignment meets the minimum criteria to launch weapons, the STBY light will go off and the READY light will illuminate. The INS mode may be entered at this point. If INS is not selected, the diamond continues to move to the right. When it reaches the third tick, it indicates that fine alignment is completed and a dot will appear in the diamond (<>).

You can leave the system in alignment mode even after fine align is complete, which will provide a progressively more accurate alignment. How much more accuracy is gained depends on the quality of alignment when fine align was completed. This can be rather minimal in some cases, but, when it is further left in alignment for long enough, it will always provide a certain amount of improvement.

đź’ˇ If alignment is suspended and the aircraft is taxied over a distance greater than 4000 feet, the quality of the alignment becomes unknown to a point where it might be unreliable. Alignment reinitialization is advised.

If the caret (v) or diamond stop moving, the program has stopped aligning. If they stop between the first and third ticks (coarse and fine), it means that alignment has been suspended. The clock will stop counting if that is the case. If alignment continues, the clock resumes counting until switched out of alignment by NAV MODE switch or if the parking brake is released again.

💡 The alignment display will not go past the coarse align tick until the IMU temperature has reached 165°. When this temperature is reached, the T symbol will disappear. The temperature interlock is bypassed when performing a stored heading alignment. The IMU should be preheated for a stored heading alignment, as it usually completes in under 2 minutes, which could result in a bad alignment.

Selecting INS will turn off the READY light, terminate alignment and the tactical display will appear, and the normal navigation display will become available.

đź’ˇ

  • When the NAV MODE switch is set to INS, the CSDC is in navigation mode and the READY light goes out.

  • After selecting the INS navigation mode, the AWG-9 align program continues for approximately three align data cycles (18 seconds) before entering INS. This also applies if the aircraft takes off before INS is selected.

The RIO and pilot can then observe an IN acronym on the attitude status readout on the TID or TID repeat.

If you want to reinitialize an alignment when observing an acronym during fine alignment or if noting a stalled alignment, the following methods can be used:

  • Select both INS mode switch and WCS PWR switch to off. Allow TID displays to collapse. Proceed with normal start sequence.
  • INS mode switch to desired align mode.
  • INS mode switch to INS. Verify system in INS (IN acronym on TID), cycle mode switch to off and back to desired alignment mode.

Failing to follow above procedures when reinitializing a fine alignment will result in severely degraded alignment quality. To reinitialize the program during coarse align, the RIO has to unselect GND ALIGN, re-enter LAT and LONG and reselect GND ALIGN.

Carrier Alignment

When aligning on a carrier with a changing latitude, longitude, and heading, the carrier alignment procedure is used. INS can be aligned in three different ways on a carrier: with RF data link alignment and manual (handset) alignment - deck-edge cable alignment is not implemented in DCS. TID displays the same information as during a GND ALIGN procedure.

Note that you will get erroneous heading readings on a carrier, even if fine align is complete. The heading can deviate up to 20 or 30 degrees, depending on the parking position on the carrier and the carrier’s heading, due to the carrier’s own magnetic field and induced magnetic field. It is important that the flight crew know the carrier’s BRC. The magnetic variation caused by the carrier’s magnetic distortion will go away shortly after take off. This magnetic distortion does not impact the alignment quality.

The primary carrier alignment mode is the RF data link alignment (CAINS). This mode uses the ship’s INS (SINS) to align the IMU. Inertial inputs including the ship’s longitude, latitude, north and east velocity as well as roll, pitch, heading, and heading rate are transmitted to the WCS computer via the RF data link.

The data is transmitted by the ship’s data link equipment. To align the INS by the CVA alignment method, follow these steps:

  1. Turn on the power to the data link system
  2. Turn the WCS power to STBY
  3. Set the D/L mode on the DATA LINK control panel to CAINS/WAYPT
  4. Select CVA ALIGN on the NAV MODE switch.

The received data is processed by the data link equipment in the aircraft and transmitted to the WCS computer. The WCS computer compares the IMU data with the ship’s INS data and sends correction signals to the CSDC to fine align the IMU.

đź’ˇ

  • If CVA or CAT ALIGN is selected prior to selecting OBC BIT, data link OBC testing is inhibited. (Not implemented yet)

  • The fine alignment complete tick mark indicates completion of fine align and whether alignment data is SINS or handset. When good SINS data is not received during a filter cycle, the fine alignment complete tick mark jumps to the left approximately 0.75 inches. The jump indicates the SINS data is intermittent, and handset alignment data is required.

CVA ALIGN is much similar to GND ALIGN, and alignment is suspended, stalled, and reinitialized in the same manner as during GND ALIGN, depending on whether it has been induced during the coarse or fine alignment phase.

đź’ˇ If SINS data link is lost during taxi, a flashing HS will appear on the TID. This will disappear when data link is reacquired; however, because of align timing requirements, it may remain flashing up to 8 seconds after data link is reacquired. If the HS flashing does not stop 8 seconds after resetting the parking brake, SINS data is lost but the alignment can continue by entering carrier speed and true heading into the own aircraft file and completing the align in handset mode. If datalink is reacquired during this period, the HS will disappear from the TID and a normal datalink CVA align will continue.

To complete the alignment, set the NAV MODE switch to INS. A successfully aligned INS is indicated by both the STBY and READY lights off and the IN acronym in the status readout on the TID.

đź’ˇ

  • Do not switch to INS while the ship is in a turn, even if fine align has been completed. This will degrade the alignment quality significantly. If you wait until the ship’s turn is complete, alignment quality will not be affected. Handset alignment is not affected.

  • If during a CVA alignment the CAINS/WAYPT-TAC switch is unlatched to TAC by power transient, or data link signal is lost, the INS will revert to a handset alignment (HS).

Carrier Cable Alignment

The deck-edge cable alignment (SINS) is an alternative to the RF data link alignment, where inputs are sent over a secure cable to the data link from the deck-edge outlet box of the carrier. Switching from RF data link to cable inputs is done automatically when the cable is connected. To initiate a CVA align with SINS via cable, use the same steps as for the RF data link alignment. As cable and RF data link alignment are virtually the same, it has not been implemented in DCS.

đź’ˇ The SINS-cable is currently not implemented in DCS.

Handset Alignment

The HS alignment mode is a manual alignment option available for carrier alignment, should SINS data from RF data link or cable not be available, inaccurate, or interrupted (indicated by the TILT light on the DDI and/or the fine alignment complete tick mark jumping to the left about 0.75 inches). The HS is also very similar to the GND ALIGN mode, but the RIO has to input more data and the computer takes longer to process because of the ship movement.

IF CVA ALIGN is selected with the NAV MODE switch and no SINS data is available, a flashing HS acronym will appear on the TID. Whenever HS flashes on the TID before alignment starts and the RIO chooses to align the system with handset align, he must enter the according ship’s data in the following order:

  • Speed
  • Ship’s true heading
  • Latitude
  • Longitude
  • Corrected pressure altitude.

If during coarse align data link is lost (RF or cable) or during any portion of a stored heading alignment, the alignment will reinitialize and the HS acronym will be flashing. The alignment can then be continued with the handset mode as described above.

If the reinitialization occurs during the fine align phase of a stored heading alignment, the CSDC alignment routine must be reset first by turning the AWG-9 OFF for 6 seconds.

If data link is lost during a normal fine align phase, HS will be entered automatically, but the acronym will not flash and the alignment will continue. If data link is regained, the HS acronym will disappear and normal CVA align via RF or cable data link will continue. When data link is regained, the acronym can remain for up to 8 seconds.

đź’ˇ If HS is not flashing, valid SINS data has already been entered. If it is flashing, SINS data has to be entered manually.

On the CAP NAV DATA matrix use OWN AC, and the LAT and LONG prefix push buttons; to enter the ships’ heading and speed use own-aircraft HDG and SPD buttons. Once this data has been entered HS will stop flashing and the alignment will progress like a normal GND ALIGN, but can take up to 3 times as long.

đź’ˇ The carrier needs to maintain a constant speed and heading during alignment for this method to be successful. Remember that handset alignment quality will always be inferior to a normal CVA ALIGN fine alignment quality.

Reinitialization

To reinitialize an alignment during the fine align phase, if an observable acronym (O) or a stalled alignment has been noticed, the RIO can use any of the following methods:

  1. Set NAV MODE switch and WCS switch to OFF. Allow TID displays to collapse. Proceed with normal start sequence.
  2. Set NAV MODE switch to OFF. Set NAV MODE switch to desired align mode.
  3. Set NAV MODE switch to INS. Verify system in INS (IN acronym on TID). Cycle NAV MODE switch to OFF and back to desired alignment mode.

Failing to follow above procedures when reinitializing a fine alignment will result in severely degraded alignment quality. To reinitialize the program during coarse align, the RIO has to unselect GND ALIGN, re-enter LAT and LONG and reselect GND ALIGN.

Stored Heading Alignment

A feature of the INS that allows for quick-reaction response is the stored-heading alignment. The aircraft has to be parked and tied down in the alert position (wheel-chocks in DCS) for this procedure to be successful. Additionally, the aircraft heading has to be stored with a reference alignment before the aircraft is being powered down (and back up again).

When the aircraft is powered back up, the system takes less than 2 minutes to align the INS from the stored heading, while providing almost the same accuracy like a full, fine ground or carrier alignment. When align is selected and a reference alignment is available, an ASH acronym for automatic stored heading will be displayed on the TID and STORED HDG ALIGN will illuminate on the CAP. The ASH acronym tells the RIO that a stored heading has been entered automatically.

No further action from the RIO is needed, ASH align will continue and ASH will remain on the TID as an advisory. Pressing once on the STORED HDG ALIGN on the CAP will end the ASH align and initiate normal alignment. The ASH acronym will disappear. Pressing the STORED HDG ALIGN a second time will reinitialize the stored heading alignment, however ASH won’t be displayed on the TID anymore.

đź’ˇ STBY/READY lights should be monitored for simultaneous illumination. If simultaneous illumination appears after 42 to 45 seconds, a failure has caused the alignment to re-initiate and may result in an erroneous alignment. The RIO must turn NAV MODE switch to OFF for 1 second, then restart the alignment following normal ground or carrier alignment procedures.

The reference alignment can be done with either internal or external power. To do a reference alignment, enter the latitude and longitude via the CAP into the own-aircraft file. This can be achieved by an automatic transfer from homebase entry into own-aircraft before selecting GND ALIGN, or entry into own-aircraft file after GND ALIGN has been selected.

The aircraft’s latitude and longitude can be entered into homebase and transferred into own-aircraft file through the following steps:

  1. Set the NAV MODE switch to GND ALIGN.
  2. Select CAP category TAC DATA.
  3. Depress HOME BASE and enter aircraft longitude and latitude via the CAP data entry buttons.

Aircraft latitude and longitude can be entered directly through the following steps:

  1. Set the NAV MODE switch to either OFF or GND ALIGN.
  2. Select CAP category NAV.
  3. Depress OWN A/C and enter aircraft longitude and latitude via the CAP data entry buttons.

đź’ˇ Depressing OWN A/C hooks own aircraft. If longitude and latitude is entered with the NAV MODE switch set to OFF, own aircraft must be hooked when the NAV MODE switch is set from OFF to GND ALIGN again. Be aware that whatever has been hooked (OWN AC or HB) will provide the data that is entered when NAV MODE is set from OFF to GND ALIGN.

For a reference alignment, alignment has to reach fine align complete. Both CVA ALIGN and GND ALIGN can be used to establish a reference alignment. The reference alignment is complete when a dot appears in the diamond.

To establish a reference alignment follow these steps:

  1. WCS switch - STBY.
  2. NAV MODE - CVA or GND.
  3. DATA LINK - ON (CV ops only).
  4. D/L MODE - CAINS/WAYPT (CV ops only).
  5. Reference alignment continues to fine align complete.
  6. NAV MODE switch to INS.
  7. WCS - OFF.
  8. NAV MODE - OFF.

💡 Unstable current or temporary loss of power will cause the CAINS to be deselected and will be indicated by a flashing HS acronym. A reference alignment cannot be done through a handset alignment, even if continued to fine align complete. For a successful reference alignment the aircraft must not move and the parking brake must not be cycled after the reference heading has been stored. For a valid reference alignment, it isn’t necessary to switch NAV MODE to INS, instead it can be switched directly to OFF from either CVA or GND ALIGN.

Catapult Alignment

The CAT ALIGN mode is used to prevent suspend align when positioned on the catapult and the parking brake has been released. The purpose of the catapult align mode is to provide normal CVA ALIGN as long as possible. When CAT ALIGN is selected, large roll, pitch, speed, and heading changes of the ship can cause the program to automatically switch to INS.

An error of latitude or longitude in the computer position of the aircraft can be corrected by a navigation fix update. Updating is especially important in the backup modes (AHRS AM and IMU/ AM) because of the estimated winds and magnetic variation changes. A nav fix is done via a ground-reference-point (latitude and longitude) position. The range and bearing of this position to the present aircraft position is used to update or correct existing values. The nav system may be updated by either a radar fix, a TACAN fix, or a visual fix.

Before performing a nav fix, the latitude and longitude of the desired update point (radar, TACAN, or visual) must be stored in one of eight navigation point locations (three WPs, FIX PT, HOME BASE, HOST AREA, DEF PT, and IP). This data can be stored prior to flight by data link or by manual insertion. Then follow these steps:

  1. Hook the Waypoint you choose to select for the nav fix.
  2. Check the stored latitude and longitude on the TID.
  3. Rotate the CATEGORY switch to NAV and select the desired type of update.

Note that updating the position while in INS, and to a lesser degree while in IMU, can introduce a greater navigational position error than already present, in particular if a radar fix is used to update the nav system. Updates with a visual or TACAN fix provide reasonable accuracy (assuming a good MAG VAR during TACAN updates). Updating your nav system via a nav fix should be primarily used in the AHRS mode.

Radar Update

A RDR FIX may be selected before or after positioning the DDD cursors. If the RDR FIX button is depressed, the computer computes the present position of the aircraft by measuring the range and bearing from the selected point. The delta between the computer position and the position determined by the INS is then displayed on the TID. If entry of this delta into the navigation computations is desired, press the FIX ENABLE button. If the delta does not appear to be correct, the computer and the readout can be cleared by pressing the RDR FIX button. The fix may then be attempted again. The RIO should also perform periodic checks of own aircraft system altitude and update the altitude if necessary.

Radar updating is performed as follows:

  1. TID CURSOR/CAP - Hook Desired Navigation Point for Update.
  2. PULSE SRCH button - Depress.
  3. On sensor control panel: STAB switch - IN. EL BARS switch - 1. AZ SCAN switch - As Desired.
  4. RDR FIX button - Depress.
  5. DDD CURSOR button - Depress.
  6. Action switch - Half Action (first detent).
  7. Cursor is displayed on DDD.
  8. Manipulate hand control DDD cursor over desired ground map point.
  9. Action switch - Full Action and Release. (This will cause the DDD cursor to remain at the selected position.)
  10. Observe the delta for LAT and LONG on TID.
  11. If readouts are unsatisfactory, deselect RDR FIX and repeat steps 4 through 12.
  12. FIX ENABLE button - Depress.

đź’ˇ To clear the previous hooked DDD cursor position, go to half action and then release prior to initiating full action for the new position hook.

TACAN Update

To perform a nav fix by TACAN, it requires that a pre-stored waypoint shares identical LAT and LONG values with the TACAN station that will be used for the fix. Select the TACAN channel for the desired station and verify by listening to the coded identifier tone in the headset.

Press the TACAN FIX button to update the aircraft position from a TACAN station. The WCS computer then calculates the own aircraft position error based on the range and bearing from the TACAN station. The delta is then entered in the same manner as with a radar fix.

Perform a TACAN fix following these steps:

  1. Select a TACAN channel whose latitude and longitude correspond to an update point.
  2. Hook the desired update point (WAYPT 1, FIX PT, HOME BASE, etc.).
  3. CATEGORY switch - NAV.
  4. TACAN FIX button - Depress.
  5. Observe the present position delta readout.
  6. If delta is unsatisfactory, deselect TACAN FIX and repeat steps 2 through 7.
  7. FIX ENABLE button - Depress.

💡 During a TACAN FIX, the MAG VAR must be the same as the TACAN station magnetic variation, or the update will be in error. Given a TACAN station with a range of 100 NM from ownship, a 1°MAG VAR error introduces a 1.74nm error into the ownship’s TACAN update.

Visual Update

To perform a visual fix, fly over a pre-stored waypoint and press the VIS FIX button. Estimate your timing, because the aircraft nose and fuselage can obscure the fix point during overflight. It is also difficult to estimate when directly overhead a waypoint if the aircraft altitude is greater than 10,000 feet. The delta for the visual fix is displayed on the TID. Enter the delta by pressing FIX ENABLE.

To perform a visual fix use the following steps:

  1. Hook the desired update point (WAY PT, HB, IP, etc.).
  2. Select NAV category on CAP.
  3. Overfly the selected pre-stored point and when over the point, depress the VIS FIX button on the cap.
  4. If the delta is not satisfactory, press VIS FIX again to clear the delta and repeat from step 1.
  5. If a satisfactory delta is displayed, depress the FIX ENABLE button; this causes the delta correction of own-aircraft position to be inserted into the computer.

To perform a data link update of the aircraft INS to the TDS frame of reference, the aircraft and TDS must share a pre-briefed waypoint, identical in latitude and longitude. Enter this LAT/LONG data into the HOST AREA pseudo target file. The TDS will uplink the common reference point as a data link waypoint. When the aircraft and TDS INS systems agree, the data link waypoint and host area symbols will be superimposed on the TID. If they drift apart, the two pseudo targets on the TID will drift as well.

To perform an update via data link, use the following steps:

  1. Hook the data link waypoint corresponding pre-briefed reference point.
  2. Select the NAV category on CAP.
  3. Overfly the hooked data link waypoint. When immediately over the point, press VIS FIX button on CAP.
  4. Observe delta LAT and LONG on TID.
  5. If deltas are satisfactory and update is desired, depress FIX ENABLE.

After a data link update, HOST AREA and data link waypoint should be superimposed on the TID again.

Fighter-to-Fighter Navigation Update

Net aircraft that use fighter-to-fighter data link can update their navigation system in the FF/DL mode. To update LAT/LONG hook the net aircraft symbol of an aircraft that is in close proximity and select F/F NAV UPDATE on the CAP. This will enter the hooked aircraft’s coordinates into the INS as own-aircraft coordinates. To update the nav system on an aircraft that is not close, first obtain a radar STT on that aircraft, hook the STT-ed aircraft on the TID and then press F/F NAV UPDATE on the CAP.

💡 By updating to the selected aircraft’s INS, its calibration/drift can potentially introduce a larger error into your own INS. Both aircraft will share the same error though.

Position Marking

To mark the position of a pulse radar target, a visual target, or a TACAN station to be displayed on the TID, use the SURF TGT position in the TAC DATA category. Once displayed on the TID, latitude, longitude, range, bearing, and steering data are available, using the CAP or the navigation destination control or both.

đź’ˇ Do not use the position SURF TGT to update the navigation computer. The surface target position symbol is repositioned with respect to own aircraft instead of own aircraft being updated in reference to the surface target.

To mark a pulse radar target on the TID, follow these steps:

  1. Select the SURF TGT button.
  2. Establish the location via a radar fix.
  3. Select the DDD CURSOR and use the pulse system for radar mapping.
  4. Designate the point of interest by placing the cursor over that point.
  5. Selecting full action.
  6. Select RDR FIX.

This will display a delta from the hooked point to the surface target. Ignore the delta and select FIX ENABLE to position the surface target over the previously identified radar position. A very accurate readout of latitude, longitude, and steering information will become available for the Surface Target Waypoint.

The method for visual targets is the same, but a visual fix is required. You can also mark a TACAN station by using the same method and following the TACAN fix procedures. After completing any of the above procedures, the SURF TGT symbol will be displayed on the TID at the computed latitude and longitude coordinates.

The surface target symbol can also be used as a destination point. If its position has been previously entered, the symbol will appear on the TID. One method for special position marking is to hook any point on the TID and select SURF TGT. The surface target symbol now appears over the hooked point and its new position will be stored in the WCS computer.

Attitude and Heading Reference Set (AHRS)

The AHRS provides backup pitch and roll information to the CSDC and WCS computer, if attitude data from the INS is not available. At any time, the AHRS provides prime magnetic heading to the BDHI for direct analog display and to the CSDC where it is converted to digital information for the VDIG, MDIG, and the WCS. Additionally, the autopilot gets its heading reference from the AHRS.

đź’ˇ The only analog cockpit display for magnetic heading is the BDHI. The HUD, VDI, TID, HSD, and multiple display indicator are digital and receive their inputs from the AHRS through the CSDC. Thus. in case of a CSDC failure, the only magnetic heading is displayed on the BDHI.

The main assemblies of the AHRS are a two-gyro platform (vertical and directional displacement gyros), an electronic control amplifier, a compass controller, a magnetic azimuth detector, and an electronic compensator.

In case of an IMU failure, the CSDC automatically selects AHRS attitude information for display and autopilot control. The directional gyro smoothens the flux valve heading signal in the SLAVED mode or provides a direct heading reference in the DG mode. The resulting heading is transmitted to the BDHI, the CSDC, and the WCS.

đź’ˇ

  • In the INS nav mode IMU true heading is used and must be converted to magnetic heading by adding or subtracting the magnetic variation to have a backup magnetic value, if needed. Under normal operation, AHRS magnetic heading is used for all displays.

  • The AHRS is unlimited in roll but limited to 82° in pitch. If the pitch attitude exceeds ±82, it will precess. A gradual precession in roll, pitch, and heading can also be expected in sustained turns at slow rates (less than 6° per minute). Large roll and pitch precession errors can be corrected by flying straight and level, without accelerating, and pressing and holding the HDG set button on the compass controller panel. Pressing and holding this button corrects precession errors at a rate of 12° per minute minimum. The HDG set button should be held for at least 3 minutes. Before repeating the 3-minute cycle, it should be released for at least 1 minute.

Compass Controller Panel

Use the compass controller panel to select one of three compass modes when the AHRS is used as a heading reference. For a description, see Compass Control Panel.

When magnetic heading references are unreliable, operate the system in the DG mode. When the magnetic reference is reliable, operate the system in the SLAVED mode. When DG or SLAVED modes are inoperable, the COMP mode can be used for emergencies.

đź’ˇ If both the IMU and the AHRS fail, pitch and roll attitude indications from the HUD, TID, and DDD will be removed, and the IMU and AHRS advisory lights illuminate. Select COMP mode on the compass controller panel to possibly restore valid magnetic heading information to the HUD, VDI, and HSD, the AHRS advisory lights will go off. Disregard the invalid pitch and roll attitude information that will be restored to the HUD and VDI.

AHRS Operation

As a compass, the AHRS operates in three modes:

  • The directional gyro (DG) mode provides a free-gyro heading reference with Earth-rate correction.
  • The SLAVED mode provides a gyro-stabilized magnetic heading
  • And the compass (COMP) mode provides an emergency magnetic heading from the compass transmitter only.

If the COMP mode is selected, the AFCS is automatically disengaged to prevent erratic steering commands. The COMP mode cannot provide a sufficiently stable heading signal for AFCS operation and should only be used for emergencies. To erect the AHRS, press and hold the HDG set button on the compass controller (3 minutes on, 1 minute off cycle) until the needle of the synchronous indicator is bracketing the null mark.

If nav mode is set to INS or IMU/AM, attitude displays will continue to indicate properly when the AHRS pitch limit of 82° is exceeded, but all displays of magnetic heading will be in error and the advisory lights may be on or off. If this is encountered, accurate and stable magnetic heading displays on the HUD, VDI, HSD, TID, and multiple display indicator can be regained immediately by inserting the proper MAG VAR via the computer address panel.

TACAN System (AN/ARN-84)

The TACAN system indicates a slant range accurate to within 0.1 NM and a bearing of 0.5° to any surface station selected. Slant range to airborne stations is provided with an air-to-air (A/A) mode. The operating range is approximately 300 NM, if line of sight is given.

The system offers 126 operating channels in each of 2 modes. Receiving frequencies for surface-to-air operation are 962 to 1024 MHz and 1151 to 1213 MHz, for air-to-air operations, the frequencies are from 1025 to 1150 MHz. The TACAN uses two antennas that automatically switch in a 6-second interval until a threshold signal is received. Note that the TACAN can take up to 2 minutes to warm up when turned on for the first time after a cold start.

TACAN Modes

The system is capable of receiving valid signals from a ground station simultaneously with 99 other aircraft in either REC or T/R mode.

In the A/A mode, the system is capable of transponding with each of five cooperating aircraft, indicating slant range information to each, but the system will interrogate and lock on to only one at a time.

Both pilot and RIO share Identical TACAN control panels on the left consoles. Individual TACAN CMD buttons on both the pilot and RIO left consoles provide transfer of TACAN control between pilot and RIO. Control of TACAN is indicated by a flip-flop indicator in each cockpit showing PLT (pilot) or RIO. Either crewman may adjust the audio level of the identification signal. For TACAN panel description see TACAN Control Panel.

TACAN Displays

Bearing and distance to a TACAN station are displayed on the BDHI, the HSD, and the multiple display indicator. Deviation to the TACAN station is displayed on the HUD and VDI (VDIG) and the HSD and multiple display indicator.

The MDIG displays TACAN bearing marker, deviation ticks, range-to-TACAN station, and course. The HUD and VDI display provide a TACAN deviation bar, which is coded, on the HUD: solid line - TO station, dashed line - FROM station and on the VDI: bright bar - TO station, dark bar - FROM station.

TACAN information is also displayed on both the pilot’s and RIO’s identical BDHI. The bearing and distance functions of the BDHI come alive when the TACAN mode select switch is set to T/R. In the REC and T/R modes, magnetic bearings are displayed by the No.2 (large) needle, which unlocks and enters a search mode (spins) whenever bearing information is unreliable.

Range information received in T/R or A/A mode is displayed in nautical miles on the distance counter. An OFF flag covers the counter window if the range information is unreliable or not available. TACAN information is also displayed on the pilot HSD, HUD, and VDI and on the RIO multiple display indicator in other navigation modes.

TACAN Operation

If after approximately 2 minutes warm up time the range and bearing indications continue to search when a reliable station is selected, check circuit breakers should or select another station. The system has a memory feature so that tracking will not be interrupted by momentary disruption of received signals.

A range signal that is lost and has been previously tracked for at least 10 seconds, will be sustained by memory for 9 to 12 seconds. A bearing signal that has been tracked for at least 15 seconds will be retained for 3 to 8 seconds after signal loss. This allows for automatic antenna switching without a loss of TACAN displays.

During the minimum warmup time, failure indications and erroneous readouts should be disregarded and self-test results may be inconclusive.

TACAN BIT

The TACAN system has a built-in test that continuously monitors the TACAN functionality and provides an interruptive self-test. To start a 22-second interruptive self-test, use the momentary button (BIT switch) and monitor the GO (green) and NO-GO (amber) status lights.

đź’ˇ A BIT performed on TACAN stations within 2 NM can give an invalid indication. If a TCN acronym or NO-GO response is observed while tuned to a local station, along with normal TACAN azimuth and range, the acronym and/or the NO-GO should be disregarded.

The normal BIT sequence is as follows:

  1. Set MODE switch to T/R, allow 2 minutes for warmup.
  2. Press and hold BIT button.
  3. Both GO and NO-GO lights illuminate (light test).
  4. BDHI range OFF flag appears.
  5. BDHI bearing needle rotates counterclockwise.
  6. Release button; both lights go out (self-test starts).
  7. After 5 to 6 seconds, BDHI and HSD range reads 2 NM, BDHI and HSD bearing reads 4° (identify TACAN station).
  8. After 22 seconds, if good, green GO light illuminates, if bad, amber NO-GO light illuminates.

Bearing Distance and Heading Indicator (BDHI)

A BDHI is on the right side of the pilot and RIO instrument panels, see Bearing Distance Heading Indicator (BDHI). It displays aircraft magnetic heading with navigation bearing data and range information. The controls on the compass panel set the BDHI compass card to operate in a slaved or non-slaved (FREE DG) compass mode. A fixed index marker at the 12-o’clock position indicates the magnetic heading.

Two servo-driven bearing needles show magnetic bearings to the selected UHF (ADF) and TACAN stations. The No.1 (single bar) needle receives signals from the UHF (ADF) system, the No.2 (double bar) needle receives signals from the TACAN coupler.

The No.1 needle will continue to point toward the signal source, even if the compass card is misaligned or a malfunction exists, but the bearing to the station is displayed on the indicator as a relative bearing and the top of the indicator bezel will show 000°. The No.2 needle will also continue to show the magnetic bearing to the selected station or may revert to the search mode.

Communications Systems

Antennas

Four VHF/UHF/L-band dual-blade antennas provide omnidirectional coverage for VHF/UHF voice, UHF data link, TACAN, and identification friend or foe/selective identification feature transponder (APX-72) operation. TACAN and VHF/UHF 2 voice communications use one set of antennas; UHF 1 voice communications, the data link, and IFF transponder use another set of antennas. Refer to the general arrangement illustration for antenna locations. The IFF interrogator (APX-76) antenna is an integral part of the AWG-9 WCS antenna.

Each individual system is connected to the appropriate portion of an upper or lower antenna through a coaxial switch and diplexer. The V/UHF 2 ANT switch on the RIO communication TACAN CMD panel must be used to select the upper or lower antenna manually; there is no automatic actuation function in these aircraft. The data link (DIL) antennas are similarly selected manually. Upper or lower antenna is selected by means of ANTENNA switches on the DATA LINK control panel. The UHF 1 voice communication ARC-159 antenna is shared with the DIL antenna system and is always on the opposite antenna from the one selected by the ANTENNA switch.

The upper V/UHF 2/TACAN antenna is the first one aft of the canopy on the turtleback, and the lower antenna is embedded in the bottom of the left ventral fin. Only one antenna is used at a time. Automatic switching between antennas prevents the loss of TACAN information. If a signal is lost or is too weak to hold receiver lockup, the TACAN automatically cycles between the two antennas every 6 seconds seeking a stronger signal.

During this cycling and search period, memory circuits retain range tracking for 8 to 12 seconds and bearing tracking for 8 seconds. The IFF antenna lobing switch is controlled by the IFF ANT switch on the RIO right outboard console. In AUTO, the lobing switch cycles the receiver-transmitter between the upper and lower antenna. In the LWR (lower) position, only the lower antenna is used to receive and transmit signals. The upper antenna pattern has a slight forward tilt; the lower pattern a slight aft tilt.

đź’ˇ In real life, it is often necessary to select LWR to improve ground station reception. However, due to the limitations of DCS, antenna switching is not modeled and thus not functional. The use of antennas is automated and/or neglected for the player. All radios and radio functions work through proper keying.

Pilot Volume/TACAN Command Panel

volume

The Volume/TACAN command panel on the pilot left side console has three volume controls for regulating audio signals from the ALR-67, Sidewinder (SW), and V/UHF 2.

Control/IndicatorFunction
ALR-67 Volume controlControls volume for pilot ALR-67 indication.
SW (Sidewinder) Volume controlControls volume of the pilot’s Sidewinder tone.
V/UHF 2 Volume controlControls volume of pilot audio from V/UHF 2 (AN/ARC-182).
TACAN CMD control switch/indicatorControls and indicates crewmember in control of TACAN.

RIO Communication/TACAN Command Panel

Allows RIO to select either UHF 1 (AN/ARC-159), V/UHF 2 (AN/ARC-182), or both radios for transmitting.

đź’ˇ BOTH is not functional in DCS.

  • The V/UHF 2 ANT switch allows the selection of upper or lower antenna to minimize interference between dual UHF or data link operation. Opposite antenna selection, frequency separation greater than 55 MHz, or turning one radio off is recommended. Additionally, the DATA LINK panel provides lower or upper antenna selection for UHF 1 and DIL operation.
  • The TACAN CMD push buttons provide for the transfer of TACAN control functions between pilot and RIO. The crewmember (PLT or RIO) in control illuminates when selected.
  • The UHF 1 VOL control allows the RIO to adjust the audio level of the ARC 159 UHF 1 radio. The KY MODE switch is operative only when the KY-58 is installed.

đź’ˇ The Heatblur F-14 version uses the KY-28 only.

com tac

Control/IndicatorFunction
XMTR SEL switchSelects desired VHF/UHF radio for use. UHF 1 - Selects ARC-159 UHF 1 radio. V/UHF 2 - Selects ARC-182 VHF/UHF radio. Both - Selects both radios. (Not functional in DCS)
V/UHF 2 ANT switchUPR - Selects upper antenna for V/UHF 2. LWR - Selects lower antenna for V/UHF 2.
TACAN CMD control switch/indicatorControls and indicates crewmember in control of TACAN.
UHF 1 VOL controlControls volume of RIO audio from UHF 1 (AN/ARC-159).
KY MODE switchNon-functional with KY-28.

Loading (saving) Preset Channel(s) on UHF 1 and V/UHF 2

  1. MODE selection- T/R or T/R&G.
  2. Frequency mode control - PRESET.
  3. CHAN SEL switch- Select desired channel.
  4. Frequency mode control- READ.
  5. Frequency select switches - Slew to desired Frequency.
  6. Frequency mode control - LOAD (frequency is stored in memory for the selected channel).
  7. Frequency mode control- READ, Verify frequency display.
  8. Repeat steps 2 through 7 for subsequent channels.

AN/ARC-159 and AN/ARC-182 Remote Displays

Both the pilot and RIO have remote displays for the currently set channel or frequency of the radios. The pilot has remote displays for both UHF 1 and V/UHF 2 and the RIO only for UHF 1.

front remoteback remote
Control/IndicatorFunction
UHF 1 Remote Channel/Frequency Indicator (Pilot)Displays a readout of the frequency or channel set for the UHF 1 radio. TEST - Initiates test for the indicator, no fault resulting in 888.888 readout. BRT - Controls display brightness.
V/UHF 2 Remote Channel/Frequency Indicator (Pilot)Displays a readout of the frequency or channel set for the V/UHF 2 radio. TEST - Initiates test for the indicator, no fault resulting in 888.888 readout. BRT - Controls display brightness.
UHF 1 Remote Channel/Frequency Indicator (RIO)Displays a readout of the frequency or channel set for the UHF 1 radio. TEST - Initiates test for the indicator, no fault resulting in 888.888 readout. BRT - Controls display brightness.

ICS - Intercommunications System

The ICS provides normal, backup, or emergency communications between crewmembers. It also combines and amplifies audio signals received from other electronic receiving equipment (ECM, Sidewinder tone, IFF/SIF, radar altimeter, and voice radios, etc.). Identical ICS control panels are on the pilot and RIO left side consoles. The ICS consists of four amplifiers, two at each cockpit station, which permit duplex operation during normal operation. If one amplifier fails, it may be bypassed by selecting either the B/U (backup) or EMER (emergency) position on the ICS control panel. This permits continued ICS operation.

đź’ˇ If two amplifiers fail at the same station, intercommunication is impossible.

💡 By selecting EMER on the respective ICS control panel and using the other crewmember’s amplifier, you can listen in on audio normally only available at that station (like SW-tone or ALQ-126 PRF) but you lose the ability to control the volume of the audio you listen to.

The external interphone connection is in the nose-wheel well. When the pilot ICS switch is set to HOT MIC, ground personnel can communicate with the cockpit stations. In DCS, this works through selecting the ground crew communication menu in the DCS radio communication menu when activating ICS PTT.

throttleics

The Pilot Radio ICS button allows for various intercommunication and radio operation modes. When set to ICS, it permits intercommunication when COLD MIC is selected on the function selector, overriding UHF/VHF communications. In the BOTH position, it keys both radios for operation, although this function is not active in DCS. The UHF 1 position keys the ARC-159 radio, and the UHF 2 position keys the ARC-182 radio.

The VOL control is used to control the intercommunication audio level at the specific cockpit station where it is adjusted. The audio levels at other stations remain unaffected by changes to this control.

The Amplifier selector has three positions: B/U (Backup), NORM (Normal), and EMER (Emergency). The B/U position is used to bypass a faulty amplifier, utilizing a backup output amplifier at the current station. The NORM position is for normal operation when all amplifiers are functioning correctly. The EMER position bypasses a faulty amplifier and uses the input amplifier of the other station, though HOT MIC is not available in this mode. It is important to note that with the front cockpit amplifier selector switch in the EMER position, engine stall/overtemperature and Sidewinder tones will not be available to the pilot.

The Function selector has multiple settings to manage radio and intercommunication audio. The RADIO OVERRIDE setting attenuates noncritical radio audio to prioritize intercommunication when urgent. The HOT MIC setting allows for intercommunication without keying, while the COLD MIC setting requires the pilot to actuate the ICS keying switch on the inboard throttle or the RIO to actuate the keying switch on the left footrest for intercommunication.

The RIO’s ICS button located on the left footrest permits intercommunication if COLD MIC is selected on the function selector control, overriding UHF communication. The RIO’s MIC button, found on the right footrest, allows for the transmission of UHF 1 or UHF 2 radios as selected on the communications/TACAN command panel. Note the BOTH function is not active in DCS.

đź’ˇ The two RIO foot-pedals have axis bindings in DCS to allow sim rudder pedals to trigger these functions.

TSEC/KY-28 Voice Security Equipment

The security equipment is integrated and operates with the VHF/UHF 2 and UHF 1 communication sets to enable secure voice in a hostile environment. The KY-28 control panel on the RIO left side console is the only cockpit control for operating the KY-28 in either cipher or plain-language modes.

The KY-28 has two basic modes of operation: plain (P) and cipher (C). The plain mode is used during normal UHF communications. The cipher mode is used when secure voice communications are desired. The radio sets must be ON to attain secure operation. The receiving station must be properly equipped to receive transmissions in the proper cipher mode.

ky-28

Control/IndicatorFunction
ZEROIZE switchBy lifting the guard the preloaded codes are erased and must be loaded on the ground before the cipher mode can be used again. In DCS this is done via the ground crew communications menu.
Power-mode switchP/OFF - UHF radio is used as a plain-language transceiver. Removes power from the system. C - Used to transmit and receive in secure mode (cipher) using preloaded codes. Also applies power to the system. To preload codes the system must be in this mode and power be applied. DELAY - Provides a time delay between PTT and actual transmission.
Radio-select switchRELAY - Re-transmits information acting as a relay for other stations, increasing their range. (Not functional in DCS) RAD-2 - Selects V/UHF 2 for secure voice. RAD-1 - Selects UHF 1 for secure voice.

KY-28 Operation

Prelaunch

  1. Determine that the proper code has been set by personnel qualified in voice security equipment. In DCS and in combination with SRS (Simple Radio) this is done through the ground crew communication menu in the DCS communications menu.
  2. VHF/UHF radios - ON.
  3. Power mode switch - C.
  4. Radio selector - RAD-1 or RAD-2.
  5. If a ground test of equipment is desired, establish two-way, plain-text radio communications on the plain-voice radio with a suitable remote station and request an equipment check. (In DCS another player is needed)
  6. After a 2-minute warmup period, on the cipher-selected radio listen for a steady, unbroken tone in the headset followed by a double-pitched broken tone.
  7. Key the appropriate radio selected for transmission, hold for approximately 2 seconds, and release. The double-pitched broken tone will cease and no sound will be heard.
  8. Key radio and hold. A single-beep tone will be heard in approximately 1-1/2 seconds. When this tone is heard, the equipment is ready to cipher transmission.
  9. After the beep tone is heard, establish two-way cipher radio communications with a cooperating ground station and check for readability and signal strength.
  10. Set power mode and radio selector switches in accordance with the tactical situation.

đź’ˇ The above procedures may be used to perform an in-flight check of the equipment.

Postlaunch

The speech security equipment shall be operated as briefed.

đź’ˇ If ZEROIZE is pressed during flight, ciphered communication is not possible. The code can only be reset (or changed) through the ground crew communications menu after landing.

After Landing

  1. ZEROIZE switch - ZEROIZE (as briefed).
  2. Power switch - OFF.

đź’ˇ If ZEROIZE has been pressed and the POWER MODE switch is in C, both crewmembers will be warned by a continuing beeping sound.

AN/ARC-159 (UHF 1) Radio

The UHF 1 (ARC-159) radio provides air-to-air and air-to-surface voice communications. Radio frequency range extends from 225.000 to 399.975 MHz. The equipment allows AM mode transmission and reception on any of the 20 preset channels and a guard channel (243.000 MHz). Guard frequency may be monitored simultaneously with any other frequency selected. The ARC-159 has a possible 7,000 frequencies available by manually tuning in 25-kHz steps. The ARC-159 radio is a solid-state, self-contained unit with a minimum RF output of 10 watts. All controls for operation of the radio are on the front panel of the radio. The radio is located on the pilot left console.

đź’ˇ The UHF 1 (ARC-159) ADF position is non-functional in the modeled version of the F-14; use the DF mode of V/UHF 2 ARC-182.

arc-159

Control/IndicatorFunction
VOL controlControls volume of pilot audio for UHF 1.
SQL (Squelch) switchOn/off control for radio squelch (noise-blanking when carrier is not present).
Frequency Tuning switchesFour frequency tuning switches are used to tune the transceiver when the mode selector switch is set to MANUAL. The left switch controls the hundreds and tens digits, the second switch controls units, the third switch controls tenths, and the right switch controls hundredths and thousandths. Forward deflection of the switch increases the numeric reading, and aft deflection decreases the numeric reading.
FREQ/(CHAN) displayDisplays frequency when the mode selector switch is in MANUAL and displays UHF channel when the mode switch is in PRESET.
READ switchDeflection of the switch causes the frequency display to show the preset channel frequency.
BRT/TEST controlControls brightness of radio FREQ/(CHAN) display. Turn past max to show 888.888 test display.
LOAD buttonDepressing button saves displayed frequency to the selected preset channel.
Function selectorADF – The UHF 1 ARC-159 ADF function is not functional; use the DF mode of the V/UHF 2 ARC-182. BOTH – Energizes both the main transceiver and the guard receiver. MAIN – Main transceiver is energized permitting normal transmission and reception. Receive or transmit function is selected by the microphone push-to-talk switch. OFF – Secures UHF 1 radio.
CHAN SEL controlSelects one of 20 preset frequency channels to use when the tuning selector switch is set to PRESET.
Frequency ChartUsed to record preset channel frequencies. Frequencies preset in the mission editor will be automatically displayed here in DCS.
Mode Selector switchGUARD – Main transceiver is energized and shifted to guard frequency of 243.0 MHz permitting transmission and reception. In this position, both preset and manual frequency selections are not available. MANUAL – Frequency tuning controls are used to tune the main transceiver to any frequency (7,000 available) within the range of the set. The frequency selected is displayed in the readout window. In this position, PRESET selections are not available. PRESET – Used to tune the transceiver to any of 20 preset channels using the PRESET channel selector. The selected channel is displayed in the readout window.
TONE buttonDepressing button causes a steady tone (1 020 Hz) to be transmitted on the frequency or channel selected.

đź’ˇ UHF communication interference with the D/L may cause the TILT light to illuminate and the autopilot ACL or VEC/PCD mode to disengage. Data link interference with the UHF radios may cause audible chirping at the D/L message reply rate. Although antenna switching is not implemented in DCS, it is still recommended to use a frequency separation greater than 55 MHz, and if necessary along with turning UHF 1 or V/UHF 2 radio OFF to avoid mutual interference between UHF communications.

đź’ˇ Transmissions on both UHF 1 and V/UHF 2 radios, while operating on the same frequency, may result in a squeal. This feedback is a normal condition caused by RF interaction between the two radios operating on the same frequency in close proximity to each other.

AN/ARC-182 (V/UHF 2) Radio

The ARC-182 radio provides multi-mode, multichannel, air-to-air/air-to-surface voice and tone communications. The ARC-182 control panel is located on the RIO left console. Frequency range extends in four bands from 30 to 88, 108 to 156, 156 to 174, and 225 to 399.975 MHz on any of 11,960 channels (separated by 25 kHz).

đź’ˇ The Have Quick anti-jam function is not implemented in DCS.

Transmission and reception are available in AM or FM bands. The modulation is selected automatically by the radio except in the 225 to 399.975 band (toggle switch). 30 preset channels are available. Guard frequency of each band may be monitored simultaneously with any other frequency selected. The radio is used with the ARA-50 to provide automatic direction finding (ADF) to the transmitting station. The ARC-182 operates with secure-voice equipment (KY-28, the KY-58 is not implemented in DCS). Upper and lower antenna installations provide reliable line-of-sight communications to 200 NM (depending on altitude and atmospheric conditions). A remote indicator on the pilot instrument panel indicates the channel or frequency selected.

arc-182

Control/IndicatorFunction
VOL controlControls volume of RIO audio for V/UHF 2.
SQL (squelch) switchOn/off control for radio squelch (noise-blanking when carrier is not present).
Frequency Tuning switchesFour frequency tuning switches are used to tune the transceiver when the mode selector switch is set to MANUAL. The left switch controls the hundreds and tens digits, the second switch controls units, the third switch controls tenths, and the right switch controls hundredths and thousandths. Forward deflection of the switch increases the numeric reading, and aft deflection decreases the numeric reading.
FREQ/(CHAN)Displays frequency when the mode selector switch is in MAN and displays V/UHF channel when mode switch is in PRESET.
UHF Mode switchOperational when tuned to frequencies in the 225.000 to 399.000 MHz band. AM – Selects amplitude modulation signals. Varies with atmospheric conditions, susceptible to electromagnetic interference. FM – Selects frequency modulation signals. Reduces electromagnetic interference.
BRT controlControls brightness of radio FREQ/(CHAN) display.
MODE selectorOFF – Secures VHF/UHF radio, unless the frequency mode switch is set to 243. T/R – Energizes transmitter and main receiver. T/R&G – Energizes transmitter, main, and guard receivers. DF – Provides automatic direction finding from 108 to 399.975 MHz. TEST – Indicates built-in-test (BIT) AT; displayed on FREQ/(CHAN) indicator.
Frequency Mode switch (Outer Dial)243 – Turns on the transceiver (takes precedence over (outer dial) operational mode control) and causes the main transceiver, and guard receiver to tune to 243.000 MHz (UHF guard frequency). All functions except VOL SQL and BAT are disabled. MAN – Allows manual selection of an operating frequency using the frequency tuning switches. The transceiver is disabled during a frequency change. G – Tunes the transceiver to the guard frequency in the band to which the radio was last tuned. PRESET – Allows selection of any one of 40 present operating frequencies with the CHAN SEL switch. The selected channel is displayed on the FREQ/(CHAN) display. Channels 31 through 40 are for Have Quick (anti-jam) use and are not implemented in DCS. READ – Displays the frequency (rather than channel) of the preset channel selected. LOAD – Automatically places the displayed frequency into the memory for the selected preset channel.
CHAN SEL switch (Inner Dial)Selects one of 40 preset frequency channels to use when the tuning selector switch is set to PRESET.

AN/ARC-182 BIT (Built-in Test)

BIT isolates faults in AN/ARC-182. BIT should be started if the FREQ/(CHAN) display blanks, indicates an erroneous readout, or the transceiver otherwise malfunctions.

Proceed as follows:

  1. MODE selector - TEST.
  2. BRT control- As Required.
  3. BIT requires approximately 10 seconds, observe FREQ/(CHAN) display.
    • No fault is indicated by 888.888.
    • Faults are indicated by a number that identifies the module or modules at fault.
ModeDisplayFaultInterpretation
RCV'RMT or RTSelect test mode
XMT'LOW PWRSelect test mode
TEST'RMT CTRLDefective control
TEST888.888NONERT and CTRL ok
TEST4 6 5RTModules 4, 5, or 6 bad
TEST0 6 1VSWRRT or antenna system
TEST6 5 1FWD PWRRT or antenna system
TEST1 5 7RTModules 1, 5, or 7 bad
TEST3 3 3RTModule 3 bad

AN/ARA-50 UHF Automatic Direction Finder

The UHF automatic direction finder is used with the ARC-182 radio. ADF provides relative bearings to transmitting ground stations or other aircraft. It can receive signals on any 1 of 30 preset channels or on any manually set frequency in the 108 to 399.975 MHz range. The system has a line-of-sight range, varying with altitude.

The system requires a 5-minute warmup period. During the warmup time, failure indications should be disregarded. The system uses the AS-909/ARA-48 ADF antenna. Bearing to transmitting stations is displayed on the pilot/RIO BDHI (No. 1 needle), pilot HSD, and RIO multiple display indicator. The ADF signal is interrupted during voice UHF transmissions.

Link 4A & C Data Link

The F-14 Tomcat is equipped with the Link 4 data link system to allow for transmission and reception of target track, waypoint information and steering commands. Link 4 exists in two versions, the first being Link 4A which allows a surface ship or airborne AWACS to control the aircraft and also Link 4C, unique to the F-14, which is a fighter to fighter data link.

The Link 4A or TADIL C data link allows the F-14 to connect to a data link network controlled by a surface ship or an AWACS. The data source (or really its operator) will then provide the F-14 with target tracks, waypoints and control commands. Additionally, it’s also used for the carrier automatic landing system (ACLS).

Link 4C on the other hand allows up to four F-14 Tomcats to interconnect and share target tracks to coordinate their engagements.

The system does not allow an F-14 to use both at the same time as the same transmitter and receiver are used for both A and C links. The Link 4 system itself, operates using the UHF radio band at 5,000 bits per second.

The Link 4 is controlled using the Data Link Control Panel and the Data Link Reply and Antenna Control Panel. Received control signals are displayed on the pilot VDI indicators (Vertical Display Indicator (VDI)) and the RIO DDI panel (Digital Data Indicator (DDI)).

Data Link Control Panel

The Data Link Control Panel contains the main Link 4 system power switches and the frequency selection wheels.

The first switch (1) controls the Link 4 built in test and also enables the anti-jam (A-J) function, this control is currently non-functional in DCS and should be set to NORMAL.

The frequency thumbwheels (2) are used to set used data link frequency, note that the first digit (3) is set and displayed as a fixed number before the first wheel. The allowable frequency range is 300.0 MHz to 324.9 MHz.

The third switch (3) controls power and operational mode of the Link 4. ON turns on and enables the Link 4A data link, OFF disables the system and AUX enables the Link 4C data link.

Data Link Reply and Antenna Control Panel

The Data Link Reply and Antenna Control Panel is used to select what antenna to use, own aircraft data link address, whether to transmit and which mode the Link 4A is used in.

The ANTENNA switch (1) sets if the data link uses the upper or lower antenna. As these are the same antennas that the UHF 1 (AN/ARC-159) uses it automatically sets that radio to the other antenna.

The REPLY switch (2) sets whether own aircraft replies to data link messages. NORM allows for normal operation while CANC turns off the transmitter and sets the data link to receive only.

The MODE switch (3) controls whether the Link 4A operates in the normal TAC (Tactical) mode or the CAINS/WAYPT (Carrier Aircraft Inertial Navigation System/Waypoint) mode. The TAC mode is the normal airborne mode while the CAINS/WAYPT mode is used while on the carrier deck to receive preflight waypoints and INS alignment data from the ships INS system. The switch is solenoid held and spring-loaded to the TAC position, if the data link reception is lost or the power lost the switch automatically returns to the TAC mode, forcing an ongoing INS alignment to the backup handset mode. If the aircraft takes off with the switch in the CAINS/WAYPT position the weight on wheels sensor will also release it to TAC.

The two address thumbwheel sets the least significant bits (two lowest numbers) of the aircraft data link address, the rest has to be set by the ground crew.

The Link 4 implementation in the Heatblur DCS F-14 implements both the Link 4A and C versions.

To use Link 4A the data link has to be powered on, set to Link 4A mode (ON) and tuned to the correct data link frequency for the desired host which can be found on the kneeboard. On the ground and set to the CAINS/WAYPT mode the data link will receive the ME set waypoints and allow for CVA alignment if on a carrier. The frequency does not need to be set to use CAINS/WAYPT as that frequency is set with jumpers on the actual equipment by the ground crew.

When set to TAC the data link will then receive the 8 target tracks with the highest priority from the TDS controller. The Link 4A also allows for automatic carrier landings with the data link set to use the carrier as a host.

To use Link 4C the data link should be set to Link 4C (AUX) and be tuned to a frequency agreed upon between participating aircraft. Up to four aircraft can participate within a flight and all four aircraft should have different addresses set. As the ground crew set the two most significant bits to be the same for a flight automatically the link can only be used within the same flight currently.

In Link 4C the participating aircraft shares up to 4 target tracks, selected by the RIO using the CAP as well as own aircraft position. The CAP also allows the RIO to update own aircraft INS position to another aircraft on the link to correlate track transmissions.

Identification Systems

AN/APX-76 IFF Interrogator

The AN/APX-76 IFF (Identification Friend or Foe) interrogator is integrated into the AN/AWG-9 operation. Then interrogator antenna itself is located on the AN/AWG-9 antenna gimbal platform.

An IFF system works by sending out an interrogation pulse and then listening for returns from cooperating transponders. In addition to the unencrypted civilian mode the AN/APX-76 is capable of interrogating in the encrypted military mode 4. This ensures that targets replying to mode 4 interrogations are indeed friendly.

The AN/APX-76 can be used both in search radar modes and in STT radar modes. To enable interrogation the IFF switch is depressed on the Detail Data Display Panel which then activates the interrogator for as long as the button is held up to 10 seconds max.

When enabled IFF received IFF returns are then overlaid on the normal AN/AWG-9 radar returns on the DDD. A friendly target will be indicated with two bars, one above and one below the normal radar return. As the AN/APX-76 is a secondary mode radar (transponder radar) apart from the AWG-9 the IFF can sometimes also detect targets not detected by the AWG-9. In this case the IFF return will not have a radar echo inside it.

In the search mode this is overlaid over each target replying and in STT over the STT target. Additionally, if the STT target is hooked on the TID the DDD will switch from normal range display to a ±10 NM display to enable display of multiple returns in case of closely grouped targets.

AA1 Control Panel

aa1 AN/APX-76 interrogator control panel

  • 1. M4 ALARM OVERRIDE switch

    • Switch disabling the mode 4 tone alarm in the RIO headset.
  • 2. TEST-CHAL CC switch

    • Switch spring-loaded to center controlling IFF challenge and test.
      • TEST: Momentary actuation, tests the AN/APX-76 by interrogating own transponder. If the same codes are set, two solid lines appear on DDD at 3 and 4 miles.
      • CHAL CC: Momentary actuation starts a 10-second interrogation cycle, only showing returns with the correct mode and code on DDD.
  • 3. CODE selector thumbwheels

    • Thumbwheels controlling mode and code used for interrogation. The first wheel sets the mode, and the last four set the code.
  • 4. CHAL light

    • Light indicating active interrogation in progress.
  • 5. FAULT light

    • Light indicating a fault in the AN/APX-76.

Hydraulics

The F-14 has two separate hydraulic systems, the flight hydraulic system and the combined hydraulic system.

Both systems are driven by hydraulic pumps connected to each engine, the flight hydraulic system from the right engine and the combined hydraulic system from the left engine. Both systems are pressurized to around 3,000 psi when operating normally.

Flight control surfaces are supplied by both systems while the combined system also supplies pressure to secondary systems such as the flaps, landing gear and the refueling probe. This is so that both systems can drive the control surfaces independently from each other in case of a failure in the other.

Additionally, the hydraulic systems related to systems not necessary while airborne can be isolated by a switch next to the landing gear handle. This is so that damage to those systems won’t affect the combined system pressure and cause fluid loss. The systems that can be isolated are the landing gear, wheel brakes, anti-skid and nosewheel steering. This switch is mechanically locked to not isolating these systems by the landing gear handle when it’s in the down position.

If only one of the hydraulic pumps fail it’s possible to pressurize that system from the other pump via the hydraulic transfer pump. This pump is an omni-directional hydraulically driven pump that can supply either system from the other and will maintain a pressure between 2,400 and 2,600 psi if the driving system is at around 3,000 psi. If one system pressure falls below 500 psi the pump will be secured to prevent pump damage and preserve pressure in the working system. The pump can also be manually disengaged by the pilot.

In case of failure of both hydraulic pumps the flight hydraulic system can be driven by an electrical pump, called the emergency flight hydraulic pump. This pump is capable of independently driving the tail control surfaces, enabling the aircraft to return home and land even without pressure in either main hydraulic system. The electric pump is automatically enabled if both main systems drop below 2,100 psi and shut off if either reaches 2,400 psi again. The automatic pump activation activates the system in the low mode but it can also manually be selected to either low or high operation. The control surfaces will have a reduced deflection rate if driven by this pump, more so in low than high.

There is also a hand driven hydraulic pump that can be used to pressurize the refueling probe and wheel brake accumulator if there’s otherwise no pressure in the combined system. This is mainly for un-powered ground operation but can be used as a backup in the air.

Controls and Indicators

hydraulic

The HYD PRESS, hydraulic pressure indicator, contains two gauges indicating COMB, combined, and FLT, flight system hydraulic pressure in thousands of psi. The scales have markings for the nominal 3,000 psi pressure when the pumps are operating normally.

Below the gauges are flags indicating hydraulic pressure availability to the spoilers SPOIL and the operation of the EMER FLT, emergency flight hydraulic pump. The HI flag indicates on if the emergency flight hydraulic pump is operating in high and the LOW if it’s operating in low.

brake pressure

The BRAKE PRESSURE gauge shows available pressure in the brake accumulators. PARK indicating parking brake pressure and the AUX indicating wheel brake pressure. The green area represents a pressure from about 2,150 psi to 3,000 psi and the red a pressure below that.

hydraulic transfer pump

The HYD TRANSFER PUMP, hydraulic transfer pump switch is located on its own panel on the pilot’s right side console. The switch allows for manual shut-off of the pump (SHUTOFF) but is normally in the NORMAL position allowing the pump to activate automatically if either hydraulic pump fails. The switch is guarded to the NORMAL position.

The emergency flight hydraulic pump is controlled by a guarded switch on the Master Test Panel. The guarded position, (AUTO)LOW allows the pump to automatically activate as detailed above and the two other positions, HIGH and LOW can manually activate those modes when the guard is up.

On the Caution - Advisory Indicator the only relevant caution light is the HYD PRESS light indicating that either main hydraulic system pressure is below 2,100 psi. It turns off when both systems are again above 2,400 psi.

Environmental Control System

The ECS or environmental control system controls and supplies temperature- and pressure-regulated air to cockpit systems and cooling for electronic equipment and weapons.

The air used is sourced from the engines, one or both, or if needed from the emergency ram air door on the fuselage inboard of the right glove.

Systems using ECS air in the cockpit are cockpit pressurization and canopy seals, anti-g suit inflation, aircrew suit ventilation, seat cushion ventilation and windshield anti-ice and defogging.

Other systems using ECS air outside of the cockpit are pressurization of external drop tanks, wing airbag seals, electronics cooling and cooling of the AN/AWG-9 radar and AIM-54 missiles via an air/liquid heat exchanger.

Air Source and Cockpit Air Controls

Air source for the ECS is set using the controls on the Air Conditioning Control Panel.

The L ENG set air source to left engine, R ENG to right engine and BOTH to both engines which is also the normal position while in use.

RAM and OFF both enable the emergency ram door but OFF turns off pressurization and heating.

During normal operation temperature in the cockpit is controlled using the TEMP switch and thumbwheel on that same panel. The thumbwheel sets the temperature which is automatic regardless of airspeed and altitude if the TEMP switch is set to AUTO. If that switch is set to MAN, manual, it will vary depending on airspeed and altitude.

The CABIN PRESS switch controls the cockpit safety valve, controlling whether the cockpit is pressurized or not. If set to NORM cockpit pressure is at 8,000 feet up to 23,000 feet and after that 5 psi higher than the atmosphere outside. DUMP depressurizes the cockpit by opening the cockpit safety valve.

The RAM AIR switch is used to modulate cockpit air supply temperature when the ram air door is in use by opening and closing the emergency ram air door. This is as in this mode that air is mixed directly with hot bleed air from the engines. INCR, increase, opens the ram door, decreasing temperature and DECR closes the door and increases temperature. spring-loaded to center.

đź’ˇ Selection of RAM or OFF inhibits gun firing.

Current cabin air pressure altitude can be seen on the Cabin Pressure Altimeter in front of the pilot control stick.

The CABIN PRESS caution light is present on the RIO Caution-Advisory Panel, indicating less than 5 psi absolute pressure or above 27,000 feet cockpit pressure. On the same panel is also the COOLING AIR advisory light which indicates overheat in the electronics cooling system, indicative of a failure in the ECS which might damage the electronics.

The anti-g suit pressurization can be tested via the G-valve Button for the pilot and G-Valve Button for the RIO. The airflow through the suit, or seats if no suits are worn, are controlled by the VENT AIRFLOW thumbwheel on the pilot Oxygen-Vent Airflow Control Panel and RIO Oxygen-Vent Airflow Control Panel respectively.

Windshield Anti-Ice and Defogging

Windshield anti-ice and defogging is controlled via the External Environmental Control Panel and Canopy Defog/Cabin Air Lever.

The WSHLD, windshield, switch on the external environment panel provides hot bleed air on the outside of the windshield to clear ice and rain on the glass. AIR enables airflow over windshield, OFF disables it.

The Canopy Defog/Cabin Air Lever (for pilot) and Canopy Defog/Cabin Air Lever (for RIO) sets amount of air through the canopy air diffusers to be used to defog the canopy. Lever set fully to CANOPY DEFOG selects all cockpit air to be through the canopy diffusers while lever fully at CABIN AIR redirects 30% through the canopy diffusers and the rest to the cockpit diffusers.

The WSHLD HOT advisory light on the pilot Caution - Advisory Indicator illuminates when the windshield is warmer than 300° F (149° C). This automatically closes the valve and stops warm air to the windshield until cooled down.

AN/AWG-9 and AIM-54 Cooling

The AN/AWG-9 radar and AIM-54 missiles are liquid cooled via independent liquid/air heat exchangers cooled by ECS air.

The Liquid Cooling Control Panel controls these cooling systems and should be set to AWG-9 to enable only the AN/AWG-9 cooler if no AIM-54 Phoenix missiles are carried. If AIM-54 missiles are loaded AWG-9/AIM-54 should instead be set to enable both systems. OFF turns off both systems and should not be set with systems in use as they will overheat.

The RIO Caution-Advisory Panel contains advisory lights for these systems. The AWG-9 COND advisory light indicates overheat in the AN/AWG-9 cooling system, continuing use of the AN/AWG-9 might damage it. The MSL COND advisory light indicates overheat in the AIM-54 cooling system or operation of the WCS with AIM-54s loaded and liquid cooling switch not set to AWG-9/AIM-54.

External ECS Air Supply

For operation of systems requiring cooling on the ground or on deck it’s possible to connect an external ECS air source to cool them.

The normally used source isn’t able to provide cooling for all systems at the same time though and thus what is to be cooled needs to be set. This is controlled by the GND CLG switch on the IFF Antenna Control/Test Panel panel at the RIO right side console. OBC/CABIN provides the external ECS air to the cabin and all air cooled electronics. This setting disables the AN/AWG-9 transmitter due to inadequate cooling. AWG-9/AIM-54 provides the external ECS air to the AN/AWG-9 and AIM-54 heat exchangers and to related electronics. OFF turns off external ECS air supply and is the normal mode used when the engines are running.

đź’ˇ Any setting on the GND CLG other than OFF should not be used when the engines are running.

đź’ˇ For the Heatblur F-14 in DCS the external ECS air supply is connected via the same command as the engine starter air.

Utility

Audio Warning Signals

Audio warning signals from the weapon system are available to either or both crewmen through the ICS. Each signal has a distinct tone. A visual display accompanies most audio signals so that the flight crew can expect the tone and interpret its meaning. Most audio signals may be attenuated or turned off if not required, allowing the flight crew to concentrate on more critical tones.

Critical warning tones cannot be attenuated by any mode of ICS operation. The table below provides a glossary of audio warning signals available within the aircraft weapon systems. Approximately 1 minute of warmup is required to achieve normal operating temperature.

TonePositionControlsFunctionCharacteristics
SidewinderPilotVolume/TACAN Command PanelMissile lock toneHigh frequency, increases with lockon indication.
ALR-67Pilot & RIOVolume/TACAN Command Panel (pilot) & Radar Warning Receiver Panel (RIO)Threat indicationLow to high frequency, determined by threat level.
AN/ALQ-126RIODECM Control PanelThreat indicationRaw PRF sound.
Radar AltimeterPilot & RIORadar Altimeter Indicator (Pilot)Low altitude warning1 000 Hz tone, modulated at 2 pulses per second for 3 seconds.
TACANPilot & RIOTACAN Control PanelStation identificationTACAN station Morse code.
AN/ARC-159 (UHF 1)Pilot & RIOUHF 1 Control Panel (Pilot) & RIO Communication/TACAN Command PanelOwn aircraft DF transmission1 020 Hz
AN/ARC-182 (V/UHF 2)Pilot & RIOV/UHF 2 Control Panel (RIO) & Volume/TACAN Command Panel (Pilot)Other aircraft DF transmission1 020 Hz, Morse code or voice.
Engine Stall/OvertemperaturePilotNoneEngine stall detection & EGT overtemp warningModulated 320 Hz for 10 seconds or until fault is removed if before.

Oxygen System

The F-14 carries one or two 10-liter liquid oxygen bottles providing oxygen to the crew when needed.

The oxygen supply is controlled on the pilot Oxygen-Vent Airflow Control Panel and RIO Oxygen-Vent Airflow Control Panel respectively. Both panels contain an OXYGEN switch that sets oxygen supply to ON or OFF.

Liquid oxygen remaining is shown on the Liquid Oxygen Quantity Indicator on the pilot’s right side console. The gauge shows remaining liters of liquid oxygen up to 20 liters (if two bottles are installed). The indicator is electrically driven and if it receives no power an OFF flag will be visible and it will display 0 liters remaining.

Additionally the RIO Caution-Advisory Panel has the OXY LOW caution light which illuminates when the liquid oxygen quantity is below 2 liters.

During the INST test on the MTPanel the liquid oxygen meter shows 2 liters and the OXY LOW caution light illuminates.

Canopy

The rear-hinged F-14 canopy is operated hydraulically and pneumatically. Controls are present in both the pilot and RIO cockpits.

See Canopy Control Handle or Canopy Control Handle for the controls.

The CANOPY caution light on both the Pilot Caution - Advisory Indicator and the RIO Caution-Advisory Panel illuminates if the canopy is not in the down and locked, secured position.

Electrical Power System

All main electrical power in the F-14 is generated from the two engine driven AC generators. The generators connected to the gearboxes on the engines are each capable of generating enough power to individually drive all aircraft systems.

As for DC power generation the F-14 has two transformer-rectifiers supplying 28 V DC, and again each one is individually capable of driving all aircraft DC appliances.

The F-14 has an external power receptacle for AC power just aft of the nosegear, capable of driving aircraft AC and DC (through the transformer-rectifiers). External power is automatically disconnected from the aircraft power system when one of the internal generators come online.

Emergency Power

The F-14 has an emergency generator driven by the combined hydraulic system generating a limited supply of AC and DC power. If the system loses main power the emergency generator takes over supply of flight critical systems within 1 second.

Controls and Indicators

generator

The controls for the electrical systems are located on the master generator control panel.

The MASTER GEN (1) switches control connection of the main generators to the electrical buses. The NORM position on the switches connect the individual generators to the buses. The OFF/RESET position disconnects the generator and also resets any protection circuits that might have cut in because of the power supply being outside normal limits. The TEST position starts the generator but do not connect it to the electrical buses making it possible to test the generator without affecting other aircraft systems. The switch is locked to the on position and needs to be lifted to move it to the OFF/RESET position from NORM.

The EMERG (2) switch controls the emergency generator. In the NORM position the emergency generator is automatically connected to the essential buses if the main generators fail. The OFF/RESET position deactivates the emergency generator and also resets the associated protection circuits if tripped. The switch is guarded to the NORM position and that guard needs to be opened to move the switch to OFF/RESET.

Associated caution and advisory lights are located on the pilot Caution - Advisory Indicator. The L GEN and R GEN lights, when illuminated, indicate that the respective generator is not functioning correctly. Either because of a fault or because the engine driving the generator not running.

The TRANS/RECT advisory light indicates that only one or none of the transformer-rectifiers are functioning.

The emergency generator can be tested by selection of EMERG GEN on the MASTER TEST switch on the Master Test Panel. Completion of the test is indicated by the GO light illuminating. In case of a fault the NO GO light illuminates.

Circuit Breakers

The circuit breakers in the F-14 are located on the pilot’s right and left knee panels and behind the RIO’s seat on his left and right sides. The breakers protect aircraft systems from over-current by popping out and isolating the system drawing too much current. This is indicated by a white line becoming visible on the breaker as it pops out. The breaker can be reset by pushing it in and it can also be pulled out manually.

These breakers will be detailed here when implemented in DCS.

Lighting System

The F-14 Tomcat lighting system consists of the internal and the external lights.

The internal lights are the red instrument panel and console lights, red and white floodlights and a moveable utility light at both crew stations.

The external lights are the position lights, the anti-collision lights, the formation lights, the taxi light, the approach lights and the refueling probe light.

Internal Lighting

The red instrument panel and console lights are the normally used lights during nighttime, they back-light all instruments and controls allowing their use while impacting night vision minimally.

The floodlights allow for additional lighting of the cockpit panels but care should be taken to avoid affecting night vision.

The utility lights are movable and can be used to illuminate a specific spot and as a map or reading light.

Controls for the internal lights are on the Master Light Control Panel in pilot cockpit and Interior Light Control Panel in the RIO cockpit, each controlling their own cockpit lighting.

đź’ˇ The utility light function is not modeled in DCS, but the flashlight function, default keybind LAlt + L, which moves with the cursor, can be used, providing a similar function.

External Lighting

The position lights on the F-14 are located on the left wing tip (red), right wing tip (green), top aft of left vertical stabilizer (white) and upper and lower lights on the wing gloves on each side (red on left glove and green on right). The glove lights are additional lights supplementing the wing tip lights. When the wings are swept forward of 25° the wing tip lights are active and when aft of 25° the glove lights are active instead.

With the gear down, wings forward of 25° and the position lights in steady mode both the glove and wingtip position lights are lit. When the anti-collision lights are on the the position lights can only operate in the steady mode, otherwise they can be set to flash.

The anti-collision lights are located on the chin pod or TCS pod, top front of the left vertical stabilizer and top aft of the right vertical stabilizer. The anti-collision lights are all red flashing lights. The chin pod mounted lower light only operates while the nosegear wheel door is closed.

The formation lights are dim green lights used for formation flight which can be dimmed gradually. They are located on the aircraft nose (behind the radome), the wing tips, on the fuselage aft of the wings and on the top edge of the vertical stabilizers. All are duplicated on both sides of the aircraft.

The taxi light is a fixed headlight located on the nosewheel strut. It’s automatically turned off with gear retraction if set to on.

The approach lights are also located on the nosewheel strut and replicate the AoA indexer for the LSOs during carrier traps.

The refueling probe light is used to illuminate the refueling probe and is automatically enabled with probe extension.

All external light controls are located on the Master Light Control Panel except for the exterior lights switch on the left throttle (see Throttle) which disables or enables all external lights apart from the approach lights.

AN/AWG-9 Radar

The AN/AWG-9 radar in the F-14 is an all-weather, multi-mode pulse doppler radar using the X-band (X-band being 8-12 GHz). It was designed specifically to be a long range radar system capable of guiding up to 6 AIM-54 Phoenix missiles using its track while scan mode. One originally envisioned scenario was its use as a long range fleet defender intercepting russian bombers and attack aircraft threatening the fleet. During the F-14’s later service life this mission transitioned more towards the anti-fighter side, a mission for which it was very well adapted.

Radar Interface

The AN/AWG-9 weapons control system (WCS) is an integrated system containing the F-14’s main sensors and computer providing detection, tracking, and engagement of targets in the air-to-air and air-to-ground roles.

Detail Data Display (DDD) and Panel

DDD Panel

The DDD is the main control panel and display for the radar part of the AN/AWG-9 system. It contains all the controls for the radar except the scan volume and stabilization controls which are on the sensor control panel.

TGTS, MLC, AGC and PARAMP Switches

The upper left part of the DDD panel contains four switches (1-4) controlling amplification, main-lobe clutter (MLC) suppression and target size parameters.

The TGTS (targets) switch selects expected target size which is used by the WCS to calculate missile launch zones and set parameters for target tracking in the radar. It also sets the range at which the missile ATC is sent, SMALL being 6NM, NORM 10NM and LARGE 13NM. The selected position of this switch might negatively affect target tracking and engagement if set incorrectly.

The MLC switch controls how the system suppresses the MLC in the radar system while in pulse doppler mode. The OUT position disables the system while the IN position enables it. The AUTO position automatically enables the MLC filter if the antenna look-up angle is less than 3°.

The AGC switch controls the automatic gain control and is used in the pulse doppler modes to allow control of the time constant used for the AGC. Normally (NORM position) the AGC uses a longer time constant to calculate a mean value used for amplification. If the radar is operating in a jammed environment or heavy clutter is present the AGC can be set to use a faster time constant to mitigate these factors but this setting can also make the radar less sensitive to real targets.

The PARAMP, parametric amplifier switch allows for manual control of the parametric amplifier which is used to amplify weaker targets in all radar modes. Normally the WCS controls when to use the PARAMP depending on range but if tracking an unusually strong target it can be used to disable PARAMP to lessen the effect from background noise. If set to off manually it lessens the detection range by approximately 35%.

đź’ˇ AGC and PARAMP switches are currently not implemented.

AWG-9 Range Selection and Tracking Indication

In the upper central part of the DDD panel are located the controls and indicators for setting the radar range in the search modes. Below these are also present the indicators for radar tracking while in the single target track (STT) modes.

The six round buttons (8), which are labelled 5, 10, 20, 50, 100 and 200, are used to set desired radar range in pulse modes and IFF range, they also set the scale on the pilot target range displays. The buttons are mutually exclusive as only one range can be selected at a time. In pulse search this setting affects the PRF of the radar and the scale on the DDD and if set to 20nm or greater range it also enables pulse compression.

The range display drum (7) indicates currently displayed scale on the DDD for the pulse modes and is blank when using pulse-doppler. It can also show ±10 for when using the IFF interrogator in the STT modes.

Below these are the four radar track indicator lights which are used to indicate how the radar tracks the target in STT.

  • ANT TRK: Indicates the radar is tracking the target angle (azimuth and elevation).
  • RDROT: Indicates the target is in the range or rate gate.
  • JAT: Indicates the antenna is tracking a jamming source’s angle.
  • IROT: Indicates target angle tracking via TCS.

IR AUDIO Controls

The IR AUDIO controls (10-12) in the upper right part of the DDD panel were used with the original IR-sensor and are non-functional in modelled F-14 versions.

Radar and Missile Frequency Selectors

The thumbwheels in the upper rightmost part of the DDD panel are used to control the AN/AWG-9 radar emitter’s frequency (13) and the missile control channel used with the AIM-7 and AIM-54 (14). Adjustment of these might be needed to avoid interference from other AN/AWG-9 equipped aircraft or other external sources. The WCS reads the missile channel for the AIM-7 as the missiles are prepared as they need to be tuned and changing the channel after this will not affect a change unless the preparation sequence is restarted.

đź’ˇ Non-functional in DCS currently.

Radar Mode Selectors

In the lower right part of the DDD panel are located the controls for display mode and radar mode and its indicator drum. The display mode buttons (15) selects what mode is currently selected for display on the DDD. The RDR, radar, mode is the normally selected mode. The IR mode is non-functional as the IR system is not installed. The IFF button enables the IFF interrogator in one of its two operational modes, for more detail see the IFF section in the General design and systems overview chapter.

The radar mode buttons (16) selects the operational mode of the AN/AWG-9 radar. The two STT buttons, pulse-doppler single target track (PD STT) and pulse single target track (P STT), enables selection of an STT mode if available and relevant. These are used to automatically attempt an STT lockon onto a hooked TID target or to transfer between these two STT modes. The pulse doppler search button (PD SRCH) selects the PD SEARCH mode of the radar. The range-while-search button (RWS) selects the RWS mode of the radar. The two track-while-scan buttons (TWS AUTO and TWS MAN) selects their respective TWS modes for use in the radar. The pulse search button (PULSE SRCH) selects the pulse search mode of the radar.

The indicator drum (17) shows currently selected radar mode. Apart from TWS MAN, TWS AUTO, RWS which refers to their respective modes it can also show MRL (manual rapid lockon), A-G (air-to-ground), VSL (vertical scan lockon), OPTTRK (TCS track), PLM (pilot lockon mode), PULSE (for both pulse search and pulse STT), PD (for both pulse doppler search and PD STT) and PAL (pilot automatic lockon mode).

Aspect and Vc Switches

On opposite sides of the DDD itself are located the ASPECT and VC switches. The Vc switch (18) controls the rate scale on the DDD in the pulse doppler search modes. X-4 sets the scale to 800 knots opening to 4,000 knots closing, NORM sets the scale to 200 knots opening to 1,000 knots closing and VID sets the scale to 50 knots opening to 250 knots closing.

The ASPECT switch (21) controls two different things depending on radar mode. In the pulse doppler search modes it controls the rate processing windows of the radar, NOSE sets 600 knots opening to 1,800 knots closing, BEAM sets 1,200 knots closing to 1,200 knots opening and TAIL sets 1,800 knots opening to 600 knots closing. In the short pulse STT modes the switch sets the system tracking mode to the corresponding echo edge or centroid to counteract countermeasures like chaff and specific jammer modes.

Elevation Indicator

The elevation indicator scale, EL, (22) is used to indicate the sensor elevations. The left (RDR) needle indicates current actual radar elevation. This indicator will move with the antenna in the radar search modes.

If the HCU is set to RDR the right (IR/TV/EC) needle indicates the currently set elevation center of the antenna scan pattern. This is useful in STT as it enables the RIO to set the antenna elevation center to use when you eventually revert to search.

If the HCU is set to IR/TV the right needle instead displays current TCS elevation.

Counter-Countermeasure Mode Controls

In the lower leftmost corner are located the three counter-countermeasure mode buttons. These controls functionality to counter different jammers affecting the system. (Not currently implemented).

Radar and DDD Control Knobs

Spread out on the DDD panel are eight different knobs controlling differing functions on the DDD and radar. On the upper left side of the DDD is located the PULSE VIDEO control knob (5) which controls the video intensity on the DDD for the pulse modes. It affects only the DDD display, not the radar itself.

On the upper right side of the DDD is located the BRIGHT control knob (9) which adjusts a polarized filter which allows for mechanical control of the brightness of the DDD, mainly used in low light conditions.

On the lower left side of the DDD is located the PULSE GAIN control knob (20) which controls the radar gain in the pulse modes. This control affects the gain of the radar directly. Normally left in the detent at the fully clockwise position which allows the WCS to control it automatically.

On the lower right side of the DDD is located the ERASE control knob (19) which controls the strength of the erase beam on the DDD. The erase beam is what erases the indications continually on the DDD and thus affects how long the after-image of the detected targets will remain.

On the left side of the DDD panel are located the PD THRLD (26), JAM/JET (24) and ACM THRLD (25) control knobs. The pulse-doppler threshold knobs (PD THRLD) controls the threshold at which an echo is regarded as a contact, displayed on the DDD and tracked on the TID in RWS and TWS. The CLEAR knob controls the clear region threshold (upper half of the DDD) and the CLUTTER knob controls the clutter region (lower half of the DDD). Normally left in the clockwise NORM detents, letting the WCS automatically control them.

The JAM/JET control knob selects the threshold of what jamming intensity signal strength is needed to regard an emitter as a jammer and make it indicate a jammer strobe on the TID. The ACM THRLD sets the threshold for what to regard as a target at ACM ranges. Normally left in the counter-clockwise detent, letting the WCS automatically control it.

đź’ˇ JAM/JET and ACM THRLD not currently implemented in DCS.

Detail Data Display

ModeSearchSTT
PulsePulse SearchPulse STT
Pulse-DopplerPulse Doppler SearchPulse Doppler STT

The DDD screen itself shows either only radar return data or radar returns combined with symbology depending on radar mode.

In the pulse search mode the display shows only radar returns and the a visual representation of the radar sweep and erase sweep. The screen shows range vs azimuth in this mode. In pulse doppler modes the AGC TRACE is added on the bottom showing supposed jamming intensity of the detected targets. The screen shows rate vs azimuth in these modes.

In the two STT modes the display shows, in addition to the return from the target, the tracking gates (either range or range rate gate), a closing rate indication on the right side and the attack symbology if in air-to-air mode and a missile is selected.

In pulse STT the target is displayed at the correct azimuth and range while in pulse doppler STT the target is shifted to the left side of the display and a generated target symbol is at the correct azimuth instead. In pulse doppler STT the AGC TRACE is added as well to give an indication of jamming strength. For information about the attack symbology see the VDIG section.

đź’ˇ AGC TRACE not yet implemented.

When the IFF interrogator is activated it superimposes the IFF information on top of the normal radar picture if in pulse search. In pulse doppler search the DDD switches to range vs azimuth at the previously set range scale while the IFF information is shown and in PD STT, if the target is hooked on the TID the DDD switches to a ±10 scale centered on the target while the IFF returns are shown.

Tactical Information Display (TID) and Associated Controls

TID

The TID is the main data display for the WCS. It displays a tactical picture to the RIO which is used to identify and select targets for the long range weapons on the F-14 Tomcat. Think of it as a top down map showing the relative coordinates of all presented tracks and symbols, but without a representation of the ground/surface features (map). It is also used in secondary roles as a display for entering data into the WCS, for navigation, for INS alignment and for the on board checkout, OBC.

TID Display Control Knobs

On the upper edge of the TID are two display control knobs (2 & 4). The left one controls the contrast of the TCS display and the right one controls the overall brightness of the TID. Both settings will depend on user preference and ambient lighting.

INS and Navigational Controls

On the upper left corner of the TID is the status display for the INS (1), used to indicate status of the INS and its alignment.

To the sides of the TID are located two selector knobs. The one on the left side (12) controls and selects the INS or AHRS mode to use. It also allows for INS alignment.

On the right side is the selector knob (6) controlling the source used when destination steering is selected by the pilot. Selects between the different waypoints stored in the WCS. MAN position is used only for aircraft with TARPS mounted.

Adjacent to this selector is a readout drum on the upper right edge of the TID (5). It’s used to indicate the type of steering information currently displayed to the pilot.

Possible steering type shown are: destination (DEST), data link command heading (D/L), azimuth lead collision steering (LD CLSN), collision steering (CLSN), lead pursuit steering (LD PURST), pursuit steering (PURST), TACAN radial (TACAN) and manually set commanded heading (MAN).

TID Data Readout Drum

Above the TID is located the data readout indicator drum (3). It’s used to indicate the source of the data displayed on the TID text readouts. Possible readouts are: the different waypoints in the navigational system (WAY PT, ST, FIX PT, IP and HB), own aircraft (OWN A/C), first priority target (TGT 1) and SYMBOL.

Symbol indicates that the readout displays data for a hooked symbol on the TID which doesn’t have its own indicator text on the drum. The drum can also show a blank face to indicate the data source as one not having its own indicator text and which has no symbol on the TID.

TRACK HOLD and CLSN buttons

Below the selector knobs on the sides of the TID are two buttons with indicator lights, one on each side. The lights illuminates green to indicate selection.

On the left side is the TRACK HOLD button (11) which enables the track hold function. Normally targets on the TID in TWS mode are retained 14 seconds after last observation. The track hold function extends this two 2 minutes for all tracks. If disabled it reverts to the standard 14 second period, whereafter the targets will be dropped if no new observations occur.

On the right side is the CLSN button (7) enabling collision steering to currently tracked target or centroid if in TWS. This selection overrides the current steering information presented to the pilot with the collision steering, only exception being if the pilot selects the ACM.

TID Control Panel

Below the TID is the TID control panel (8). It contains 8 buttons selecting what symbology to show on the TID, these illuminates green when active. It also contains two selector knobs controlling display scale and TID mode. The buttons are:

Control/IndicatorFunction
RID DISABLENot implemented.
ALT NUMAltitude numerals, enables display of track altitudes on the left side of track symbols. Shows a single digit representing ten-thousands of feet, 1 as an example indicating an altitude of between 5 000 and 15 000 feet.
SYM ELEMSymbology elements, enables display of all supplementary symbology of tracks and waypoints. If deselected all tracks and waypoints are represented only as dots on the TID.
DATA LINKEnables display of data link tracks.
JAM STROBEEnables display of jam strobes on the TID. Jamming targets exceeding the JAM/JET setting on the DDD are shown if enabled. Not yet implemented.
NON-ATTKNon-attack, enables or disables display of targets which aren’t possible to engage. Friendly targets being an example.
VEL VECTORVelocity vector, enables display of velocity vectors on tracks.
LAUNCH ZONEEnables display of weapon launch zones depending on selected missile type. These replace the velocity vectors on relevant targets. This function is automatically enabled by the WCS 60 seconds prior to a target entering maximum launch range.

The left selector knob on the panel controls displayed TID mode (10).

GND STAB (ground stabilized) mode stabilizes the display to the ground meaning that the display is fixed while own aircraft moves on the display. True north is used as up on the display.

A/C STAB (aircraft stabilized) mode stabilizes the display to own aircraft meaning that the display moves along with own aircraft which stays put on the display. Own aircraft heading is used as up on the display.

ATTK (attack) functions in the same manner as A/C STAB but superimposes the attack steering symbology.

TV selects the TCS for display on the TID. Disables normal tactical presentation on the TID and on the HSD.

The right selector knob controls the scale on the TID, setting the display diameter to the selected range (9). Available ranges are 25, 50, 100, 200 and 400 nautical miles, the greater ranges being useful to show data link information outside of own radar range.

TID Data Readouts

TID Indicators

IndicatorFunction
Buffer RegisterShows data that the RIO is currently entering into the WCS. Comparable to a scratchpad in newer aircraft. Functionality further expanded upon in the CAP section.
Data ReadoutsReadouts showing data selected for readout from the WCS. Can be, as examples, data from hooked tracks or own aircraft. Functionality further expanded upon in the CAP section.
Computer Run IndicatorsReadouts showing WCS program cycles running. Should continuously cycle numbers, if not this indicates a freeze or lockup in the WCS computer.
Antenna ElevationShows current AN/AWG-9 radar antenna elevation if in STT or scan pattern elevation center if in a search mode.
Scan Pattern LimitsShows altitude limits of currently selected scan pattern at set TID display range in thousands of feet.
Navigation StatusShows current status of the navigation system, IN for INS, AH for AHRS and an alternating MV if the manual magnetic variation differs from calculated magnetic variation.
Target Closing RateShows STT target or TWS hooked target closing rate to the closest whole tenth of knots. A plus sign indicates that the track is closing and a minus that the track is opening the distance to own aircraft.
Selected WeaponIndicates currently selected air-to-air weapon. G for gun, SW for sidewinder, SP for sparrow and PH for phoenix. SP and PH also indicates number of missiles of the selected type that are ready for launch. Display is blank in air-to-ground mode.

TID Symbology

ElementShapeFunction
Center DotImageMarks coordinates of symbol, basic component of all symbols representing a coordinate.
Own AircraftImageSymbol representing own aircraft. Antenna scan limits, jamming strobes emanate from this symbol. Moves and has a velocity vector in ground stabilized mode. Stationary in aircraft stabilized and attack modes. If the symbol moves outside of TID presentation a line is drawn from the center of the display to the edge of the display indicating direction of the own aircraft symbol.
TID CursorImageCircle used as a hook cursor. Controlled by the HCU when in TID mode. Half-action on the HCU enables display of the symbol and also enables the HCU stick to move the cursor. The cursor location is set by stick deflection. Full-action on the HCU hooks (selects) the closest symbol if one is present within 0.125 inches of cursor center. The hooked symbol gets brighter to indicate hook.
TWS Steering CentroidImageSteering centroid of TWS tracks selected by WCS for weapons engagement.
Unknown Onboard Sensor TargetImageUnknown sensor track in RWS, TWS, and STT modes.
Hostile Onboard Sensor TargetImageTrack in TWS and STT modes designated as hostile by RIO.
Friend Onboard Sensor TargetImageTrack in TWS and STT modes designated as friendly by RIO.
Angle-Tracked Radar TargetImageRadar target tracked only in angle (jamming target).
Angle-Tracked Radar Target with Altitude DifferenceImageRadar target being tracked in angle only and range being computed by altitude difference ranging.
TCS-Angle Tracked TargetImageTarget being tracked in angle by TCS.
TCS-Angle Tracked Target with Altitude DifferenceImageTarget being tracked in angle by TCS and range being computed by angle difference ranging.
Unknown Data Link TargetImageData link track identified as unknown by source.
Hostile Data Link TargetImageData link track identified as hostile by source.
Friend Data Link TargetImageData link track identified as friendly by source.
Manually Entered Reference Points
Home baseImageWaypoint representing home base, carrier or airfield.
WaypointImageWCS navigational waypoint, supplanted by number indicating waypoint 1, 2 or 3.
Defended PointImageWaypoint used to show area to protect.
Fixed PointImageGeneric fixed-point waypoint.
Hostile AreaImageWaypoint indicating a hostile area.
Surface TargetImageWaypoint indicating a surface target.
IPImageWaypoint used for air-to-ground engagement, see Computer Initial Point.
Data Link Reference Points
Home BaseImageData link waypoint representing home base.
WaypointImageData link generic waypoint.
Data Link Fixed PointImageData link waypoint representing a fixed point.
Data Link Surface TargetImageData link waypoint representing a surface target.
Position Symbol Modifiers
Mandatory AttackImageAdditional symbology on a TWS track (horizontal bar through center dot) selected as mandatory attack by the RIO. Only one target can be designated thusly and always receives an engagement priority number.
Data link DestroyImageAdditional symbology on a data link track (horizontal bar through center dot) designated to be destroyed by data link source. Does not affect target prioritization in WCS.
Do Not AttackImageAdditional symbology on a TWS or data link track (vertical bar through center dot) designated as do not attack (by RIO) or disengage (via data link). If set by RIO removes target from WCS target prioritization.
Multiple TargetsImageAdditional symbology on a TWS or data link track (horizontal bar on left side of symbol) indicating that the track represents multiple targets. Can be set manually by RIO or received via data link.
Data Link ChallengeImageAdditional symbology on a data link track (small V with apex at center dot) representing data link command to visually identify target.
Track ExtrapolatedImageAdditional symbology on TWS or STT track (small X with center at center dot) indicating that no update to target has occurred within 8 seconds. Track will be deleted after 14 seconds or 2 minutes if track hold function is enabled.
Hooked SymbolSymbol brightensWhen a symbol is hooked by HCU or CAP functions it brightens to indicate hook.
Target Under Missile AttackSymbol brightensIn TWS and STT symbols of tracks being engaged by own aircraft brightens during computed missile flight time plus 15 seconds to indicate missile engagement in progress.
Target in Optimum Missile Launch ZoneSymbol blinksIn TWS and STT symbols, launch zones and firing order numerics of target tracks blink when time to optimum missile range is less than 8 seconds.
Altitude NumericsImageWhen altitude numerics are selected for display a number on the left side of the tracks indicate track altitude to nearest ten thousands of feet. The number four as an example indicates an altitude between 35,000 and 45,000 feet. Available on radar and data link tracks.
Firing Order NumericsImageIndicates AIM-54 phoenix target prioritization (1 to 6) in WCS when in the TWS mode. Next missile launch will target track with number 1 and remove the number from that track to advance the other 5 track numbers one step to prepare for next launch. Mandatory attack selection on a target forces the WCS to always include that target in the prioritization. Next launch selection automatically sets hooked target as number one.
Time-to-Impact (TTI)ImageAfter AIM-54 launch the firing order number on a track is replaced with the TTI or time-to-impact indication, showing WCS calculated time until missile intercepts the target track. When the AIM-54 active command is sent the TTI numbers flash to indicate this.
Velocity VectorImageVelocity vector emanating from center dot of tracks when velocity vector display is selected. Vector direction represents track heading and length represents track speed so that the max indicated speed (1,800 knots) is 1.5 inches on the TID. In TID ground stabilized mode the vector direction represents track true heading and the vector length represents track ground speed.
Launch Zone VectorsImageImage
TUMR (Time Until Minimum Range), TUOR (Time Until Optimum Range) and TUIR (Time Until In-Range/Maximum Range).
The launch zone vectors are activated manually by the RIO or when time to maximum launch range is less than 60 seconds and replaces the normal track velocity vectors.
Jamming StrobeImageLine extending from own aircraft symbol to edge of TID to indicate a jammer exceeding the set JAM/JET threshold.
Radar Antenna Scan Pattern Azimuth LimitsImageThe limits of the radar scan pattern in azimuth is displayed as two dashed lines extending from own aircraft symbol. Each dash and space represent 20 nautical miles each in all radar modes. In STT the two lines converge to a single tracking strobe to indicate that the antenna tracks a single target.
Data Link Jamming StrobeImageJamming strobe received via data link indicated by a line emanating from a data link point towards the jammers direction.
Data Link PointerImageBrightened cursor (circle) around a data link track used to indicate data link operator concern about the specific track.
Data link Priority KillImageAdditional symbology on a data link track indicating a target that must be destroyed. Will not by itself affect WCS prioritization.
Artificial HorizonImageArtificial horizon on TID representing aircraft roll and pitch. Angle of the line represents roll and vertical deflection on display represents pitch.
Steering Guidance SymbolImageSymbol representing steering error from optimal missile launch direction. Should be placed by the pilot as near as possible to the center of the ASE circle and at launch should be inside of that same circle.
Allowable Steering Error CircleImageASE circle used to indicate the allowable steering error for missile launch. Size varies with attack geometry, mode and selected missile.
Breakaway IndicationImageLarge cross appearing in the center of the TID when target range is less than minimum missile launch range or gun firing range.

đź’ˇ Some of these symbols pertain to functions not yet implemented in DCS.

NAV GRID

The Navigation Command and Control Grid or NAV GRID was designed to enable easy navigation and CAP control from a common fixed reference point. It enables TID readout of bearing and range from that set reference point, called YY. While NAV GRID is active displayed range and bearing on the TID for hooks and own aircraft is indicated relative YY. Additionally it also displays a grid extending from YY along a set threat axis. The purpose of the grid itself is to allow for quick position reference while a precise readout is available for a hooked target. This is where the name NAV GRID originates.

Lastly it also allows for display of something called Voice Codes. These are displayed for current hook alternating with the altitude readout on the TID if ALT NUM is selected for display. It indicates bearing from YY in tens (15 reading as 150 as an example) followed by a letter indicating range. A would indicate 0-50nm while B indicates 50-100nm and so on for consecutive letters.

The standard NAV GRID display mode is GND STAB and this allows for the grid itself to be visible. If A/C STAB or ATTK display modes are selected only the Voice Code display functionality is retained but it addition to the normal functionality the Ownship Symbol will always display its Voice Code.

As default the grid origin, YY, is positioned at the edge of the TID extending outwards along the set threat axis. The grid can be set to have between 1 and 6 sectors display, all being outlined meaning that the one sector display will have 2 lines delineating the limits and 6 having 7 lines. The size of the sectors depend on the total grid coverage, which can be up to 180 degrees, which is then divided into the selected number of sectors. Along the sector demarkation lines are drawn range indicator marks at 50nm intervals, the 50nm marks being shorter than the even 100nm markers.

The ground stab view as well as the grid can be offset as normal by the RIO via the HCU. To reset the offset, cycle to any aircraft stabilized mode and back to GND STAB.

While the original purpose of this functionality was intended for fleet defence use it works perfectly fine as a bulls-eye reference in DCS with YY set to the bulls-eye. The only real limitation being the grid only displaying along the threat axis and not all around.

Operation

NAV GRID entry

1.Set the TID MODE knob to GND STAB.
2.Select D/L category on the CAP CATEGORY knob.
3.Select the CAP MESSAGE button corresponding to NAV GRID.
4.Enter grid coverage angle using the ALT/4 button on the CAP.Press CLEAR, ALT/4 and enter desired grid coverage angle followed by ENTER.
5.Enter numbers of grid sectors using the NBR/2 button on the CAP.Press CLEAR, NBR/2 and enter desired numbers of sectors followed by ENTER.
6.Enter YY location using the LAT/1 and LONG/6 or RNG/5 and BRG/0 CAP buttons.Press CLEAR, LAT/1 and enter desired latitude followed by ENTER. Repeat for longitude using LONG/6 or use RNG/5 and BRG/0 instead of both for YY location referenced from own aircraft position.
7.Enter the threat axis using the HDG/8 CAP button.Press CLEAR, HDG/8 and enter desired threat axis extending from YY followed by ENTER.

đź’ˇ

  • First pressing CLEAR is to make sure to reset any previously selected readout so that a subsequent press of a prefix sets a new readout for display and data entry and not enters new data into a previous readout instead. This is further detailed under Computer Address Panel (CAP).
  • Modification and display of the NAV GRID readouts are available in NAV GRID with no hook present, i.e. OWN A/C as hook.
  • Enter NAV GRID from the tactical display (GND STAB), do not attempt to enter it during alignment.
  • Deselect the CAP MESSAGE button corresponding to NAV GRID under the D/L category on the CAP.

When hot spawning in DCS YY will be set to mission bulls-eye for your faction and threat axis will be set from YY to first valid waypoint in the following order: HA, DP, ST, FP, 3, 2, 1 and HB or own aircraft position at spawn if none of those waypoints are present.

When cold starting with Jester he has to be commanded to adjust these parameters via the Jester wheel. He can enter YY using the same methods available for waypoints as well as entering a waypoint’s location as YY.

With a human RIO he/she will have to enter it manually.

Hand Control Unit (HCU)

HCU

The hand control unit (HCU), stick and corresponding controls are the main input controlling the RIO WCS displays. It contains the power controls and indicators for the WCS and TCS in addition to the stick and it’s controls.

HCU Power Controls and Indicators

The lights on the upper edge of the HCU are the IR/TV overtemp indicator (2), the power reset indicator (4) and the WCS power indicator (6). The IR/TV power indicator light indicates TCS not ready when in the standby (STBY) and on positions, will remain on in the standby position and turn off in the on position when the TCS is ready for operation. The power reset indicator light indicates that one or more of the secondary power supplies are inoperative due to a power fault tripping it’s protection circuit. The WCS power indicator light indicates WCS in standby (STBY) or on but that the radar is not ready to transmit. During startup the light will turn off until the radar startup timer times out. To reset radar cycle to standby and back to on.

The IR/TV switch (1) in the upper left corner of the HCU controls the power to the TCS. Standby (STBY) starts system initiation but does not turn on the sensor. On enables sensor operation. The switch requires the WCS XMT to be in STBY or on to be enabled. The WCS XMT switch (7) controls power to the WCS computer system and corresponding displays (DDD and TID) and inhibits or allows radar transmission. Standby (STBY) enables power to all WCS systems, including displays, and begins the radar warmup sequence. The displays requires 30 seconds warmup and the radar requires 3 minutes of warmup for operation. The on position enable radar transmission if weight on wheels is not present and radar timeout (warmup) is complete.

The two buttons in the upper middle of the HCU is the LIGHT TEST (3) and PWR RESET (5) buttons. The LIGHT TEST button enables control of all WCS lights and indicators by enabling their lights. The PWR RESET button resets the protection circuits of the secondary power supplies re-enabling them, also resets missile power. Should only be used if the power reset indicator light is on, if the fault tripping the circuits remain the protection circuits and the indicator light will remain on.

HCU Mode buttons

The four lighted buttons on the left side (12) of the HCU stick are the HCU mode buttons which illuminates green to indicate which one is active, they are mutually exclusive. The IR/TV button selects TCS mode, allowing the HCU stick and controls to control the TCS. The RDR button selects radar mode, allowing the HCU stick and controls to control the radar acquisition cursor on the DDD allowing for transition from radar search modes to STT. The DDD CURSOR button selects DDD cursor mode, allowing the HCU stick and controls to control the DDD cursor used to indicate ground coordinates when using the radar for ground mapping. This is used for radar navigational fixes or for selecting a position on the DDD radar display for use as a waypoint. The TID CURSOR button selects TID cursor mode, allowing the HCU stick and controls to control the TID cursor used to hook (select) symbology on the TID for symbology control and data readout.

HCU Control Stick

The controls on the HCU stick are: the action trigger switch (11), elevation vernier control (10), the OFFSET button (9) and the MRL button (8). The action trigger on the forward side of the stick has two detents, the half-action first detent and the full-action second detent. Half-action enables display of the cursor for the selected mode except when in TCS mode where it enables stick control of TCS elevation and azimuth. In the radar mode it additionally enables the super search acquisition mode in the radar (See chapter about radar transitional modes for more information). Full-action, when enabled tells the TCS to lockon to a target in the TCS mode if a target is present in its acquisition gates. In the radar mode it tells the radar to attempt lockon to a target in the radar range/rate gates at the set azimuth. In the DDD and TID modes it marks the current cursor position or, in the case of the TID mode, tries to hook a symbol if present within 0.125 inches on the display.

The elevation vernier control is a thumbwheel on the left side of the stick used in the TCS and radar modes to fine tune sensor elevation ±4° for target acquisition, this elevation deflection is added to the normal sensor elevation control. The OFFSET button on the top of the stick is used to offset any of the TID tactical displays, moving the own aircraft symbol to the TID cursor spot hook (if present) and the rest of the symbology relative to that. This function is reset and all the symbols are moved to the original positions by cycling the TID display mode selector to another mode and back. The MRL button on the right side of the stick is used to enable the manual rapid lockon mode (MRL) for target acquisition. See Manual Rapid Lockon (MRL) for more information.

The stick itself functions differently depending on selected HCU mode. In all cases the stick is only enabled with the action trigger depressed and all modes control sensor or cursor position absolutely meaning that a given deflection of the stick always moves the sensor or cursor to the same position. In the TCS mode X (up/down) controls TCS elevation and Y (left/right) controls TCS azimuth. In the radar mode X controls the range or rate of the radar acquisition gate on the DDD and Y controls the gate in azimuth in a similar fashion. In the two cursor modes X controls up/down of the cursor on the respective screen and Y controls left/right of the same.

Computer Address Panel (CAP)

CAP

The computer address panel (CAP) is the RIO’s main interface for controlling and entering/reading data into/from the WCS computer.

Numeric Keypad (3)

The upper part of the CAP contains a numeric keypad with additional buttons for clearing input (CLEAR), entering input (ENTER) and two buttons for selecting S/W and N/E prefixes for coordinates. Some of the number keys has an additional function selecting a prefix for data display and/or entry. The keys containing functions and what those are:

KeyFunction
1LAT - Latitude, selects latitude for display and entry.
2NBR - Number, used for IFT and BITs.
3SPD - Speed, selects speed for display and entry.
4ALT - Altitude, selects altitude for display and entry.
5RNG - Range, selects range for display and entry.
6LONG - Longitude, selects longitude for display and entry.
8HDG - Heading, selects heading for display and entry.
0BRG - Bearing, selects bearing for display and entry.

Some of these keys also makes a corresponding other data be displayed on the TID readouts but entry only affects the selected prefix. As an example LAT also makes the readout display LONG but entry affects LAT only, SPD and HDG are another example of the same thing.

CAP Message Matrix Indicator Drum and buttons

The middle/lower part of the panel contains the message buttons and indicator drum and its CATEGORY selector knob. Its functionality is somewhat akin to the buttons on a MFD in a more modern system except that instead of a screen the drum is used to display the current functionality of the buttons.

The current functionality of the buttons are chosen by selecting a category on the CATEGORY selector knob, movement of the selector turns the display drum to indicate selected category’s button functionality. When a function or symbol hook is in use the corresponding message button illuminates to indicate activation.

The matrixes and corresponding functionality of the different categories are as follows:

Categories

BIT (Built in Test)

BIT

The BIT category contains message button functions pertaining to BIT initiation of different aircraft systems. These might be functions normally run during OBC during startup or separate tests only available from here. This will be detailed in a separate chapter about on board tests and BIT when implemented, not currently implemented in this simulation.

SPL (Special)

SPL

The SPL category contains various message button functions not contained under the other categories. Currently only the IP TO TGT function is implemented and used for the Computer Initial Point air to ground mode, see Computer Initial Point. It also contains a button for manually initiating the OBC routine (OBC BIT), a button for displaying latest OBC results (MAINT DISP) and a button for clearing the latest OBC results (OBC DISPL). These and the other functions are not yet implemented.

NAV

The NAV category contains message button functions used for navigational fixes and updating data used by for INS operation and alignment. The OWN A/C (own aircraft) button selects own aircraft for data readout and entry, the same as hooking the own aircraft symbol on the TID. Its used to enter data critical for INS alignment like aircraft coordinates and altitude (and heading and speed if on a moving carrier) and can also be used for readout of the various data available about own aircraft. The STORED HDG ALIGN button is used to store and indicate if a stored heading align is available. It also allows deselection of the function resulting in a normal alignment. The WIND SPD HDG button selects entry and display of wind data, can also be used to enter wind speed and heading manually for backup navigation. The MAG VAR (HDG) button is used to display and enter magnetic variation used by the navigational system. The four FIX buttons, TACAN FIX, RDR FIX (radar), VIS FIX (visual) and FIX ENABLE are used to update aircraft position to correct for INS drift. Basic function is the selection of type of fix followed by FIX ENABLE to enter it into the system. Full procedures for these fixes can be found in the navigational section in this chapter. The two TARPS buttons are non-functional in a non TARPS aircraft.

TAC DATA (Tactical Data)

TAC DATA

The TAC DATA category contains message button functionality allowing for hook/selection of the different waypoints available in the WCS navigational system. The same hook can be made via HCU hook on the TID. Hooking the waypoints enables them to be updated via the CAP keypad. The PT TO PT button is non-functional.

DATA LINK

The DATA LINK category contains message button functionality for RIO data link responses to data link controller commands. The WILCO (will comply), CANTCO (can not comply) tells the controller if own aircraft can or can not comply to a command. POINT enables the RIO to mark a hooked track sent to the controller for special attention. ENGAGE likewise indicates own intention to engage a hooked track. The NAV GRID button enables the NAV GRID functionality on the TID, see Navigation Command and Control Grid (NAV GRID). The TID AVIA button enables the AVIA display on the TID. Not yet implemented. The F/F NAV UPDATE allows for Link-4C fighter to fighter navigational updates. See the navigation chapter. Remaining buttons are non-functional.

TARGET DATA

TARGET DATA

The TARGET DATA category contains message button functionality used to modify hooked track symbols. The FRIEND, UNK (Unknown), HOST (Hostile) and MULT TGT (Multiple Target) message functions are used to mark a hooked symbol as the respective category (multiple target can be set in addition to the other three). The DO NOT ATTK button sets a target as a do not attack target, removing it from the WCS firing order. The DATA TRANS (Data Transfer) function enables a hooked jam strobe to be correlated with another hooked track symbol. This is used to allow the WCS to better use both data sources to track the target. The strobe needs to be hooked before the symbol. Currently not implemented. TEST TGT (Test Target) calls up a simulated test target in the WCS for test purposes. Currently not implemented. The SYM DELETE (Symbol Delete) allows the RIO to manually drop/remove a track or waypoint from the TID if no longer relevant. Own aircraft and data link track symbols can not be removed. IFT AUX LAUNCH and GND MAP are non-functional.

Program Restart Button

Below the message readout and buttons are two final buttons on the panel. The PRGM RESTRT (Program Restart) button resets the currently running program in case of a computer hang-up. A computer hang-up is indicated when the computer run indicator digits on the TID stops cycling. The last button is the TUNE DSBL button which is non-functional in this F-14 version.

Data Readout/Entry Procedure

Data readout and entry on the TID always follows the following sequence:

  1. Selection of symbol/function
  2. Prefix selection for display
  3. Data entry

Selection of desired symbol or function can be achieved either via TID hook or via the CAP MESSAGE buttons available under the different categories on the CAP DRUM.

Most data readout prefixes displays multiple readouts, as an example calling up either latitude and longitude shows both and calling up range also displays bearing and vice versa but the selected prefix is the one used for data entry.

To select another prefix for data readout without re-selecting the message function the CLEAR key on the CAP is used, this resets the readout and allows for selection of a new prefix. As it’s possible that depression of a prefix button is read as a data entry if a prefix is already selected it’s normally recommended to reset using CLEAR before re-selecting a new prefix. This makes the recommended sequence:

  1. Selection of symbol/function
  2. CLEAR
  3. Prefix
  4. selection for display
  5. Data entry

To enter new data into selected prefix the RIO enters desired data after the prefix selection, checks it is correct and then enters it with the ENTER key. The TID readout is then updated with the new data. To clear the data without entering it, instead use the CLEAR key.

Sensor Control Panel

Radar and IR Control Panel

The sensor control panel contains the main controls for the AN/AWG-9 radar antenna scan patterns. It also contains various TCS controls, a control allowing the RIO to slave the radar to the TCS and vice versa and controls for the airborne video tape recorder (AVTR).

Antenna Search Pattern Selection

The upper half of panel contains controls for the radar antenna scan pattern. The STAB (stabilization) switch controls whether the radar antenna scan pattern is stabilized relative to the horizon (IN) or not. If in OUT instead meaning that the scan pattern is relative to the F-14 aircraft armament datum line (ADL). The WCS computer can override this setting if necessary. The AZ CTR (azimuth control) and EL CTR (elevation control) knobs sets the elevation and azimuth centerpoint of the antenna scan pattern. The azimuth control moves the azimuth scan center within 65° degrees of the aircraft centerline, this is disabled if azimuth scan width is set to ±65° as it already scans the whole available azimuth range. Do not move the scan pattern so that it scans outside of 65° from aircraft centerline as this might damage the antenna as it might hit the antenna azimuth stops. The elevation control moves the elevation position of the bottom bar of the elevation scan pattern relative to zero elevation. It can move from -76° to +54°. Both control knobs have marked centerpoints, being aircraft centerline and zero elevation respectively.

The AZ SCAN (azimuth scan) and EL BARS (elevation bars) selector knobs controls the size of the antenna scan pattern. The AZ SCAN selector knob has four settings, ±10°, ±20°, ±40° and ±65°. The EL BARS selector knob also has four settings, 1, 2, 4 or 8 bars. 1 bar being 2.3°, 2 bars 3.6°, 4 bars 6.3° and 8 bars 11.5°. The reason for the elevation coverage not equalling one bar times the number of bars being that the bars overlap slightly.

The last radar control on the panel is the VSL switch. Momentary selection of VSL HIGH or LOW activates the vertical scan lockon acquisition mode (VSL). (See Vertical Scan Lockon (VSL))

The lower part of the panel contains controls for the airborne video tape recorder (AVTR) controlling and indicating power mode and time remaining on tape.

đź’ˇ This is currently not modelled in DCS.

General Radar Operation

The AN/AWG-9 radar has two basic operational modes, pulse and pulse doppler, each with its own pros and cons. Below is a table listing function, weapons capability, expected range and target data available.

ModeFunctionWeapons capabilityDetection-range
Pulse
Pulse SearchMedium range search and detection, secondary air-to-ground.Boresight missiles.60nm
Pulse STTShort to medium range single target track and missile launch.Gun and missiles, AIM-7 in CW and AIM-54 in active launch.50nm
Pulse Doppler
Pulse Doppler SearchLong range search and detection.Boresight missiles.110nm
Range While SearchLong range search, detection and ranging.Boresight missiles.90nm
Track While SearchLong range search, detection, multiple target track and missile guidance.AIM-54, multiple target capability.90nm
Pulse Doppler STTLong range single target track and missile guidance.Gun and all missiles. AIM-7 in PD and CW and AIM-54 in PD and active.90nm

💡 Detection-range approximation for a 5m²-target.

Pulse Mode

In the pulse mode of operation the AN/AWG-9 does not use pulse doppler filtering which means that it can be used to detect targets at all aspects and also be used for rudimentary ground mapping. On the pro side this means that the radar in this mode cannot be notched as it does not need to have a relative speed to register the target. The downside however is that the radar does not have an easy way of differentiate between unwanted ground reflections and real targets meaning that aircraft can hide in the ground clutter near the ground. Because of this and the increased difficulty from trying to differentiate real targets from the general background noise without doppler filtering means that the range in the pulse modes are less than in the pulse doppler modes.

The radar has two pulse modes, pulse search and pulse single target track (P-STT).

Pulse Search (PULSE SRCH)

Pulse Search

Pulse search is used to search for and find airborne targets at range.

It is possible to use this radar mode as a basic ground mapper as well which can be useful for navigation and navigational fixes and can also be used in a pinch to detect larger surface targets like ships. Keep in mind though that the radar is not built with this as its main function and that a real air-to-ground radar will outperform it handily.

In this mode the radar cannot by itself differentiate targets and generate tracks meaning that the WCS will not generate track files and display anything on the TID. This also means that pulse search is not capable of guiding missiles.

The DDD in this mode will display a radar image indicating the azimuth and range of targets at selected scale and it is possible to transition to P STT using the RDR mode with the HCU stick. It is possible to select ground or aircraft stabilized modes of operation using the STAB switch on the sensor control panel.

Pulse Single Target Track (P-STT)

Pulse STT

Pulse STT is used to track a single target, like pulse search mode it is not susceptible to notching but it is to ground clutter. The fact that the STT modes use gates to track the target, in this case range gates, means that it is less susceptible to ground clutter but a target close enough to the ground that the ground return enters the range gates would be likely to shake the lock.

As it is only in the pulse doppler modes that the missile guidance commands can be sent pulse STT is limited to launching AIM-7s in CW mode and AIM-54s in active launch mode limiting their ranges. At short ranges, ACM ranges, it is possible to use the ASPECT switch to set what aspect of the target to track, this is just to counter different types of countermeasures. As an example, if set to NOSE the radar will be less susceptible to chaff as the radar weights its track towards the targets leading edge (nose) away from the chaff being launched behind the target.

A successful track is indicated by the ANT TRK and RDROT indicator lights on the DDD, meaning that the antenna is tracking the target and that the target is within the range gates. If the target is jamming with sufficient strength, negating a range track, the radar will transition to a jam angle track instead, indicated by the JAT indicator light on the DDD illuminating instead of the RDROT. When range tracking is again possible at closer ranges the radar will transition to that instead.

The DDD in this mode will be similar to the pulse search mode but the antenna will be locked onto the target and not scan. Additionally the DDD will show the range gates around the target, a closing rate symbol at the right scale and applicable attack symbology if a valid missile is selected.

Pulse Doppler Mode

In pulse doppler mode the AN/AWG-9 uses doppler filters to filter out unwanted returns, enhancing target detection and thus increasing detection range. The pros of this mode being that, as said, targets can be detected at greater ranges, ground returns mostly eliminated and missile guidance commands be sent to AIM-7 and AIM-54 missiles. The AIM-54 both in TWS and STT and the AIM-7 in STT only. The biggest con of this mode being that it is susceptible to notching as a target returning zero relative speed will be filtered out.

The pulse doppler modes of the AN/AWG-9 are, pulse doppler search, range while search, track while scan and pulse doppler STT. The three search modes have a common DDD display, the main difference being that pulse doppler search has a slightly better range as the other two modes need to process FM-ranging to enable range indication of tracked targets.

Pulse Doppler Search Modes

Pulse Doppler Search

The DDD in the pulse doppler search modes displays returns at azimuth versus rate (closing speed) meaning that by reading only the DDD the RIO can only discern target closing speed and azimuth. The display indicates observed closure rate vs the ground (with own airspeed subtracted) as opposed to relative closure rate. While this means that a target directly ahead, moving directly towards the radar, will show true target airspeed this speed varies with target aspect and radar antenna azimuth. This reason for this is that the radar itself only reads relative airspeed which is then modified by subtracting own airspeed for display on the DDD.

At the bottom edge of the DDD the AGC-trace is displayed indicating radar return intensity enabling the RIO to discern jamming targets by their return strength. The jamming targets are shown as jamming strobes on the TID if they exceed the set jamming threshold (set by the JAM/JET knob on the DDD).

The scale shown on the DDD (what rate region is shown) can be set by the Vc switch on the DDD panel. X-4 sets the scale to 800 knots opening to 4 000 knots closing, NORM sets the scale to 200 knots opening to 1 000 knots closing and VID sets the scale to 50 knots opening to 250 knots closing. The operating range of the doppler filters can also be configured by the ASPECT switch on the same panel, NOSE sets 600 knots opening to 1 800 knots closing, BEAM sets 1200 knots closing to 1200 knots opening and TAIL sets 1 800 knots opening to 600 knots closing. This allows the RIO to optimize the doppler filters for a known target closing speed and this affects the whole radar processing unlike the Vc switch which only affects the DDD.

Because of the way the radar operates the doppler filters it will have two blind ranges. The main lobe clutter (MLC) region which contains most of the ground returns, including those returning with zero groundspeed and is 266 knots wide, centered around own aircraft groundspeed (133 knots slower and 133 knots faster). This is the reason that the radar can be notched as a target with the same relative groundspeed as the ground will also be filtered out. This is however only true for look-down conditions as when the radar antenna looks up into the sky this filter isn’t necessary and can be turned off. If the MLC switch on the DDD panel is in AUTO the radar will automatically turn off the MLC filter if looking more than 3 degrees above the horizon. It can also be turned off manually by the RIO but if the antenna looks down this can make the displays unusable in RWS and TWS as all of the ground returns will be sent to the computer for tracking. In whichever case, with the MLC filter off, the target cannot notch the AN/AWG-9 if it is above the radar.

The second filter, and second blind spot, of the radar is the zero doppler filter. This blind area is centered around a closure rate of negative own groundspeed, meaning a target moving away from own aircraft at the same speed as own aircraft. This blind area is a hardware limitation as it is a doppler radar mode it cannot detect targets without a doppler shift. The resulting blind area is 200 knots wide, meaning that a chased target moving at a speed of within 100 knots (+/-) of own groundspeed will be invisible to the radar. This means that when chasing a fleeing target it may very well be necessary to use the pulse modes instead.

Both filters vary with azimuth as own airspeed relative to target varies with aspect. Relative airspeed from a target at 45° will be less than a target at 0° as own speed vector will be pointing away from it slightly. This is the reason for the mainlobe clutter trace presenting a curve on the DDD as the observed speed of the returning ground returns will vary with azimuth.

PD

Target groundspeed 900 knots, own airspeed 1200 knots. See table below for details, line of sight rate is the sum of target and own aircraft relative rate.

No.Look AngleLine of Sight RateTarget Heading
160°1490180°
245°1500120°
330°1428100°
40°120090°
530°67280°
645°21060°
760°-3000°

💡 Position 4 has the target in a flanking or “notching” position making it disappear inside the MLC filter or MLC ground return. In a look-up situation with the MLC filter disabled the target would still be visible.

Additionally, all pulse doppler search modes use ground stabilization exclusively and thus the STAB switch is inoperative.

Pulse Doppler Search (PD SRCH)

The pulse doppler search mode is used mainly as a kind of early warning mode. It is the search mode with the greatest detection range but it can display no range to the RIO, only closure rate. For this reason, the TID can display no track information.

Range While Search (RWS)

In range while search a frequency measuring ranging mode is added (FM ranging) to allow the radar to measure range of tracked targets in addition to closure rate. This additional processing does however mean that the effective range of the radar is somewhat lesser. The display on the DDD is the same as in pulse doppler search, the TID however also shows tracks in this mode showing the targets as tracks momentarily as they’re scanned and displaying their position and altitude. The targets are shown for a maximum of two seconds or until the antenna again scans the same bar at the same azimuth at which time it is removed unless detected again. Maximum number of concurrently shown tracks are 48.

Track While Scan (TWS)

The track while scan mode uses the same FM ranging as RWS with the same reduction in range compared to pulse doppler search and the DDD display is also the same. The main difference that the computer establishes track files and tracks up to 24 targets concurrently of which 18 can be shown on the TID at any given time.

As the computer routine calculating these tracks need a set track refresh time of 2 seconds this limits available azimuth scan area and bar settings to either 20° 4 bars or 40° 2 bars. When entering TWS the computer automatically selects the ±20° 4 bar scan disregarding the RIO set scan volumes unless those are set to ±40° 2 bars in which case that is used instead.

The TWS mode is also the only mode enabling guidance of the AIM-54 at multiple targets (up to six), and as soon as engageable targets are detected the computer starts assigning them a missile priority number according to optimal missile firing sequence.

The TWS has two sub-modes available, TWS Auto (TWS AUTO) and TWS Manual (TWS MAN), which one is used is selected by the RIO with the corresponding button on the DDD panel. What differs between the two is that in TWS auto the computer takes control of used scan volume and scan pattern azimuth and elevation as soon as target tracks are present. The WCS computer automatically tries to optimize the scan volume and direction so that tracking of the prioritized targets is maximized. If not selected before launch the WCS overrides as soon as the first AIM-54 is launched and selects TWS Auto.

In TWS the pilot is guided to the computed centroid of the tracked targets via the navigational cues and this centroid is also displayed on the TID as a small x-shaped cross.

For additional information about TWS symbology and missile guidance see TWS and TID Symbology.

Pulse Doppler Single Target Track (PD-STT)

Pulse Doppler STT

The pulse doppler STT works and looks much like the pulse STT mode. It does however have the same advantages and disadvantages compared to pulse STT as the other pulse doppler modes compared to the pulse modes. This means that while much better at tracking a target close to the ground it is however vulnerable to notching.

The DDD display for pulse doppler STT looks like pulse STT display except that the target return and antenna azimuth display is moved to the left side of the screen and a generated synthetic target marker is displayed at the correct azimuth instead. This is so that the targets range can be displayed by the synthetic target unlike the other pulse doppler modes which only shows closure rate. The other symbology on the DDD in this mode are the same as in pulse STT.

Unlike in pulse STT however the AN/AWG-9 can send missile guidance commands in pulse doppler STT enabling launch of AIM-7 and AIM-54 in pulse doppler mode. This is the mode with the greatest launch ranges for those missiles with the disadvantage, in the case of the AIM-54, of only being able to engage one target at a time.

HCU Stick in Radar Mode

When using the AN/AWG-9 radar in the different search modes it’s possible to manually use the HCU stick with radar mode selected to select a target on the DDD for STT lock.

Pressing the HCU trigger to half-action while in radar mode displays the acquisition gates on the DDD and enables the supersearch mode in the radar. In supersearch mode the antenna does a ±10° search pattern at the selected amount of bars around the acquisition gates.

The acquisition gates can then be steered over the detected position of the target with the HCU, left/right used to steer azimuth and up/down used to steer range or rate depending on if pulse or pulse doppler is used. The antenna elevation is then fine-tuned using the elevation vernier on the HCU until the target return is visible within the acquisition gates. At that time the RIO can then select full-action on the HCU trigger, commanding the radar to attempt a lockon at the commanded azimuth, range/rate and elevation.

If successfully executed the radar then transitions into the respective STT mode and the correct indicators on the DDD illuminates. Pulse STT is used if transitioning from pulse search and pulse doppler STT if transitioning from any of the pulse doppler search modes.

Transitional Modes

The transitional modes are the ones used to transition into the single target tracks from the search modes, ACM modes, via TCS or between the two STT modes.

Transition Between the Two STT Modes

If necessary it is possible to transition between pulse STT and pulse doppler STT by pressing the corresponding button. If the transition fails the radar reverts to the respective search mode of the commanded STT mode (pulse search if pulse STT was selected and vice versa).

If the RIO wishes to transition back to a search mode he commands half-action and releases it causing the radar to return to pulse search if in pulse STT and pulse doppler search if in pulse doppler STT.

If the radar loses target lock in STT and cannot reacquire it reverts to the respective search mode as when the RIO transitions manually via half-action.

VSL and MRL can also be reset and returned to search the same way but PLM being prioritized means that the only way to deselect PLM is either target lockon and transition to pulse STT or the pilot selecting the PLM button again telling the radar to return to pulse search.

TWS STT Acquisition

In TWS it is possible to attempt an STT lockon by hooking a track on the TID and then selecting either pulse STT or pulse doppler STT on the DDD panel. The WCS computer then commands the antenna in supersearch to the hooked tracks azimuth, range/rate and elevation and attempts a lockon if a target is detected.

Unlike in a manual HCU acquisition this process is completely automated but its success rate is also less than a manual transition.

ACM Modes

The AN/AWG-9 has three distinct ACM acquisition modes. Pilot lockon mode (PLM), vertical scan lockon (VSL) and manual rapid lockon (MRL).

The ACM modes are listed in priority order, the different modes overriding other modes lower in the prioritization. This means that PLM always overrides VSL and lower modes and VSL overrides PAL and lower modes but not PLM and so on.

All of the modes can be exited by the RIO selecting half-action and release on the HCU except PLM which will be in effect until the pilot releases the PLM button.

Pilot Lockon Mode (PLM)

PLM

The PLM is the ACM mode with the highest priority, it always overrides any other radar mode and is enabled when the pilot presses the PLM button on the front of the right throttle. Depression of that button commands the antenna to the armament datum line (ADL) and causes it to lock onto the first target seen out to 5 NM.

Thus the procedure to use PLM is for the pilot to fly the ADL marker on the HUD over the target and then press and hold the PLM button until lockon occurs. The PLM continues until a target is detected and transition to pulse STT occurs or the PLM button is released making the radar transition to pulse search instead.

Vertical Scan Lockon (VSL)

VSL

The VSL mode is enabled by the pilot or the RIO and is used to acquire a target at own aircraft's current heading from an elevation of -15° to +55°. The RIO can use the VSL switch on the sensor control panel in the RIO cockpit. Two sub-modes are available by placing the switch into either VSL HI (high) or VSL LO (low) and releasing it back to center. The pilot can enable VSL HI or LO by selecting UP or DN respectively on the target designate switch when not in A/G mode.

This commands the antenna to start a volume 5° wide in a circular fashion. If VSL HI is commanded the vertical area covered is from +15° to +55° and if VSL LO is commanded the area covered is from -15° to +25°. VSL is indicated on the HUD by the diamond moving with antenna line of sight indicating its current position.

When a target is detected within 5 NM the radar transitions into pulse STT, otherwise it continues in VSL until another mode is selected.

Pilot Automatic Lockon (PAL)

PAL is enabled by the pilot selecting DES on the target designate switch when not in A/G mode.

PAL commands the antenna to an 8-bar ±20° scan pattern locking onto the first target detected out to 15 NM. This mode is indicated by the diamond on the HUD following current antenna line of sight.

Manual Rapid Lockon (MRL)

MRL

The manual rapid lockon (MRL) mode allows the RIO to quickly acquire a target within the antenna limits out to 5 NM. When the MRL button on the right side of the HCU stick is depressed it commands the radar to start a one-bar supersearch pattern out to 5 NM.

The HCU stick controls the supersearch pattern in azimuth and elevation (left/right controlling azimuth and up/down controlling elevation). The DDD displays a normal supersearch pattern in 5 NM scale and additionally two tick marks are shown at the edge of the scan pattern indicating current elevation.

When the target is visible the RIO commands full-action to acquire the target and transfer to pulse STT. If only half-action is commanded after entering into MRL and then released the radar transfers back to pulse search.

AN/AXX-1 TCS

TCS U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate Airman Justin S. Osborne. (030418-N-0382O-591)

The television camera set, or TCS, was constructed as a replacement for the IRST which was present in the first F-14As produced. When the IRST was found to have insufficient capability it was decided to replace it with the TCS giving the F-14 a long range visual identification capability.

The TCS is located underneath and behind the radar radome, just in front of the nose gear well. It contains an aircraft stabilized high resolution (for its time) closed circuit television camera. The sensor has two fields of view (FOV), narrow (NFOV) which is 0.44° or 10X magnification and wide (WFOV) which is 1.42° or 4X magnification. The gimbal limits are +/- 15° except upwards which is limited to +11° and the TCS is capable of independent contrast lock or being slaved to the AN/AWG-9 radar.

The TCS is controlled by the RIO using the sensor control panel, DDD, TID and the HCU. Video from the sensor can be displayed on the TID and the VDI in the front seat. Also, the video can be recorded using the airborne video tape recorder for later review. (Not currently implemented in DCS.)

Controls

The controls for the TCS are located in the RIO cockpit at the sensor control panel, the DDD and the HCU/TID. The pilot display control panel contains a switch allowing display of TCS video on the VDI.

Sensor Control Panel

Sensor Control Panel

The controls on the sensor control panel for the TCS are; the TCS trim knobs, the SLAVE switch, the field of view, FOV, switch and the acquire, ACQ, switch.

The TCS TRIM knobs controls TCS sensor line of sight, LOS, calibration relative the AN/AWG-9 radar LOS. If needed these can be used to trim the TCS so that the two sensors LOS correlate. They have a ±2° range of motion and the easiest way to check and calibrate the TCS is to lock up a friendly target in STT and adjust the knobs until the TCS LOS is correctly aimed at the locked target.

The SLAVE switch controls which sensor is controlled by the other. If set to RDR the radar is slaved to the TCS as long as an optical track exists. If set to INDEP each sensor operates independently of the other. And if set to TCS the TCS is slaved to radar LOS as long as an STT track exists.

The FOV, field of view switch controls what FOV is used in the TCS. WIDE sets the 1.42°, 4X magnification FOV and NAR sets the narrow 0.44°, 10X magnification FOV.

Lastly the ACQ, acquire switch controls the acquisition mode in use in the TCS. AUTO SRCH enables an automatic acquisition mode with a search pattern, enabling acquisition of the closest target even if outside current FOV. MAN selects purely manual acquisition with the HCU where the target needs to be pointed at directly. AUTO sets an automatic acquisition mode without a search pattern making the TCS snap to a target as long as it’s inside the TCS FOV.

TCS Controls

The TCS TRIM knobs controls TCS calibration in azimuth (AZ) and elevation (EL). This is used to calibrate the TCS line of sight to be equal to the radar line of sight. Normally this is done by locking a target in STT, setting slave to TCS and then fine-tuning the calibration knobs until the TCS looks directly at the locked target.

The last two switches controlling the TCS are the ACQ (acquisition) and FOV (field of view) switches. The ACQ switch controls how the TCS locks onto targets. AUTO SRCH means the TCS will move by itself in a limited search pattern trying to find a target. MAN (manual) means the TCS only locks onto targets if commanded to by the HCU in TCS mode and AUTO means the TCS automatically tries to lock onto targets entering its field of view. The FOV switch sets whether the WIDE or NAR (narrow) field of view is used by the TCS.

DDD

DDD

The DDD contains two indicators pertaining to the TCS.

The DDD EL meter shows current elevation of the TCS sensor LOS as long as the IR/TV mode is selected on the HCU.

The IROT light indicates the presence of a TCS track. The IROT acronym is inherited from the IRST which the TCS replaced.

HCU/TID

HCU/TID

The HCU contains the power switch and indicator for the TCS as well as a button enabling selection for using the HCU to control the TCS while the TID itself has a control knob enabling display of the TCS video on the TID as well as a brightness and contrast control for the video on the TID.

The IR/TV power switch is located on the top left corner on the HCU panel and controls power to the TCS. OFF disables all power to the TCS. STBY enables power to the cooling fans and heaters in the TCS. IR/TV supplies power to all systems in the TCS, allow 1-2 minutes for the TCS to spin up and deliver video. TCS symbology on the TID on the other hand will be available directly. There is also no need to select the STBY position first, setting the switch to IR/TV directly works fine.

The indication light next to the power switch indicates a TCS over temperature condition is lit. If present the TCS should be powered off to prevent damage to the system.

The IR/TV button next to the HCU stick enables HCU stick control of the TCS sensor, half-action to manually control sensor LOS and full-action to command target acquisition.

On the TID display control the TID MODE switch set to TV enables display of the TCS video on the TID. Note that this disables the TID repeat on the HSD.

Finally the CONTRAST and BRIGHTNESS knobs on the upper part of the TID can be used to control the TCS video shown on the TID.

Symbology

Symbology

On the TID in non TV mode a TCS track is indicated by a 1.5” strobe at TCS LOS azimuth with a hollow circle at the end.

The symbology on the video feed from the TCS has indicators for the FOV and two crosshairs indicating TCS LOS relative own aircraft, GACH, and AN/AWG-9 radar LOS relative TCS LOS, RACH. Additionally the track window is indicated by 4 small squares representing each corner of that window.

The field of view lines are shown when in the wide FOV indicating the size of the area visible when switching to the narrow FOV. They consist of two parallel lines together creating the sides of an imaginary box indicating the narrow FOV size.

The gimbal angle crosshairs or GACH, which is a solid cross, indicate deflection of the TCS LOS from the aircraft datum line, ADL. GACH crosshair in center indicates TCS LOS along ADL and deflection towards the edges indicate deflection towards the gimbal limits with the video edges being maximum deflection.

RACH or radar angle crosshairs, a dashed crosshair, indicate radar antenna LOS when inside the current TCS FOV. When the sensors are slaved to one another RACH and GACH will coincide creating a single solid crosshair.

The track window indicates the area that the TCS contrast tracker is currently locked on to if it has acquired a target. When not in an active track these squares collapse into the center of the display being 2% of the screen width when in manual mode and 5% when in an auto mode.

TCS Operation

All acquisition modes of the TCS have in common that they can be controlled using the HCU in IR/TV mode. Selection of the IR/TV button on the HCU enables this mode and also sets the DDD EL meter (right indicator) to show current TCS sensor LOS elevation. Half-action enables the HCU to directly control the LOS of the TCS and full-action commands target acquisition using the selected acquisition mode.

For manual, MAN, TCS acquisition mode this means that the HCU must be used in half-action to position the tracking window indication over the target and then selecting full-action. If successfully acquired the track window will then expand to encompass the target and tracking will begin.

In automatic, AUTO acquisition mode half-action works the same but when selecting full-action for acquisition the TCS will instead automatically try to lock on to the target closest to the center in the current FOV. Automatic search, AUTO SRCH mode further enhances this by enabling a search pattern around the commanded FOV (by moving the sensor LOS) acquiring the first found target.

When using the TCS slave to radar option the two auto modes will automatically try to lock on to the STT target as soon as it exists and the TCS has been slewed to that target, enabling a fully automatic track of a target locked in STT. Additionally, as soon as a track is acquired from an STT lock the TCS will compare its own LOS to the radar LOS to check if the correct target has been locked, if the two LOS differ by more than a couple of degrees during a 3-second window a new acquisition will be attempted. The manual mode will also slave to radar LOS but will not lock on, instead just following the radar LOS.

To unlock a tracked target when not being slaved to radar, select half-action and release.

For information about RDR slaved to TCS check the relevant AN/AWG-9 section.

TCS Slave Radar Acquisition

The TCS can be used to track a target in angle while still using the radar for range and rate. When selecting the radar to be slaved to the TCS line of sight via the sensor control panel (SLAVE in the RDR position) the radar will still be active but pointing in the direction of the TCS line of sight while the TCS has an active track instead of scanning.

From this state it is possible to command half-action and then position the acquisition gates at the target video and then command full-action. This will result in either pulse doppler slaved or pulse slaved mode depending on previous radar mode. It is also possible to switch using the P STT and PD STT button on the DDD panel.

The resulting sub-mode entered is equivalent to an STT mode where the TCS is instead used to track the target's angle rather than the radar itself. The radar is still used to track range and rate, on the DDD the IROT lights instead of the ANT ROT, IROT relating to IR tracking which has been replaced by the TCS in the modeled F-14 versions.

This mode can be used to guide missiles, active and CW modes if in pulse and in PD if in pulse doppler. If the SLAVE switch is set to INDEP from this mode the system reverts to true pulse STT or pulse doppler STT depending on current mode.

LANTIRN

LANTIRN U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate 2nd Class Felix Garza Jr. (030325-N-4142G-009)

The LANTIRN or Low Altitude Navigation and Targeting Infrared for Night began life as combined targeting and navigation pods designed for the F-15E and F-16. When the US Navy became interested in using the F-14 Tomcat in the A/G role Martin Marietta (now Lockheed Martin) began its own program to show that the LANTIRN could quickly be adapted for F-14 use.

As the pod was adapted for the F-14 the secondary navigational pod was deleted, keeping only the targeting pod. The pod was wired up to its own control panel as the F-14 didn’t have the required 1553-bus for complete integration. The control panel was patched into the TCS to TID video feed allowing it to select either the TCS or the LANTIRN for display on the TID and VDI.

While the pod can read waypoints and selected weapon from the WCS, the pod has its own GPS receiver and is otherwise self-contained and controlled only via its own control panel. Additionally, it also has its own weapons release guidance removing the need to boresight the pod to the aircraft, a time-consuming task.

The FLIR sensor itself has three different zoom levels or fields of view (FoV). The Wide FoV limits are 5.9° and allows a maximum slew rate of 8.5°/s. The Narrow FoV limits are 1.7° and allows a maximum slew rate of 1.8°/s. The last mode, the Expanded FoV is a digital zoom of the Narrow FoV, meaning that the resolution will be worse in this mode. The FoV limits for the Expanded FoV are 0.8° with a max slew rate of 0.7°/s.

Controls and Displays

All the controls for the LANTIRN are situated on its own control panel mounted on the RIO’s left side console when the pod is present, including the switch controlling what video feed the TID and VDI display in the TV mode.

LANTIRN Video Elements

The FLIR (Forward Looking InfraRed) video-feed from the LANTIRN has superimposed data readout for the crew’s use. This video-feed can be viewed both on the TID (in TV-mode) and on the VDI (also in TV-mode) when the FLIR feed is selected on the control panel.

Amongst other things the displays show own aircraft position, target position as well as targeting cues to the crew. When using the LANTIRN for A/G attack these readouts are also used as targeting and release cues.

FLIR

Own aircraft data is shown in the upper left corner (1), showing position, altitude, groundspeed and pitch angle (dive).

On the left side (2) the pod displays whether it’s using white hot or black hot (WHOT and BHOT) as well as if the AGC (Automatic Gain Control) or MGC (Manual Gain Control) is in use.

The lower left data-block (3) shows pod information, SR is slant range (line of sight range), AZ and EL is pod line of sight azimuth and elevation relative aircraft ADL (with AZ having L or R for left or right of aircraft heading). Below that is current UTC time and then IBIT codes below that.

đź’ˇ IBIT codes are not implemented currently and the clock will show local time.

The lower middle (4) shows current pod mode (A/A or A/G) and track mode (AREA, POINT or Q designations) on the left side. The right side shows currently selected weapon and laser code while above and in the center an L is shown when the laser is armed and flashing when firing the laser.

The lower right (5) shows data for currently selected Q (slew-point) except for QSNO, QADL and QHUD, TTG being time to go until on top of currently selected Q, the rows below that, bearing and range to Q, ELEV indicating elevation in feet of Q and lastly, below that, Q location.

6 is the crosshairs showing tracked position, in this case we have a bounding box, indicating currently tracked target in point mode. The two widest zoom modes will have boxes showing the field of view for the next, narrower, mode. Additionally there’s a small white square (FLIR pointing cue) moving around showing the current pod line of sight relative to aircraft from a top down perspective. In this case it’s right next to the upside down ^, top center, indicating that the pod is looking ahead of the aircraft. If the square is centered the pod is looking straight down and below center it indicates the pod looking aft.

Finally, 7 is the steering guidance towards the selected Q, the top one being commanded heading and the vertical one on the right the bomb release cue.

The commanded heading shows current aircraft heading above the inverted ^, with the commanded heading being displayed as a relative bearing either L (Left) or R (Right) of current aircraft heading below the line. The commanded heading is also indicated by a vertical line bisecting the horizontal one.

The right, bomb release cue, is only shown if the selected Q is QDES and shows a vertical line along which a release cue travels downwards. This release cue is only visible with a valid weapon selection (bomb) and when it reaches the two tick marks, that’s the cue to release. Below the line is the indicated TREL (Time to Release) in seconds, changing to TIMP (Time to Impact) after release.

Around this all is the masking curve, indicating at what angles the pod will be masked by own aircraft (looking into the aircraft hull). This is relative to the FLIR pointing cue, when the cue moves outside the masking curve the sensor will be blocked by the hull.

Control Panel

The control panel contains all the controls for the pod, including the control stick.

Control Panel

The power switch for the LANTIRN pod is located top left (1) with OFF disabling power to the system, IMU (blocked in above image) powering only the LANTIRN IMU and POD powering the whole system.

đź’ˇ IMU selection has no current DCS function.

The MODE switch (2) switches the POD sensor between STBY (Standby) and OPER (Operational).

The LASER ARMED (3) light illuminates when the laser is armed while the LASER switch (4) arms it. (ARM and SAFE positions available.)

Down right is the VIDEO switch (5) which controls what video is fed to the TID and VDI, FLIR selecting LANTIRN FLIR video and TCS selecting TCS video.

The four grouped indicator lights (6) indicate various error states in the LANTIRN system and the IBIT button (7) initiates the IBIT (Initialized Built-In-Test).

đź’ˇ The IBIT and fault indicators are not currently implemented in DCS.

Control Stick

The control stick for the LANTIRN operates the LANTIRN’s sensor itself, note though that the stick itself does not move, the buttons and hats on the stick are used to control the pod.

Control Stick

The left four-way hat, S3, (1) allows selection of QWp- and QWp+ (left/right) in addition to Point Track (up) and Area Track (down) modes.

The center slew hat (2) is used to slew the sensor line of sight itself and depression of this hat switches between white hot (WHOT) and black hot (BHOT) sensor modes.

The right four-way hat, S4, (3) allows for selection of QADL/QHUD (up), QDES (right) and QSNO (down) in addition to declutter level which is cycled by momentary depression of the hat. The left slider additionally changes the right hat function as detailed further down.

The red button on top (4) is used to cycle between the three fields of view (zoom levels) of the IR sensor.

The two-way hat on the side (5) selects either the A/G or A/A modes of operation for the pod.

Located on the left side of the stick head is a two way slider (6), spring-loaded to return to center. This switch changes the function of the right four-way hat.

Sliding it forwards allows for selection of manual gain while releasing and sliding it forwards again re-selects automatic gain. Change of the manual gain with manual gain already selected can be done by sliding the switch forwards and holding it for 2 seconds. With this mode active up/down on the right hat increases and decreases the gain while left/right decreases and increases level.

Sliding the switch aft momentarily allows selection of used laser code, while sliding it aft and holding allows for focus control. When set to laser code change, the right four-way hat selects digit to change with left/right and increases and decreases the selected digit with up/down. In focus control up/down increases and decreases focus.

Located on the front of the stick (7) is a two-stage trigger, first detent manually lasing while the second detent fires the laser and designates QDES at current sensor position.

Lastly on the front side of the stick (8) is the latched laser fire button. Selecting it fires the laser for 60 seconds which can be overridden by the pressing and releasing the first trigger detent. A renewed press on the laser latch button resets the latched laser fire timer to 60 seconds, beginning a new 60 second countdown.

Startup

To start the LANTIRN from cold, set the power switch to POD. This will start the LANTIRN power-up sequence which takes 8 minutes. When ready, this will be indicated by the MODE switch showing STBY.

When at STBY, depression of the MODE button switches the system to OPER (Operational), enabling the LANTIRN sensor after a 30-second initialization.

Lastly, to allow display of LANTIRN FLIR video, select FLIR on the VIDEO switch.

Modes

Sensor Modes and Operation

The LANTIRN has two "master" modes, A/A and A/G. Both work similarly but are optimized for different types of targets. Additionally, the A/G mode allows for bomb release guidance.

The pod has two main ways of controlling the sensor line of sight, either via contrast lock (image following) or via being slaved to a Q designation.

The Area and Point Track modes are the two contrast lock modes in which the LANTIRN locks onto contrast differences in the LANTIRN FLIR video itself. This in itself only allows for angle tracking which gives imprecise ranging using own aircraft position and pod line of sight to calculate target position. It does however allow the system to track moving targets.

The last tracking mode has the sensor slewed to a stored location/direction, called a Q. The directional Qs do not allow for guidance to a location while the location Qs do.

QSNO and QADL/QHUD are directional. QSNO slaves the sensor to the ground 15 NM directly in front of the aircraft along own aircraft heading. QADL and QHUD slave the sensor to either ADL (in A/A) or the aircraft wings symbol on the HUD (in A/G).

The location Qs have two sources, QWp- and QWp+ on the stick’s left hat can be used to cycle through the WCS waypoints, allowing the RIO to slew to the different waypoints for navigation and target localization.

The other source is via pod designation. By selecting the second detent on the LANTIRN trigger the current sensor track or location is lased and a new location stored using that data. This is called the QDES and is used to designate targets for engagement as well as allowing the RIO to select a new location for navigational reference on the fly. The QDES can not however be automatically transferred to the WCS, but the RIO can enter it manually using the target location information in the pod video feed.

The lower right data-block is enabled for the location Qs only but will remain even when the pod is slewed away in area or point track modes. As soon as another Q is selected however, it will update to that location instead or be removed if a directional Q is selected.

A/G Target Engagement and Designation

The LANTIRN steering cues for ground target engagement are automatically enabled when the LANTIRN is slewed to QDES or a new QDES is designated. The QDES itself will remain even if a new Q is selected and as long as it exists, the steering cues will point towards QDES even if slewed to another point. This is important to keep in mind as it is easy to think that the steering commands are to the current sensor location instead of the QDES.

The laser designation itself can however point to a different location than the QDES as the laser always points to the current track. This can be used to quickly change back to a target marked by the QDES if desired and when lasing a moving target a QDES should be set at an estimated target location at impact (estimated manually) and then the point track mode or manual slew can be used to designate the actual target more precisely.

To change laser code, move the stick left side slider aft and release, this will change right hat (S4) into laser code mode. The currently selected digit will blink and the S4 hat can then be used to set the digits. Left/right change what digit to set and up/down change the value of the digit. Renewed selection of aft on the left slider will then exit the laser code mode.

If the right, S4, hat is depressed while in laser mode the automatic lase mode will be enabled, indicated by the M (for manual) left of the digits changing to an A (auto-lase). Repeat to switch back to manual mode. While activated, the auto-lase mode will begin firing the laser at 10 seconds TIMP until TIMP zero +4 seconds.

The bomb release cue is only visible with a valid weapon (bomb) selected and the selected bomb is read from the weapon selector wheel on the RIO armament panel via the WCS. The actual bomb release can be accomplished using the computer pilot or computer target modes but the manual mode is recommended. In manual mode the pilot follows the cues in the LANTIRN video feed on the VDI and releases the bomb when cued by the LANTIRN.

Defensive Systems

The Tomcat can equip either the ALE-39 or the LAU-138 in order to defend itself against threats by dispensing chaff or flares.

Also installed on the aircraft is either the ALR-67 or ALR-45/50 Radar Warning Receiver to increase passive situational awareness by detecting airborne and surface-to-air radar threats.

For extended protection and radar jamming it can also carry the ECM Pods.

Defensive

Countermeasures

In order to defend against incoming missile threats the Tomcat can be equipped with either the ALE-39 or LAU-138 countermeasure dispensing system launching chaff and flares.

CMS

AN/ALE-39 Countermeasures Dispensing Set

The AN/ALE-39 is the countermeasures dispensing set installed in the F-14 in this simulation. It controls its own set of launchers located between the engine nozzles on the underside of the so called beaver-tail.

The launchers each have two sections, one containing 10 cartridges and the other 20. They are referred to the left and right dispensers even though the left is really the front one and the right the back one with both being mounted in line on the left side of the tail-hook. This is a remnant from the earliest model F-14s carrying the AN/ALE-29.

This all sums up to a capacity of 60 cartridges in the system with each section necessarily holding one type of cartridge meaning that any combination of cartridges is possible as long as each type’s quantity is a multiple of 10. The system itself has no real knowledge of what is loaded where so incorrectly programming the system can lead to the wrong type of cartridge being ejected.

The system itself can be operated manually from the control panel in the RIO pit or the DLC thumbwheel on the pilot stick when the flaps lever is in the up position. It is also capable of running programmed sequences of ejection which in turn can be initiated manually by the RIO from the control panel or the direction hats mounted on the hand hold over the DDD. In addition the AN/ALR-67 can also initiate the chaff ejection program if set up correctly on the AN/ALE-39 control panel.

Controls and Operation

đź’ˇ In DCS the F-14 countermeasure loadout is set in the Mission Editor, see DCS Mission Editor Functions Specific to the HB DCS F-14 or controlled through the radio menu under ground crew. The default setting in the mission editor is bypassed. To see the real loadout check the kneeboard.

Programmer

Programmer

The programmer is used to set up what countermeasure cartridges are loaded where and to set up the different ejection programmes. The panel is located on the right horizontal console of the RIO cockpit.

The left side of the programmer holds the controls (thumbwheels) for the different ejection programmes, one section for each type of cartridge.

The CHAFF section controls how to eject chaff in program mode. The chaff sequences are programmed to launch a number of salvoes, each consisting of a burst of a set amount of cartridges.

  • B QTY controls how many cartridges to eject in each burst, selection of 1-4 cartridges and C for continuous and R for random (4-6 cartridges) possible.
  • B INTV sets the time in seconds between each individual cartridge ejection in each burst, possible settings being .1 (0.125), .2 (0.25), .5 (0.5), .7 (0.75), 1 and R for random.
  • S QTY controls how many salvoes of bursts to eject in each program, settings available are 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 and 15.
  • S INT sets the time in seconds between each salvo in the program, available settings are 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10.

When using the random and continuous settings for B special conditions apply.

  • B at C QTY and R INTV sets the first 3 cartridges to launch at 0.125 second intervals, the rest at random intervals from 0.25 to 4 seconds. Ejection disregards the S settings and continue until all cartridges are ejected.
  • B at R QTY and R INTV sets each burst to have between 4-6 cartridges and to eject at random intervals between 0.25 to 4 seconds. The first burst in a salvo will always launch the first 3 cartridges at 0.125 second intervals.
  • B at R QTY and INTV at set number sets each burst to launch between 4-6 cartridges at set interval. First burst will always launch first 3 cartridges at 0.125 sec interval.
  • B at fixed QTY and R INTV sets each burst to eject one cartridge disregarding B QTY.

The JAMMER section controls the ejection of jammer cartridges in programmed mode.

  • QTY sets how many jammer cartridges to eject, possible settings are 1-4.
  • INTV uses all three indicated thumbwheels to set time in seconds between each ejection in the program. Settings from 1 to 299 possible in 1 second increments.

đź’ˇ Jammer cartridges not currently implemented in DCS.

The FLARE section controls ejection of flares when using programmed mode.

  • QTY sets amount of flare cartridges to eject, possible settings being 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 and 10.
  • INTV sets time interval between each ejection in seconds, possible settings being 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10.

The right side of the programmer sets the type of cartridge loaded into each section and the reset switch used after loading new cartridges.

The L10, L20, R10 and R20 thumbwheels can be set to C, J or F setting what cartridge is loaded into which section.

đź’ˇ Incorrectly setting type of cartridge loaded can result in the launch of the wrong type of cartridge.

The RESET switch needs to be used to reset the system's internal counters after loading new cartridges into the launchers. Needs to be held to reset for at least 5 seconds to reset the system.

Control Panel

Controller

The control panel is used to control system power, to set up automatic ejections and to manually eject cartridges and is also located on the RIO right horizontal console.

The mechanical counters on the upper part of the panel are used to indicate remaining cartridges of each type. They need to be set up manually using the knob below each counter but decreases automatically as each cartridge ejection pulse is sent. As they’re set manually it’s possible to end up in a situation were the counter is at 0 but additional cartridges are still available. In this cases ejection pulses will still be sent but the counter will remain at 0.

Below each counter each cartridge type has a switch for manual ejection commands. The switches are momentary and spring-loaded to center, each having three positions. PRGM initiates respective set ejection program, SGL commands ejection of a single cartridge of respective type and STBY is the default center position not commanding manual ejection.

The PWR/MODE switch enables power to the AN/ALE-39 and can enable automatic chaff launch via the AN/ALR-67 RWR. AUTO (CHAFF) / MAN enables power to the system and allows the AN/ALR-67 to initiate the set chaff ejection program but flares remain in manual. Chaff ejection is initiated when the RWR detects a threat actively engaging own aircraft, after each program initiation a 30 second cool-down is present before next program is initiated if such a detection is still present. Manual ejection is still available as normal. MAN enables power to the system and allows for manual initiation of all functions. OFF disables the system.

The FLARE MODE switch controls how flares are ejected and also sets up how the pilot stick DLC button is used. The flaps lever needs to be in the up position to enable DLC button cartridge ejection. The switch has three positions. MULT, multiple, sets the system to eject one cartridge from each section set to flares on the programmer for each ejection pulse.

đź’ˇ That this means that if flares are loaded on all four sections this results in 4 flares being launched each time a flare ejection command is sent.

NORM sets normal flare ejection pulse behavior. PILOT enables ejection of one flare cartridge with each depression of the DLC button. Normal flare ejection still possible. If the switch is set a position other than PILOT the DLC button will command ejection of a single chaff cartridge.

Finally the SALVO FLARES switch initiates rapid ejection of all flares using a 0.125 second time interval. Normally spring-loaded to the OFF position. Can’t be stopped once initiated.

đź”´ WARNING: All countermeasure cartridge ejection is inhibited while the weight on wheels sensor is active, preventing countermeasure ejection while on the ground.

RIO Hand Hold Switches

CM Hats

Two four-way direction hats are mounted on the RIO hand hold above the DDD to enable quick access to countermeasure ejection. The two switches are mirrored and UP commands ejection of a single chaff cartridge. DOWN initiates the chaff ejection program, INBOARD (towards center) initiates the jammer ejection program and OUTBOARD (towards the sides) initiates the flare ejection program.

LAU-138

The LAU-138 chaff dispenser was developed to meet the need for additional chaff cartridge payload capacity. The launcher itself was developed in Sweden by CelsiusTech as a chaff dispenser integrated into a rail designed to replace the LAU-7 Sidewinder rail. Each rail holds up to 160 chaff packages, each being smaller than a normal chaff cartridge while still enabling the mounting of a single AIM-9 Sidewinder to itself.

On the F-14 the LAU-138 was used mounted on the 1A and 8A stations. While technically able to be mounted on the respective B stations as well, it wasn’t possible to refill the launcher while mounted there so wasn’t used there operationally.

While having the LAU-138s mounted, the R10 and R20 sections in the launcher are both connected to the R20 section and the R10 connected to the LAU-138s. This means that the R20 section type setting on the programmer controls both R10 and R20 and the R10 section type setting should always be set to C for chaff.

Each launcher holds, as mentioned, 160 chaff packages and each ejection impulse ejects four packages from each launcher, each package being about 1/4 the size of a normal chaff cartridge. This results in that each ejection impulse ejects the equivalent of two chaff cartridges in total and that a total of 40 ejections are available from the launchers.

As the launchers use the R10 section of the programmer, mounting two LAU-138s results means that the counter for chaff on the controller should be increased by 40. A chaff only loadout can result in the number of launches available to be in total 100, which is too much for the counter, and that the counter will effectively show one chaff ejection less than what’s really available. The last ejection will still work though.

In summary, this means that when using the LAU-138 an additional 40 chaff ejections are available increasing the total number to anywhere from 100 chaff to 40 chaff and 60 flares when combined with the normal AN/ALE-39 loadout and that the R10 section should always be set to C for chaff when mounted.

Radar Warning Receiver

Two sets of Radar Warning Receivers are available for the Tomcat. The ALR-45/50 and the later ALR-67.

They are capable of passively detect radar threats, increasing situational awareness of the crew.

Flying

AN/ALR-67 RWR

The AN/ALR-67 radar warning receiver (RWR) is designed to inform and alert the F-14 crew about radar emitters in their general area. It’s also designed to help the crew defend themselves from hostile threats by indicate radar TRKing and engagement by radar guided weapons.

The AN/ALR-67 was integrated in the F-14 to replace the ageing AN/ALR-45 and AN/ALR-50, at first for the F-14B and later on for parts of the F-14A fleet. Until the advent of the PMDIG upgrade the AN/ALR-67 used its own stand-alone display system only. The RWR is however connected to the AN/ALQ-126 allowing it to send info on threat emitters to the jammer and also display jammed targets on its own display. It can also trigger preprogrammed countermeasure programs set up in the AN/ALE-39 system.

On later F-14B aircraft incorporating the PTID upgrade the AN/ALR-67 was also integrated into the MDIG displays system, allowing for a more detailed threat display on the ECMD.

The AN/ALR-67 on the F-14B has four small spiral high-band antennas, four wide-band high-band quadrant receivers and a low-band array. Connected to these antennas is a narrow-band superheterodyne receiver analyzing the received signals and indicating emitters and threats to both pilot and RIO using two displays, one at each seat and by audio signals played to the ICS of both

Controls

Control Panel

The AN/ALR-67 RWR is controlled by a control panel on the RIO right side horizontal panel.

The PWR (power) switch control power to the RWR and should be set to ON to operate the system.

The VOL (volume) control knob sets RIO audio level for the RWR sound indications. The pilot has a corresponding control on his Volume/TACAN command panel.

The TEST switch has two selectable modes and is spring-loaded to center when not held. Momentary selection of the BIT position initiates the AN/ALR-67 built in test and if the switch is held in the SPL (special) position while on the first BIT page displays the special BIT status page as long as it’s held in that position.

The MODE switch also has two selectable modes used while held in the respective position, spring-loaded to return to center when not held. When not activated enables normal operational mode, OFST enables the offset mode when held and LMT the limit mode when held. The offset mode is indicated by an O in the status ring on the display and separates overlapping threat symbols sacrificing azimuth accuracy to instead show all threats clearly. The limit mode is indicated by an L in the status ring on the display and limits the display to only show the threat symbols of the six highest prioritized threats.

The DISPLAY TYPE selector sets what threat display priority to use on the RWR displays.

  • NORM - Normal is indicated by a N in the status ring on the display and shows threat symbology according to the loaded threat library.
  • AI - Airborne interceptor is indicated by an I in the status ring on the display and prioritizes all airborne interceptor threats above all other threats.
  • AAA - Anti-aircraft artillery is indicated by an A in the status ring on the display and prioritizes all anti-aircraft artillery threats above all other threats.
  • UNK - Unknown is indicated by a U in the status ring on the display and prioritizes all unknown threats above all other threats.
  • FRIEND - Friendly is indicated by an F in the status ring on the display and allows for the same prioritization as in normal but also displays known friendly emitters.

Displays

Display

The RWR display is identical at both positions in the cockpit and uses three bands (circles) on the display to indicate the threat level of the displayed threat symbols.

  • Outermost, critical band: Displays threat symbols belonging to emitters representing an imminent threat to own aircraft, either a locked-on TRKing radar or a radar detected to be actively engaging own aircraft. A threat symbol belonging to a TRK detected as actively engaging own aircraft is enhanced by flashing its symbol.
  • Middle, lethal band: Displays threat symbols belonging to emitters representing threat systems deemed within lethal range of own aircraft but not actively TRKing or engaging it.
  • Inner, non-lethal band: Displays threat symbols belonging to emitters not representing a system capable of engaging own aircraft or systems capable of but not deemed within range to engage it.
  • System status circle: Indicates various system modes in use or the presence of failures. The upper left quadrant displays what display type is set (N, I, A, U, or F), the upper right quadrant showing an L if limited display mode is used, and the lower half indicating either the use of the offset display mode by indicating an O, the presence of a BIT failure by showing B, or that the system is thermally overloaded (too warm) by showing a T.
  • Display intensity knob: On the lower right side, it controls display intensity on the display it’s attached to.

💡 The ordering of the three threat bands has changed at least once since the introduction of the AN/ALR-67, and as the modeled AN/ALR-67 represents one of the earlier versions we’ve chosen the present order.

Warning Lights

PilotRIO
Pilot CautionRIO Caution

The two crewmembers have warning lights dedicated to specific threats on their front cockpit panels. The pilot warning lights are situated on the right side of the HUD and the RIO warning lights on the right side of the TID. The RIO warning light panel also contains lights for the AN/ALQ-126 and the IFF transponder, those are detailed under their respective section.

The different lights illuminate to indicate the presence of a certain type of threat in the critical band of the RWR and when an active engagement is detected the corresponding light starts flashing. The categories present are SAM (surface-to-air missile), AAA (anti-air artillery), AI (airborne interceptor), and (only in the RIO pit) CW (continuous wave).

Threat Indication Alert Tones

The AN/ALR-67 uses four distinct audio tones to indicate threats and status changes of those threats.

A single short tone is used to indicate the presence of a new emitter or when a threat is moved to another threat band.

A slow warbling, alternating tone is used to indicate the presence of a threat in the critical band.

A fast warbling, alternating tone is used to indicate that a threat is actively engaging own aircraft.

A special four tone audio signal, pitch decreasing with each tone, is used to indicate a special event as programmed by the threat library. In the Heatblur DCS F-14 this represents a new threat tied to a system capable of silently engaging own aircraft, i.e. it can engage own aircraft without causing it’s threat symbol to move to the critical band and thus no additional audio warning tones. This capability is either because of that the launching aircraft is capable of launching missiles in a TWS mode or that a launching SAM system can guide missiles by other means than radar and thus not giving further warning of an active engagement.

BIT

The AN/ALR-67 BIT cycles between different test screens testing the screen, symbology and threat indication tones as well as displaying system revision and threat library information.

The first page displayed shows system and threat library revision and the following screens test the symbol generation of the displays.

The threat indication tones are also tested during the bit, first page tests the status change tone, second page the special tone, third page the threat in critical band tone and the fourth the fast warbling active threat tone.

During the tests the threat warning lights also illuminate for both the pilot and the RIO.

Threat SymbolPlatform/SensorSpecial Tone
Ships
ABArleigh Burke class destroyer
AKAdmiral Kuznetsov class aircraft carrier
GRGrisha 5 class corvette (Albatros)
HPOliver Hazard Perry class frigate
J2Jiangkai II class frigate (Type 054A)
KKKrivak 3 class frigate (Rezky)
KVKirov class battlecruiser (Pyotr Velikiy)
L1Luyang I class destroyer (Type 052B)
L2Luyang II class destroyer (Type 052C)
LCLa Combattante IIa class fast attack craft
NShips only carrying a navigational radar (civilian ships, submarines)
NENeustrashimy class frigate
NZNimitz class aircraft carrier
SVSlava class cruiser (Moscow)
TCTiconderoga class cruiser
TTTarantul 3 class corvette (Molniya)
TWTarawa class amphibious assault ship
YUYuzhao class amphibious transport dock (Type 071)
Aircraft
14F-14A/BYes
15F-15C/EYes
16F-16CYes
17JF-17Yes
18F/A-18CYes
19MiG-19
21MiG-21bis
23MiG-23MLD
24Su-24M/MR
25MiG-25PD
29Su-27, Su-33, MiG-29A/G/S, and J-11AYes
30Su-30Yes
31MiG-31
34Su-34Yes
37AJS-37
39Su-25TM (Su-39)Yes
50A-50
52B-52
ANAN-26B and AN-30M
APAH-64D
B1B-1B
BETu-95 and Tu-142M
BFTu-22M3
BJTu-160
E2E-2D
E3E-3C
F4F-4E
F5F-5E
HXKa-27
ILIL-76MD and IL-78M
KCKC-135
KJKJ-2000
M2Mirage 2000-C and 2000-5Yes
S3S-3B
SHSH-60B
TOTornado
TRC-130 and C-17A
Air Defense
2SA-2 Guideline Fan Song track radar (S-75)
3SA-3 Goa Low Blow track radar (S-125)
5SA-5 Gammon Square Pair track radar
6SA-6 Gainful Straight Flush track radar (Kub)
7HQ-7 track radar
8SA-8 Gecko search and track radar (Osa)
10SA-10 Grumble Flap Lid track radar (S-300PS 30N6)
11SA-11 Gadfly Fire Dome track radar (Buk)
15SA-15 Gauntlet Scrum Half search and track radar (Tor 9A331)
19SA-19 Grison Hot Shot search and track radar (Tunguska 2C6M)Yes
AGepard, M163 Vulcan, and ZSU-23-4 Shilka track radars
BBSA-10 Grumble Big Bird search radar (S-300PS 64H6E)
BFRapier Blindfire track radar
CSSA-10 Grumble Clam Shell search radar (S-300PS 5N66M)
DESborka (Dog Ear) search radar
FFSA-2, SA-3, and SA-5 Flat Face search radar (S-125 P-19)
GRRoland MPDR-3002 S search radar
HAHawk AN/MPQ-50 and AN/MPQ-55 search radars
HKHawk AN/MPQ-46 track radar
HQHQ-7 search radar
NSNASAMS AN/MPQ-64 Sentinel search radarYes
PTPatriot AN/MPQ-53 search radar
RORoland MPDR-16 search radar and Domino 30 track radar
RPRapier Dagger search radar
S1L13 and 55G6 early warning search radars
SDSA-11 Gadfly Snow Drift search radar (Buk)
TSSA-5 Gammon Tin Shield search radar
Missiles
MAIM-54, AIM-120, MICA-EM, R-37, R-77, and SD-10
ATC (Air Traffic Control)
TAirport ATC Radar

đź’ˇ Aircraft only flown by own faction in a mission are automatically set as friendly and shown only when setting the DISPLAY TYPE selector to FRIEND. N are shown only in UNK and T only in FRIEND.

Ships symbology is enhanced by being enclosed by an enlarged U symbol.

ALR-45/50 (F-14A Early)

The AN/ALR-45 and AN/ALR-50 combination was introduced during the early 70s as a response to the increasingly lethal SAM and AAA systems introduced during that era. It's purpose is to inform the crew about threats and help them defend against them by indicating reception of threat emissions and when they pose a threat to the aircraft. Similarly to ALR-67 it's working in cooperation with DECM jammer (ALQ-100).

The AN/ALR-45 has four quadrant receiver antennas located on the front sides of the engine intakes as well as the trailing outer edges of the stabilators to provide a 360 degree coverage of the aircraft. It provides a general ECM situational awareness as well as indicating emitters locking onto and attacking the aircraft.

The AN/ALR-50 is a dedicated missile warning system and has one upper antenna located aft of the cockpit and another lower antenna located on one of the nose gear doors. The purpose of the AN/ALR-50 is to detect and warn about possible missile launches. It can identify MA (missile alert) and ML (missile launch) conditions for some of the radars which use missile command-link signals. (Currently in DCS the MA should be interpreted as lock and ML as launch)

Both systems are used as a combined set and can be used to trigger countermeasure program release from the AN/ALE-39 as well as triggering the DECM into transmission.

The system displays threats on the pilot HSD and the RIO ECMD when they are set to ECM. Via the display controls the ECM can be allowed to override the current display if a threat is detected.

Controls

Control Panel

The main ECM control panel for the AN/ALR-45 and AN/ALR-50 is located on the RIO's right horizontal console. The power switch for both system is located on the right side of this control panel and is labeled PWR - ALR-45/50 (5).

The three three-position switches (1, 2 and 3) on the top control the three operating bands of the AN/ALR-45 allowing exclusive display of that band or removal of that band from the displays. The upper position, BYPASS, is momentary and holding the switch to that position allows all signals in that band through regardless of their parameters, normally only those matching threats are passed through. Holding a band to BYPASS removes the other two band from the display completely though which is why the switch is automatically returned to NORM when released. The NORM position allows for normal operation of that band. The lower position, DEFEAT, is locked out and the switch need to be lifted to allow movement to this position. The DEFEAT position completely disables the selected band.

The middle volume knob, 4, controls the audio levels of the AN/ALR-45 and AN/ALR-50 in the RIO's headset. The outside part of the knob controls audio from the AN/ALR-45 and can be turned off if needed. The inside part controls audio from the AN/ALR-50 can't be completely turned off as it controls the MA/ML tones.

The AAA switch (10) enables or disables display of strobes relating to AAA threats, the threat acronym and indicator lights still function. NORM allows normal operation and display of AAA threats and DEFEAT disables the strobes.

The UNKNOWN switch (6) disables display of normal threats and display all unknown signals not identified as normal threats as solid strobes, the UNK acronym will be display whenever there are any present. The DISPLAY position allows this display and is momentary and needs to be held and the OFF position allows normal AN/ALR-45 operation.

The three test switches (7, 8 and 9) are all spring-loaded to center and allows for activation of BIT for the selected band or system. The TEST - LOW/OFF/MID switch enables BIT of the AN/ALR-45 LOW and MID band. The LOW position should result in a dotted strobe in each quadrant as well as audio and associated warning lights and acronyms for AAA and SAM LOW. The MID position should result in a dot-dash strobe in each quadrant as well as audio and associated warning lights and acronyms for AAA/AI and SAM MID. The TEST - ML/OFF switch enables BIT of the AN/ALR-50 in the ML position and should result in flashing SAM lights and range rings on the display as well as associated audio tones. The TEST - HIGH/OFF switch enables BIT of the AN/ALR-45 high band in the HIGH band and should result in a dashed strobe in each of the four quadrants on the display as well as audio and associated warning lights and acronyms for AI and SAM HIGH.

Display

The ECM DISPLAY control panel is also located on the RIO's right horizontal console. It controls the RIO's ECMD display as well as generic display settings for both displays.

The ECM - CORR switch (1) allows setting how the two systems correlate their threats. It is spring-loaded back to ML. The MA/ML position is a momentary position and allows the RIO to correlate AN/ALR-50 threats with a MA or ML condition to a AN/ALR-45 threats. The ML position, which is the normal switch position, sets the ECM to only correlate a AN/ALR-50 threats to an AN/ALR-45 threats if a ML condition occurs. The OFF position defeats (disables) the correlation momentarily allowing for normal uncorrelated threat display.

The ECM - ORIDE switch (2) controls when the ECM can override the NAV display on the ECMD. The ML position allows override if a ML condition occurs. The ML/AI position allows override if a ML condition occurs or an AI (Airborne Intercept, i.e. fighter radar) is detected. The OFF position disables override.

The MODE switch (3) selects which system to display on the ECMD. ECM displays the ECM and NAV displays NAV.

The DATA/ADF switch (4) controls what additional text information to display in the NAV mode. BOTH displays ADF and general navigation information, DATA displays only the general navigation information and OFF disables all extra text.

The switch controlling display of ECM information to the pilot is located on the Displays Control Panel and the volume controls are located on the Volume/TACAN Command Panel.

Displays

General Strobes

Warning Lights

PilotRIO
Pilot CautionRIO Caution

The two crewmembers have warning lights dedicated to specific threats on their front cockpit panels. The pilot warning lights are situated on the right side of the HUD and the RIO warning lights on the right side of the TID. The RIO warning light panel also contains lights for the AN/ALQ-100 and the IFF transponder, those are detailed under their respective section.

The different lights illuminate to indicate the presence of a certain type of threat.

Threat Indication Alert Tones

There are 3 types of sound produced by ALR-45/50:

  • ALR-45 Threat radar caution - depends on radar
  • ALR-50 MA (missile alert) tone - low frequency warble
  • ALR-50 ML (missile launch) tone - high frequency warble

Electronic Countermeasures - AN/ALQ-100 & 126 DECM (Defensive Electronic CounterMeasures)

The AN/ALQ-100 and 126 jammers are designed to detect radar threats, analyze them, select the optimum countermeasure technique available and apply it. Available techniques for jamming are amongst others, mainlobe blanking, inverse con-scan, range-gate pull-off and swept square modes.

In real life these two systems differ greatly with the AN/ALR-126 being by far the most effective system. In DCS both are modelled as a simple noise jammers due to engine limitations but controlled by the DECM logic as to when it’s on or off and thus work the same.

DECM Controls and Indicators

Control Panel

The controls for the DECM are all located on the right horizontal panel in the RIO pit, panel as image above. In addition there are two indication lights co-located with the RWR threat indicators on the right side of the TID.

The two indication lights on the threat advisory are RCV (recieve) and XMIT (transmit). RCV illuminates up when the system detects and analyzes a threat while the XMIT illuminates up when it's actively jamming a threat.

The control panel itself contains a STANDBY indicator light, a mode selector knob and an AUDIO volume knob.

The STANDBY light indicates that system warmup is not yet completed and when completed turns off. At other times, illumination of this indicator indicates the presence of a fault in the system.

The AUDIO (volume) knob controls the audio volume of the RIO sound from the system. The pilot has no access to this audio unless he put his amplifier selector to EMER (to use RIO amplifier). The audio itself is generated based on radar signal characteristics (mainly PRF).

The mode selector knob controls power and operational mode that the system is in.

  • OFF turns off power to the system. STBY begins pre-warming of the system, taking in all around 5 minutes.
  • TEST - HOLD 3 SEC is used to prepare the system for BIT, after 3 seconds in this mode, turn the knob to TEST - ACT.
  • TEST - ACT starts the BIT in the system. The BIT takes approximately 30 seconds and the RCV light will be illuminated the whole time while the XMIT light will flash twice. If the STANDBY light illuminates it indicates that a no-go condition exists in the system.
  • REC enables the system in recieve only mode, enabling analysis of threats and also the threat audio.
  • RPT enables full system functionality, in addition to REC it also now tries to jam threats according to selected method.

đź’ˇ In DCS jamming is always done with noise jamming, turning on as a threat is detected.

Emergency

Fire Detection and Suppression System

Fire Detection System

The fire detection system in the F-14 has two fire sensing loops, one in each engine.

If these loops detects a temperature over 600 °F (about 316 °C) along its whole length or 1,000 °F (about 538 °C) in a single 6-inch section it triggers the fire detection circuits. The left detection loop illuminates the left fire warning light on the ACM panel and the right detection loop illuminates the right fire warning light, see Air Combat Maneuver Panel.

In addition there are also sensors designed to detect hot air leaks in the engines and illuminate the BLEED DUCT caution light on the pilot caution - advisory indicator (see Caution - Advisory Indicator) if temperatures above 575 °F (about 302 °C) are detected.

LeftRight
left1right1

The fire suppression system in the F-14 contains two bottles filled with a fire suppression agent capable of being discharged into one engine selected by the pilot. Though the system contains two bottles, both are discharged at the same time making the system a one-shot system, capable of extinguishing only one engine.

As the effectiveness of the agent depends on it remaining in the engine until the fire is out the effectiveness is greater at lower airspeed as it takes longer for the agent to be blown clear of the engine. The agent itself is a low toxicity agent, designed to do as little damage to the engine as possible while still being an effective fire suppressant.

To activate the system the pilot pulls the FUEL SHUT OFF handle (pictured above) corresponding to the alight engine and pushes the fire extinguisher button behind that handle. The pull-out of the handle shuts off the fuel to the connected engine and the button behind it releases the fire suppression agent into that engine.

Two advisory lights are connected to this system, each one indicating low pressure in one of the fire suppression agent bottles. The ENG FIRE EXT indicates low pressure in the main bottle and the AUX FIRE EXT the same in the auxiliary bottle. Both are located on the pilot caution - advisory indicator, see Caution - Advisory Indicator.

The advisory lights will both illuminate after a successful application of the system and will also indicate if an error drains the pressure in the bottles.

Fire Detection and Suppression System Test

Both systems can be tested by selection of the FIRE DET/EXT position on the master test panel switch. (See Master Test Panel.) This will illuminate both fire warning lights on the ACM panel if their respective loop is functional and the GO light on the master test panel will illuminate if the suppression system is functional. If the NO GO or no lights illuminate there’s a problem in either the suppression system or the test circuitry.

Ejection System

The F-14 Tomcat is equipped with dual Martin-Baker GRU-7A rocket-assisted ejection seats, one for the pilot, one for the RIO. The ejection system is a zero/zero system, capable of successfully ejecting the crewmembers at zero airspeed, stationary, on the ground.

As the F-14 is a two seat aircraft it has additional controls apart from the ejection handles and arming systems, namely the ejection command lever. This lever, which is located in the RIO cockpit, selects if the RIO ejects the pilot as well when he ejects.

The lever is situated beside the sensor control panel, see Eject Command Lever. When set to PILOT, the pilot ejects both crewmembers, while the RIO ejects only himself. When set to MCO both crewmembers eject both crewmembers.

The system does not allow pilot-only ejection because it would be undesirable for the RIO to remain in the aircraft alone.

The pilot has indication of what position the ejection command lever is at on the Landing Gear Control Panel, the EJECT CMD flip-flop indicator showing PILOT when the lever is in pilot and MCO when in MCO.

If the canopy does not jettison when initiating the ejection sequence it’s possible to manually jettison it using the Canopy Jettison Handle in the pilot cockpit or the Canopy Jettison Handle in the RIO cockpit. If the canopy inhibited ejection after ejection initiation, jettisoning the canopy will most likely restart it. If ejection is needed during a flat spin, it’s also recommended to manually jettison the canopy and allow it to clear before initiating the ejection sequence as the canopy might need longer to clear during a flat spin.

Jettison System

The Jettison system has four modes of operation: emergency, ACM, selective, and auxiliary.

Emergency Jettison

The emergency jettison is selected via the EMERG STORES JETT on the Landing Gear Control Panel. Selection causes the EMERG JETT caution light to illuminate on the pilot Caution - Advisory Indicator.

The emergency jettison requires only no weight on wheels indicated (no master arm) and ejects all stores except for Sidewinders.

ACM Jettison

The ACM jettison is selected via the ACM JETT button under the ACM cover/switch on the Air Combat Maneuver Panel.

The ACM jettison, like the emergency jettison, requires no master arm but instead requires that the landing gear lever is up. Unlike the emergency jettison the ACM jettison only ejects those stations selected by the RIO on the Armament Panel (set to SEL or B for stations 1 and 8).

Selective Jettison

The selective jettison is set and executed by the RIO on the Armament Panel. This mode of jettisoning requires the landing gear handle to be in the up position and the master arm to be on.

The procedure for jettison in selective mode is to set the desired station switches to SEL and hold the SEL JETT switch to JETT.

Auxiliary Jettison

The auxiliary jettison mode is a backup mode to use when the other modes have failed. Like the selective jettison mode it requires the landing gear handle to be up and the master arm to be on.

This mode can only eject air-to-ground stores and ejects them by actuating the normal release hooks. This means that the aircraft needs to fly straight and level as the stores are not ejected forcefully but instead just released and cleared using gravity.

đź’ˇ No jettison mode can jettison ITERs or stores loaded on those, they need to be dropped like normal, with or without the fuzes armed.

Weapons & Stores

The F-14's effectiveness is not only attributed to its advanced avionics and airframe design but also to its formidable array of weapons and stores.

The F-14 features four main types of Air-to-Air Weaponry including Heat-Seeking Missiles with the AIM-9 in different variants, the semi-active radar homing missile AIM-7 in different variants, the active radar homing missile AIM-54 in different variants and a M61A1 Vulcan cannon that can be used against both Air and Ground Targets.

The aircraft can be armed with a variety of bombs, rockets, and guided munitions to engage and neutralize ground targets.

In addition to its lethal armament, the F-14 can be configured with external fuel tanks to extend its operational range. The aircraft can also carry specialized stores, including the LANTIRN pod and the Tactical Airborne Reconnaissance Pod System (TARPS).

Loadout

The following diagram gives an overview of all stores that can be loaded on the stations.

đź’ˇ In practice, not all combinations might be possible, as there are a lot of technical factors resulting in restrictions.

Station Overview

Store / Station1A1B2345678B8ATotal
AIM-9114
AIM-71111116
AIM-541111116
Mk-8124334218
Mk-8224334218
Mk-82AIR24334218
Mk-82 Snake Eye24334218
Mk-8313113110
Mk-8411114
Mk-2022112210
GBU-10112
GBU-1211114
GBU-161114
GBU-24112
BDU-3333333318
LAU-10 (Zuni)221227 (28)
ADM-141A TALD111114
SUU-25 F/A Flare224 (16)
LAU-138 Chaff Adapter112
Smokewinder114
TACTS112
LANTIRN11
FPU-1 Fuel Tank112
CNU-188 Container112

M-61 Vulcan Six-Barreled Gatling Cannon

M-61 Vulcan U.S. Navy photo by Photographers Mate Airman Kristopher Wilson. (041129-N-5345W-034)

The M-61 Vulcan is a six-barreled hydraulically driven 20 mm automatic cannon capable of firing over 6,000 rpm (rounds per minute).

The F-14 carries the gun internally mounted beneath the cockpit with the muzzle being located on the lower left side of the fuselage. 676 20 mm rounds are carried in the ammunition drum for the gun and retain the spent cases after the rounds have been fired.

The gun itself is mounted to be elevated slightly more than 3° from the ADL to provide built-in lead for dog-fight situations.

To fire the gun, no input is needed from the WCS, the gun can be fired by the trigger on the pilot stick when selected by the weapons selector on that same stick, provided master arm is on. The WCS can, however, provide symbology on the HUD to increase gun accuracy. For both air-to-air and air-to-ground modes the gun has two sights available. For air-to-air it’s the manual sight and the RTGS (real-time gun sight).

Selection of the gun is indicated on the bottom of the HUD by a capital G with remaining hundreds of rounds indicated below.

Rounds Indicator

Apart from the indication on the HUD, the rounds remaining indicator on the pilot right vertical panel also shows remaining rounds. The indicator counts down from 650 but can manually be reset by rotating the knob below the indicator to the desired quantity.

Gun Rate Selector

The gun is capable of a 4,000 rpm or 6,000 rpm mode. The lower rate is normally used for air-to-ground engagement and the higher rate for air-to-air engagement. The gun rate is selected by the GUN RATE switch on the ACM, which also indicates the selected option. Selection of ACM will set it to high automatically. The maximum number of bullets fired by a trigger pull can be set to be either 50, 100, 200, or unlimited. The default value is 200 bullets but can be set otherwise by the ground crew.

đź’ˇ In DCS this is set via the kneeboard.

Manual Air-to-Air Sight

Manual Air-to-Air Sight

In manual mode, the HUD displays the ADL, the armament legend, and the manual pipper. This mode is accessed by depressing and releasing the CAGE/SEAM pushbutton on the left throttle when in the air-to-air mode with the gun selected. In this mode, the pilot has to manually aim the gun using the manual pipper as a reference to hit the target. Real target range and needed deflection need to be estimated by the pilot.

The manual piper is adjustable to enable the selection of the desired lead. The GUN ELEV panel on the pilot right vertical panel sets the lead; normally, this should be set to 53 milliradians to place the manual pipper on the gun sight line.

Gun Elevation Panel

Real-Time Gunsight (RTGS)

RTGS No Target

The real-time gunsight mode is the standard gun mode when in the air-to-air mode with the gun selected.

In RTGS, the WCS computes the bullet trajectory and displays the location the bullets will pass through at 1,000 and 2,000 feet, if no target data is available from the WCS. The pipper represents bullet location at 1,000 feet and the diamond represents the bullet location at 2,000 feet.

RTGS Target

If target data is available from the WCS (target tracked in an STT mode), the pipper instead displays bullet location at the target’s current range out to 4,000 feet. The diamond will display radar line of sight to the target (target location). This means that when having a target track, the pilot should fly the aircraft to place the pipper over the target to hit it.

In addition to computing the solution to put bullets at the target's location, the RTGS sight will also calculate where the bullets actually are in relation to the target when at target range. When the bullets fired are computed to be at the target’s location, the diamond switches from target indication to indicating bullet position at target range (BATR). This is also indicated by the diamond flashing.

Using this symbology, it’s possible to see where the target would have needed to be to be hit by the bullets. If the gun engagement was executed successfully, this means that the diamond should still be on top of the target, blinking, indicating that the bullets passed through the target’s location.

Manual Air-to-Ground Sight

Attack Mode

The manual air-to-ground sight works and looks the same way as the manual air-to-air sight except that it’s set by the RIO using the ATTK MODE selector on the armament control panel that’s located on the RIO left vertical panel. Selecting MAN on that selector enables the same HUD symbology as in the manual air-to-air sight upon the selection of the air-to-ground mode, the only additional HUD symbology being the display of the radar altitude on the right side of the HUD. The gun deflection should instead be set according to a pre-calculated setting depending on airspeed, target range, and dive angle.

Computer/Pilot Mode

Computer/Pilot Mode

Computer/pilot mode is used to have the WCS continuously compute a weapon impact point for, among other air-to-ground weapons, the gun. It is set by the RIO on the ATTK MODE selector, as for manual air-to-ground sight, by selecting CMPTR-PLT.

In this mode, the AN/AWG-9 radar is slaved to the weapon impact point for accurate range measurements and enables the HUD display of that same impact point.

The HUD uses the pipper to indicate a real-time weapon impact point and the diamond to indicate out of range. When the diamond disappears, the gun is in range to engage a target under the pipper. The pull-up cue moves vertically on the HUD and when it’s at or above the weapon impact point (pipper), it indicates that an immediate pull-up is required to avoid striking the ground and that the target is too close to engage safely.

The right side of the HUD displays the barometric altitude scale.

Mixed Gun Mode

Mixed Mode

The gun can also be used at the same time as another air-to-ground munition is selected by setting the A/G GUN switch on the armament panel (on the RIO left vertical panel) to MIXED. This enables the trigger to fire the gun but no HUD symbology is available for the gun as it’s being used to display release data for the selected munition. In this mode, the pilot needs to estimate the gun impact point manually with the ADL as the only reference on the HUD.

Air to Air

The F-14 Tomcat can equip various air-to-air weapons.

Missile firing

For medium to long range engagements the AIM-54 Phoenix as well as the AIM-7 Sparrow can be used.

In close-quarters engagements, the Tomcat relies on the AIM-9 Sidewinder, a short-range, infrared-guided missile celebrated for its agility and responsiveness.

HUD Symbology for Air-to-Air Missiles

A2A HUD

The above image shows the HUD with Phoenixes selected while in air-to-air display mode.

As standard the HUD shows the Closure Rate on the left side in hundredths of knots, from -200 to +1,000 knots. Current closure rate as displayed by a <.

Additionally it displays the Target Range Scale on the right side, showing target range at the displayed scale, 10 NM in this case as display at the upper end. The target range scale shows the current target range with a > and selected weapon max and minimum ranges as indicated by the dashes (-).

The Movable Reticle (called pipper for air to ground and gun employment) and the Target Designator can show different things depending on current situation.

The Movable Reticle shows current TCS line of sight if it exists at the same time as a radar STT lock except for when AIM-9s are selected. In the AIM-9 case it instead shows current AIM-9 seeker head line of sight.

The Target Designator diamond shows current radar STT line of sight if present and if not it instead shows the current TCS line of sight.

So effectually the TCS line of sight can be shown either by the movable reticle or the target designator depending on if a radar STT is also present and if a radar STT is present with AIM-9 selected it’s not shown at all.

AIM-54 Phoenix

AIM-54 U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate 2nd Class Felix Garza Jr. (030320-N-4142G-013)

đź’ˇ Depicted missile has yet to have the forward fins attached.

The AIM-54 Phoenix is a long-range air-to-air missile originally designed for the F-111B fleet air defense fighter, which never materialized. When the F-111B project was scrapped, the AIM-54 and the corresponding AN/AWG-9 WCS eventually found their way to the F-14.

The F-14 is capable of carrying up to 6 AIM-54 missiles, four on rails on the fuselage and one each on the glove pylons. Because of the missile cooling system used, the two front Phoenix pylons must always be mounted, meaning that the rear fuselage pylons can’t be used if the front ones aren’t present. The glove pylons contain their own cooling systems.

The missile is capable of engagement both against a single target in STT and multiple targets using track-while-search (TWS).

The AIM-54 is available in two different versions, the AIM-54A and the AIM-54C. The Heatblur Simulations F-14 Tomcat models both versions as well as the AIM-54A with both mk47 and mk60 rocket motors. The two motors on the AIM-54A differ in effective range, while the AIM-54C differs by having a digital seeker instead of an analog one, increasing its performance, as well as an improved, smokeless mk47 rocket motor.

The AIM-54 has a range of at least 60 NM against a fighter-sized target at high altitudes in pulse doppler STT. When using TWS for engagement against multiple targets, this drops to about 50 NM. It has a greater range against large targets and vice versa against smaller targets.

If launched in active mode, the range drops to about 10 NM for a fighter-sized target, varying slightly with target size. Notably, the missile will revert to SARH mode if no target is detected if selected for active launch in a SARH mode.

Missile Preparation

The AIM-54 missile preparation is started by selecting the MSL PREP switch on the pilot ACM panel or by activating the ACM. This enables power and cooling to the missile and also starts the built-in tests in the missile (BIT).

As with the AIM-7, the AIM-54 is tuned before launch using a transmitter on the rear end of the missile rail, transmitting to the rear receiver of the missile. The whole missile preparation cycle is completed after around 2 minutes, at which time the AIM-54 missiles are indicated ready in the corresponding missile status windows on the pilot ACM.

Launch Modes

The seeker head used in the AIM-54 is capable of both semi-active radar homing (SARH) and active radar homing (ARH).

Normally, the launch to eject (LTE) cycle of the missile is 3 seconds, meaning the time from trigger depression to missile ejection. The exception is the ACM active mode, where the LTE is shortened to 1 second if within 15° from ADL.

TWS SARH/ARH

In TWS, the AN/AWG-9 is capable of supporting the launch of up to 6 AIM-54 missiles against 6 different targets concurrently. In the first stage of the AIM-54 engagement, the missile is guided semi-actively by the AN/AWG-9 radar using both guidance commands transmitted via the radar and radar energy reflected off the target. Then, when the missile is within range of its seeker’s ARH mode, the AN/AWG-9 commands the missile to switch to ARH.

Absence of this command via the AN/AWG-9 radar means that the missile won’t switch to the ARH mode. The AN/AWG-9, however, continues to transmit guidance commands to the missile as a fallback in case the missile can’t acquire the target autonomously. This means that the AIM-54 isn’t a “fire and forget” missile per se, but it can be considered autonomous after transfer to ARH.

PD STT SARH

In pulse doppler STT, the AIM-54 uses SARH all the way to the target, receiving guidance commands at a greater rate than in TWS and also continuous spotlighting of the target because of the STT mode being used. This increases the effective range of the AIM-54 seeker slightly.

Active-Radar Homing (ARH)

Active-Radar Homing

The AIM-54 can also be commanded to go active directly after launch in both TWS and pulse doppler STT modes by setting the MSL OPTIONS switch to PH ACT before launch. This tells the WCS to immediately command the AIM-54 to go active in the first guidance command after launch. If launched at a target within 6 NM in the target's rear hemisphere or 10 NM in its forward hemisphere, the WCS will also automatically command this mode instead of a SARH mode.

If the target is not detected actively by the seeker, it will still fall back to SARH until the seeker can acquire on its own, like in the two SARH modes.

đź’ˇ Setting the MSL OPTIONS switch to PH ACT with an AIM-54 in the air will not make it go active; the PH ACT option can only be set before missile launch.

ACM Active

The last mode is ACM active, in which the missile is commanded active before launch, making this the only mode where the missile is truly fire and forget. The AIM-54 missile receives the active message before launch from the WCS in addition to a command pre-positioning the seeker head to have it look at the current WCS track if available.

ACM active is commanded when BRSIT (boresight) is selected on the pilot ACM panel, when having the ACM active without a WCS track, and when using a non-pulse doppler radar mode or TCS track. When using boresight or ACM without a track, the missile will launch along the ADL, locking onto the first target seen while launching at a non-pulse doppler radar track, the seeker head will be pre-positioned onto that track.

ECM Mode

In all of the guidance modes, the seeker head automatically switches to a passive ECM follow if jammed, angle-tracking the target until it can again track the target using SARH or ARH. This is done without crew action and is not indicated to the operator.

Missile Operation

The AIM-54 missile is selected with the weapon selector on the pilot stick by selecting the SP/PH (sparrow/phoenix) position and then depressing the selector to switch from SP to PH. It is possible to switch back to SP by again depressing the weapon selector.

When used in boresight or ACM without a WCS track, the HUD will not indicate any symbology apart from the ADL, which is used to aim the missile.

When selected with a WCS track in STT, the HUD will display the Target Designator, and if a TCS track exists, the Movable Reticle overlaying the target, the former indicating WCS track and the latter TCS line of sight. The range scale on the right side of the HUD indicates range to target and Rmin and Rmax, while the VDI, DDD, and TID display the attack guidance symbology.

TWS

When using the AIM-54 with TWS, the WCS automatically prioritizes the tracked targets, giving them a firing order number indicating missile launch order. As the first target is launched at, the first track’s number is removed, and the other tracks’ numbers are decreased by one.

To continue to engage tracks 2 through 6, the pilot depresses the trigger once for each target, waits until the missile is clear, and then depresses the trigger again for the next missile, and so on until the desired number of missiles are away.

After missile launch, the prioritization numbers on the right side of the targeted tracks are replaced with the TTI or Time to Impact number, showing calculated time until missile hits the target.

Additionally, when the AN/AWG-9 has sent the active command to the missile, the TTI numbers blink, indicating that the missile targeting the track has been commanded to active mode. When this happens depends on the setting of the TGTS switch on the DDD. SMALL equals 6NM, NORM equals 10NM, and LARGE equals 13NM. The setting set before launch is used.

The targets currently under missile attack brighten until estimated time to target plus 15 seconds has elapsed, and when at 15 seconds past estimated time to the last target, the break-away cross is also displayed on the VDI, DDD, and TID.

For more info regarding the applicable TID symbology, see TID Symbology.

TWS

It is possible to force the WCS to include a target by setting it to mandatory attack using the CAP and also to exclude a target by setting it to do not attack on the same panel. In addition, it is possible to command the WCS to set a track as priority 1 in the firing order by hooking it and pressing NEXT LAUNCH on the RIO armament panel.

If not already in TWS AUTO, the WCS automatically switches to this mode, thus assuming control over the AN/AWG-9 radar to keep the engaged targets illuminated. In addition to the track numbering, the TID also displays a steering centroid indicating the center weight of the TWS scan pattern.

The HUD and VDI display a steering cue guiding the pilot towards optimal target illumination and also display range and Rmin and Rmax to target number 1. The TID displays the complete attack symbology with target prioritization numbers and individual optimum launch ranges. For more info, see Track While Scan (TWS).

AIM-54 in DCS

The HB DCS F-14 includes custom AIM-54A and AIM-54C missiles, the AIM-54A with a choice of two different rocket motors. The aerodynamics and engine performance for these missiles have been extensively researched and computer simulated to make the included missiles behave as realistically as possible in regards to aerodynamics.

Regarding missile seeker and flight profile, we’ve worked with Eagle Dynamics to enable our F-14 AN/AWG-9 to control the AIM-54 to a degree. In DCS, this means the following:

In TWS, the missiles will fly out using guidance from the AN/AWG-9 until about 16 seconds to impact, at which time the AN/AWG-9 will tell the missile to go active if it’s still within the radar scan zone. The exact distance at which the AN/AWG-9 sends the ATC depends on the setting of the TGTS switch, as detailed above. This results in a silent engagement until the missiles go active, at which time the target’s radar warning receiver will get an indication of an active missile engaging it. If fired at range, the AIM-54 will loft for greater range. Setting the different seeker activation ranges impacts the amount of warning the target will get but also the amount of time the missile needs to be supported.

In PD-STT (Pulse-Doppler Single Target Track), the AIM-54 will be launched in a pure semi-active mode and be guided in that mode all the way to the target without going active. This means that the engaged target will get an immediate engagement warning through its radar warning receiver from the AN/AWG-9 as soon as the AIM-54 leaves the rail. Like in TWS, the missile will loft if fired at range.

For all other modes and within 10NM of the target (or in ACM or PH ACT), the AIM-54 will launch active off the rail, and the targeted aircraft will immediately see the missile’s own radar actively engaging it. It will not loft in this case, and thus the range is less than in the other two cases.

The AIM-54C in DCS currently is not affected by the Target Size Switch.

AIM-7 Sparrow

AIM-7 Sparrow U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate 3rd Class Joshua Karsten. (041108-N-8704K-008)

The AIM-7 Sparrow air-to-air missile is a supersonic boost-glide missile capable of engaging both aircraft and missiles in all weather conditions. The AIM-7 Sparrow missile is a medium-range air-to-air missile with a max range of at least 16 NM (30 km) for the AIM-7E and at least 38 NM (70 km) for the AIM-7F and AIM-7M. The all-weather capability comes from the missile being radar-guided, more exactly SARH (semi-active radar homing). This means that the seeker of the Sparrow relies on the AN/AWG-9 painting the targets for it and following the radar emissions being reflected off the target.

The F-14 can carry the AIM-7E, AIM-7F, and AIM-7M on four dedicated recesses on the aircraft fuselage and one each on the glove pylons.

Apart from the various improvements to the missile range, seeker, and warhead, the major difference between the different versions is that the AIM-7F and newer missiles can also be guided via pulse doppler illumination in addition to CW as opposed to only CW.

Missile Preparation

Missile Preparation

Before launch, the AIM-7 missiles need to be prepared by the selection of the MSL PREP-ON pushbutton on the pilot ACM panel. This commands the WCS to start missile preparation for the AIM-7 and AIM-54.

In the case of the AIM-7, the WCS applies electrical power to the missile to pre-heat the electronics and gyros. It also injects CW radar video from the radar to the missiles via an emitter on the aft end of the rail to a receiver at the aft end of the missile. This video is used to tune the AIM-7 missile to the selected CW frequency on the RIO DDD panel. When the individual missiles are tuned and ready, the corresponding missile status windows turn white to indicate a ready missile.

Launch Modes

The two available launch modes for the AIM-7 on the F-14 are the normal mode and the boresight mode. To select the AIM-7 for launch, the pilot selects the SP/PH (sparrow/phoenix) position on the stick weapon selector. Selection of which Sparrow to launch is done automatically by the WCS.

Depression of the weapon selector switches from SP to PH and vice versa. If an STT target is available, the WCS will automatically use the normal mode for launch unless BRSIT (boresight) is selected on the MSL MODE (missile mode) switch on the ACM panel. In all other cases, the boresight mode will be used.

Normal Mode

Missile Options

As the normal mode is used to engage a target tracked in STT, the WCS is capable of using both CW and pulse doppler for guidance. When using CW in the normal mode, the AN/AWG-9 radar uses a dedicated CW antenna to spotlight the tracked target more directly than via the flood antenna. While CW is the normal guidance mode for all AIM-7 variants, it is possible to select the pulse doppler guidance mode instead when using the AIM-7F and AIM-7M missiles.

This is done on the RIO's armament panel with the MSL OPTIONS switch by setting it to SP DP (sparrow doppler). When selected, this causes the WCS to guide the Sparrow missiles using pulse doppler illumination instead.

Regardless of guidance mode, the WCS calculates the missile LAR (launch acceptance region) and displays the missile launch ranges on the VDI and TID. The HUD shows the target diamond and current target range, Rmin and Rmax, while the VDI, DDD, and TID display the attack guidance symbology as well as the above-mentioned missile LAR indications.

Boresight Mode

The boresight mode uses the CW flood antenna on the AN/AWG-9 radar and will cause the missile to track the strongest target return within the flood area. In addition to when launched in boresight mode, the radar will also switch to flood mode when a target is lost, either before launch or after launch, enabling the pilot to try and save the shot by keeping the target within the flood area.

CW Flood

AIM-9 Sidewinder

AIM-9 U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate Airman Kristopher Wilson. (050112-N-5345W-066)

The AIM-9 Sidewinder is a short-range air-to-air missile. It uses an infrared seeker locking on to a target's IR signature, making it capable of tracking a target both during daytime and at night.

The F-14 Tomcat is capable of carrying all Navy versions of the AIM-9 Sidewinder from the AIM-9D up to the AIM-9M. The Heatblur F-14 Tomcat is currently modeled as carrying the AIM-9L and AIM-9M.

The F-14 is capable of carrying the AIM-9 on stations 1A & B and 8A & B. Stations 1 & 8 are the glove pylons, which can each carry two AIM-9s for a total of 4. Station 1A & 8A are dedicated to carry only the AIM-9 and are normally used when only carrying two to allow station 1B & 8B to carry other munitions.

Missile Preparation

Missile Preparation

The cooling of the AIM-9 seeker head needs to be enabled before launch. This is done by pressing the SW COOL switch on the pilot ACM panel or by selecting the ACM mode on the same panel. This commands cooling of the missile's seeker head. The missile will immediately show ready, but full seeker head performance will take at least 60 seconds.

Seeker Head Modes

The AIM-9G introduced a seeker head capable of the Sidewinder expanded acquisition mode (SEAM), and all later Sidewinders carried by the F-14 are also capable of that mode. SEAM allows the missile seeker head to be uncaged to track a target within the seeker limits (40° from ADL), allowing the pilot to lead the target, improving missile performance. It also allows for the WCS on the F-14 to slave the seeker to a tracked target within 20° from ADL, allowing for off-boresight acquisition.

The AIM-9 on the F-14 can still use the old boresight mode where the seeker head remains slaved to ADL (2.5° field of view), but normally SEAM is used to scan the seeker about either ADL or a tracked target. This scan is not visible to the pilot and is done to increase effective seeker head field of view. As with all Sidewinders, target detection is indicated by an aural tone. That growling tone is present while scanning but increases in intensity while the seeker is looking at an IR source.

Missile Operation

The AIM-9 Sidewinder is selected for launch with the weapon selector on the pilot stick. The weapon selector can be used to cycle which AIM-9 is selected for launch by depressing it, indicating on the ACM panel which missile is selected by a checkerboard indication in the corresponding status window. When using the AIM-9, the HUD uses the diamond to indicate a tracked target and the pipper (crosshair) to indicate current seeker head position. If a WCS track with range is available, the HUD also displays range to target and Rmin and Rmax. The VDI, DDD, and TID display the attack guidance symbology if a WCS track is present.

The basic missile boresight mode without SEAM (no scan) is commanded by depressing the BRSIT (boresight) switch on the pilot ACM panel while not having the ACM mode active. In this mode, the pilot puts the target at ADL and fires when the aural tone is present.

If the BRSIT switch is not used or the ACM mode is active, the AIM-9 will use the SEAM and set the missile to use the double-D scan pattern. If a WCS target is present, the seeker head will scan around the radar or TCS line of sight; otherwise, the missile will scan around the ADL.

SEAM Lock

To enable lock-on to a target in SEAM, the pilot depresses the CAGE/SEAM pushbutton on the left throttle. This illuminates the SEAM LOCK light on the ACM panel and un-cages the seeker for 4.5 seconds, allowing it to track a target present in the seeker's field of view. If no IR source is found, the missile is again caged and the SEAM LOCK light is deactivated.

If lock-on is successful, the aural tone will remain and the SEAM LOCK light stays illuminated, allowing the pilot to launch the missile by pressing the stick trigger. After launch, the next AIM-9 will automatically be selected.

Air to Ground

Despite being primarily designed as an air superiority fighter and an interceptor the F-14 was from the very start cleared and tested to carry all of the modern American general purpose bombs (GP) of the Mk-80 series. In addition it was also cleared to carry the Mk-20 Rockeye cluster bomb and the 5” Zuni folding-fin aircraft rocket (FFAR).

As the F-14’s combat role changed to include the precision ground attack mission it was also cleared to carry several of the guided bomb unit (GBU) versions of the Mk-80 series bombs, more specifically, some of the laser guided versions.

Air-to-Ground Weapon Settings

Armament Panel

The air-to-ground weapon delivery is set up by the RIO on his armament panel on the left vertical panel of the RIO cockpit.

The type of munition for delivery is set up by the wheel on the top of the panel, turning it to the correct munition. This configures the WCS with the correct parameters for the selected munition.

đź’ˇ The Mk-81, 82, and 83 have both an L and an H option for low-drag and high-drag versions, respectively.

Under DLVY MODE (delivery mode), it is possible to set STP/RPL (step/ripple) and SGL/PRS (single/pairs). The possible combinations are:

  • STP and SGL: Releases one store with each depression of the bomb release button on the pilot stick.
  • STP and PRS: As with STP and SGL but each depression of the bomb release button on the pilot stick releases a pair of stores. Only works for paired stations, 1 with 8, 3 with 6, and 4 with 5.
  • RPL and SGL: Used with all attack modes, each depression of the bomb release button on the pilot stick releases a set amount of stores set by the QTY (quantity) wheels with the interval set by the INTERVAL wheels (in milliseconds).
  • RPL and PRS: As RPL and SGL but each release pulse releases a pair of stores, QTY still sets the total amount of stores to be released.

The MECH FUSE switch sets which mechanical fuse to arm on the stores. NOSE arms the nose fuse, SAFE inhibits arming of the fuses, and NOSE/TAIL arms both fuses.

The ELEC FUSE selector knob sets the electrical fuse of the store to be released:

  • SAFE: Inhibits electrical bomb fusing.
  • VT: Sets air-burst mode at preset burst height for compatible stores.
  • INST: Sets instantaneous burst mode.
  • DLY 1: Sets preset time delay 1.
  • DLY 2: Sets preset time delay 2.

The INTERVAL and QTY (quantity) wheels set the release interval (in milliseconds) and quantity of stores to be released, compatible with the delivery modes as seen above under DLVY MODE.

Lastly, the 6 STA SEL (station select) switches set which pylons to use for store delivery (also used for selection of what stores to jettison). To select a pylon for store delivery, set the corresponding switch to SEL. Stations 1 and 8 should be set to B for selection, SW was used to jettison AIM-9 Sidewinders but is now inoperable.

đź’ˇ All F-14 bombs in DCS are assumed to have both types of fuzes, so both the mechanical and electrical fuze need to be set. GBUs, Mk-20s, and Mk-81 to 84s need the mechanical fuze set to either N or N/T settings, the Mk-82AIR (ballute) and Mk-82 Snake-Eye can be dropped in free-fall with N and retarded with N/T.

Air-to-Ground Weapon Delivery

Air-to-ground delivery is initiated by pilot selection of the A/G mode on the display control panel. After tape read-in (about 30 seconds), the WCS initiates the air-to-ground mode and enables relevant symbology on the displays.

The weapon selection automatically switches to ordnance (ORD on the HUD) unless the pilot has selected another weapon. All other options are set by the RIO in the back seat.

The available attack modes in the F-14 are set by the ATTK MODE selector in the RIO pit and are:

  • CMPTR TGT: Computer target, a semi-automatic computer-guided mode similar to a CCRP mode in newer aircraft.
  • CMPTR IP: Computer initial point, an extended CMPTR TGT mode using a known initial point (IP) as a reference for store delivery. Mostly used in situations where the actual target is expected to be hard to locate visually and is located closely to an easily identifiable reference point/landmark.
  • CMPTR PLT: Computer pilot, a manual computer and pilot-guided mode using the WCS for store impact point indication on HUD. Similar to a CCIP mode in newer aircraft.
  • MAN: Manual, manual backup mode in which the HUD displays a pipper (crosshair) on the HUD at the deflection set by the pilot. Used in case of a systems failure prohibiting the other modes.
  • D/L BOMB: Data-link bomb, an automatic mode in which the pilot is steered via data-link cues for remotely controlled store delivery. (Not implemented in DCS at this point in time.)

Computer Target

Computer Target

The computer target mode allows the pilot to designate a target onto which the WCS then guides the pilot towards store release. This mode is usable for all air-to-ground stores, including rockets.

When selected, the HUD displays the diamond as target designator and the bomb fall line (BFL) through the velocity vector and store impact point pipper (crosshair).

To designate a target, the pilot steers the aircraft in azimuth to place the target along the BFL. Then UP/DN on the target designate switch on the left wall of the pilot cockpit is used to slew the target designator along the BFL until it overlays the target. At that point, the target is designated by pressing the target designate switch to DES.

After designation, the target designation diamond becomes stabilized to the designated position on the ground, and the AN/AWG-9 is slewed to it for range measurements. The BFL now remains overlaying the designated target while the store impact point pipper and aircraft velocity vector continue to follow aircraft movements. In addition, the HUD now displays the upper and lower solution cues on the BFL.

The pilot should now fly the velocity vector and store impact point over the BFL until the solution cues reach them. The lower solution cue indicates imminent store release when passing the velocity vector, and the pilot should by now be holding the bomb release button depressed to authorize WCS store release. When the upper solution cue reaches the velocity vector, the WCS automatically releases set stores on the condition that the bomb release button is depressed.

The pull-up cue (bracket on the HUD) moves upwards on the HUD towards the velocity vector with decreasing altitude. When it reaches the velocity vector, it indicates that the aircraft is below safe altitude for store release.

Computer Initial Point

Functionally identical to the Computer Target mode except that a preset initial point (IP) is designated instead of the actual target. The IP is preset before takeoff using data-link or manually by the RIO using the CAP.

The IP waypoint should be a terrain feature expected to be visually identifiable by the pilot even if the target is not.

To set the CAP, the RIO designates the location of the IP waypoint as per the other waypoints in the system. (See CAP heading under AN/AWG-9 in the General Design and Systems Overview section or the Navigation Systems heading in the same section)

The message (function) IP TO TGT on the CAP under the SPL category is then used with the prefixes ALT, RNG, and BRG to read out and set the following data points:

  • ALT: Sets altitude difference of the target relative to the IP waypoint.
  • RNG: Sets range to target from the IP waypoint.
  • BRG: Sets the bearing to the target from the IP waypoint.

When the pilot designates the IP visually on the HUD, the WCS recalculates the target location using the data set under the IP TO TGT function on the CAP, moves the target diamond to that location, and instead displays guidance towards the real target location.

All other functions of this mode are identical to the Computer Target mode.

Computer Pilot

Computer Pilot

The computer pilot mode uses the WCS to continually calculate and display an impact point for the configured store on the HUD.

When selected, the HUD displays the current store impact point in real-time using the pipper (crosshair). The target designation diamond is used when the WCS is configured for rockets and overlays the pipper to indicate that the configured store is out of range when displayed. As in the Computer Target and IP modes, the pull-up cue is used to indicate aircraft below safe store release altitude when at or above the velocity vector.

To correctly engage the desired target, the pilot flies the impact point pipper on the HUD over the target and then depresses the bomb release button.

When using rockets, the pilot should wait until the diamond disappears, indicating that the selected store is within range and then use the control stick trigger to fire the rockets.

Manual

Manual

The manual air-to-ground mode is used as a backup when the other modes are unavailable.

By principle, it works the same as the Computer Pilot mode in that the pilot should fly the pipper on the HUD over the desired target. The pipper is in this mode not updated by the WCS, however, but instead set at a deflection from the ADL according to desired engagement speed, dive angle, and release altitude.

This is set using the elevation lead panel on the pilot right side vertical panel using weapon engagement tables or by pilot estimation.

Zuni Rockets

The Zuni 5-inch folding-fin aircraft rocket (FFAR) was developed to replace the high-velocity aircraft rocket (HVAR) of World War 2 vintage. As part of its design, it’s modular and capable of using different warheads as well as different fuzes.

The Zuni rockets are carried in LAU-10 pods, each carrying 4 rockets. The pods can fire in either salvo mode or ripple mode, salvo launching one rocket and ripple all.

The F-14 Tomcat can carry LAU-10 rocket pods on stations 1B, 3, 6, and 8B using TERs, each TER holding up to two pods except one of either 3 or 6 which must only carry one as not to clash with a pod on the adjacent station. The TERs are used to gain separation from the station for safe rocket firing, and the reason for not being able to use three pods on the TERs is that on the glove pylons, the inner TER station would conflict with the main landing gear and on stations 3 and 6 with the fuselage.

The Zuni rockets are set up for launch by the RIO on the armament panel as with bombs, the delivery mode (DLVY MODE) switches being used to configure how many pods to activate at a time.

Mk-81, 82, 83, and 84 GP Bombs

Mk-80 Series Bombs U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate Airman Justin S. Osborne. (030321-N-0382O-506)

The Mk-80 series bombs are the standard general-purpose bombs used by the US Navy and allies and were first dropped in combat during the Vietnam War. The Mk-82 also has the capability to mount a retardation system using either folding fins or an inflated ballute to brake the bomb after release, allowing them to be dropped at lower altitudes as the dropping aircraft has more time to move away from them. Those versions are called the Mk-82 Snake Eye (fins) and Mk-82AIR (ballute) in DCS.

The F-14 is capable of carrying all the various bombs in the Mk-80s series, 81 through to 84. While the ground attack mission never really materialized for the F-14 in the Navy, it was tested for and cleared to deliver these weapons from the start.

The F-14 uses the Phoenix rails (stations 3-6) and the glove pylons’ lower stations to mount the bombs. The rails themselves can carry all four variants while the 81 to 83 can also be mounted on substations along the sides of the Phoenix rails as well as on TERs on the glove pylons.

All of the Mk-80 bombs have nose fuzes only and should be dropped with the nose (N) fuze setting on the mechanical fuze switch on the RIO armament panel. The Mk-82AIR and Snake Eye variants use the tail fuze wire to enable bomb retardation, meaning that the nose/tail (N/T) mechanical fuze option should be used if retardation is needed.

The total amount of the different bombs carried depends on weapon weight and weapon clearance between the rails; the actual number varies from 18 for the 81s and 82s to just 4 for the 84s as those can only be mounted on the rails themselves. For more info, see the F-14 loadout diagrams.

GBU-10, 12, 16, and 24

GBU U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate Airman Milosz Reterski. (040105-N-9742R-001)

The GBU (guided bomb unit) are bombs from the Mk-80s series with an attached seeker unit and fin (control) unit converting them into guided precision bombs, and in the case of the GBU-10, 12, 16, and 24 carried by the F-14, laser-guided bombs to be more precise.

When the F-14B gained the ability to mount and use the LANTIRN pod, it was also cleared to carry some of the GBU variants of the Mk-80 series bombs. It can either deliver them onto designation from a self-carried LANTIRN pod or onto a laser designation from another aircraft or ground source.

The GBUs carried are mounted on the Phoenix rails themselves on stations 3-6 as the additional size of a GBU compared to a normal Mk-80 series bomb makes it impossible to use the substations on the rails for those. Each station is capable of carrying one GBU up to the size of the GBU-16. As for the GBU-10 and 24, the 10 can be carried on the front rails (3 and 6) and the 24 on one front rail and one back rail as they need to be carried on opposite sides of the aircraft due to the larger wing assembly.

đź’ˇ GBU laser codes are set as per DCS Mission Editor Functions Specific to the HB DCS F-14 or via the kneeboard.

Mk-20 Rockeye

The Mk-20 Rockeye is a conventional free-fall bomb like the Mk-80 series bombs, but instead of a conventional charge, it carries anti-tank submunitions. The Rockeye contains 247 of these anti-tank submunitions, which are released at a set height using a radar altimeter, the design being that the submunitions are dispersed over a large area for greater effect.

The fuze height itself is set by the ground crew as they’re loaded and can’t be changed by the pilot. To arm the Rockeye correctly, the mechanical fuse should be set to nose (N).

The F-14 can carry up to 10 Mk-20 Rockeyes using the Phoenix rails and substations as well as TERs on the glove pylons.

đź’ˇ Additional fuse settings (FMU-140 fuse) pending additional weapon code implementation.

BDU-33 Practice Bombs

The BDU-33 practice bomb is a training round used to simulate a Mk-82 general-purpose bomb for training purposes. They can be carried three to a TER on each of station 3, 4, 5, and 6 on the F-14 Tomcat.

They are set up for release as with the real general-purpose bombs.

ADM-141 TALD

TALD U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate 3rd Class Mark J. Rebilas. (041018-N-6213R-021)

The ADM-141 tactical air-launched decoy (TALD) is a gliding decoy simulating real aircraft using active and passive means. There are several versions of the TALD, examples being a version equipped to launch chaff and another version using a Luneberg lens to increase its cross-section to simulate a larger aircraft.

All versions are pre-programmed before takeoff and are un-powered, gliding through the air on fold-out wings.

The F-14 can carry up to four ADM-141 TALDs, one each on stations 3 through 6, using a TER each to gain separation from the aircraft fuselage.

đź’ˇ In DCS these currently glide straight ahead until they run out of speed and altitude.

LUU-2 Parachute Flare

The LUU-2 parachute flare is an air-launched flare suspended by a parachute used to illuminate the ground during nighttime.

The F-14 can carry up to 16 LUU-2 flares in up to 4 SUU-25 flare dispensers on TERs at stations 4 and 5, each TER capable of carrying up to 2 dispensers in order not to conflict with the fuselage.

The LUU-2 parachute flare is launched and set up in the same way as a general-purpose bomb.

Smokewinder

The Smokewinder is a smoke pod used for aerial displays simulating an AIM-9 missile to the aircraft interface.

To enable and disable a Smokewinder, select AIM-9 for launch using boresight (BRSIT) and select the corresponding weapon station using the weapon selector on the pilot stick. When set up thusly and with master arm on, each pull of the trigger enables or disables the Smokewinder discharging smoke.

Pods

TACTS Pods

The TACTS pod is an analysis pod used during training missions, carried on LAU-7 rails instead of AIM-9s, normally on station 1A and 8A. They are normally carried as a pair of two, one on each side.

đź’ˇ In DCS, their functionality is purely cosmetic.

LANTIRN

LANTIRN U.S. Navy photo by Photographers Mate Airman Jason Frost. (030122-N-9403F-002)

The LANTIRN was adapted for use on the F-14 Tomcats during the 1990s as the F-14’s role started to gravitate towards including the precision strike role.

The version carried on the Heatblur DCS F-14B Tomcat represents the earliest integrations of the LANTIRN, the pod being carried only on station 8B and hardwired to the control panel in the RIO cockpit and to the video input on the TID/VDI.

For more information regarding the use of the LANTIRN pod, see the section about it under the General Design and Systems Overview chapter.

Tanks

FPU-1 Fuel Tank

The FPU-1 fuel tank is carried by the F-14 Tomcat on stations 2 and 7 on each engine nacelle. They each carry up to 2,000 pounds of fuel and can be jettisoned in the same way as other stores using the normal procedures.

Jester & Iceman

Jester

Jester

The Jester AI aims to be a functional AI Radar Intercept Officer (RIO) for the Heatblur DCS F-14, enabling a multi-crew experience in a single-player (per aircraft) environment.

He is fully integrated into the rear cockpit, controlling nearly all back seat systems, with a focus on systems not controllable from the pilot seat. He is also modeled to simulate human limitations—his head position, visual spotting range, and hand positions are all accounted for. When controlling systems at the RIO seat, he performs all actions a human RIO would.

To control Jester, a command wheel is used for quick access. This wheel is dynamic based on the selected mode and the current situation. Feedback to the pilot is given via ICS using a library of recorded audio, simulating a RIO actually talking. In addition to acknowledging orders, Jester will provide pertinent information based on the situation.

In multiplayer, if a human RIO disconnects mid-flight, Jester resumes control of the rear cockpit systems in the configuration left by the human player.

Functionality

Menu

The Jester menu is opened by default with the A key. Selection of items (1–8) is done using CTRL + 1 through CTRL + 8. These controls can be remapped under the Jester category in the F-14 Pilot DCS key-binds. The menu system is designed to support 8-way hat switch mapping. Optionally, you can use your viewing angle in the cockpit to select menu petals by holding the Jester menu key for over 0.5 seconds - this can be toggled in the F-14 options.

  • The first press brings up a contextual menu based on current aircraft mode and situation.
  • A second press opens the Main Menu.
  • A third press closes the menu.

Examples:

  • Air-to-Air mode (airborne): opens Beyond Visual Range – Radar menu.
  • Air-to-Ground mode: opens Air-to-Ground – Weapons menu.
  • Take-off/Landing: context-specific menus available.

From these menus, pilots can control RIO systems. Menu contents can change based on prior selections. In some cases, menu petals act as inputs/keypads for entering data like frequencies or waypoints.

You can also:

  • Set a waypoint from an F10 map marker (menu shows time and name).
  • Lock targets on the TID using options like closest target or specific azimuth/range.
  • Run a startup checklist.

Assisted Startup

Startup

For aircraft cold start, Jester can either perform his checklist like a real RIO would, or he can also help the pilot with an assisted startup in which he reads the pilot's checklist to him while starting.

To access the normal, unassisted startup, select startup, Jester will then go through his checklist. He will at times ask the pilot if he has completed certain checks or ask for specific tests, this is answered via the Jester menu using the options appearing there. As an example he will start by asking for a comms check which is answered via the Jester menu. Note that after engine startup and EMERG GEN Master test he will ask for what INS alignment to go for, select this via the Jester menu as well.

To access the assisted startup select assisted start on the Jester menu. Jester will now read out the checklist to the pilot and highlight the relevant indicators and switches during startup. Use the Jester menu to tell Jester when a check/step is complete.

Highlight

Iceman

Pilot

Iceman is a basic autopilot AI and a subset of the Jester system. It is designed for singleplayer scenarios where a player may switch between the front and rear seats.

When the player switches to the RIO seat:

  • Iceman takes control of heading and altitude.
  • The Iceman menu allows setting heading, altitude, and speed—either relative to a target or as absolute values.

Normal Procedures

This chapter contains standard procedures for operating the F-14 Tomcat.

The aircrew procedures are separated into individual procedures for the pilot and radar intercept officer. These separate procedures allow the individual crew-member to perform the checks without requiring them to read the checks performed by the other crew-member. The remaining procedures are combined and are coded for applicable crew-member action.

đź’ˇ Real procedures and checklists evolved over time. The procedures provided in this manual are tailored to our simulation of the Tomcat specifically. Procedures provided in other resources may differ slightly.

Carrier Takeoff

Preparation for Flight and Interior Inspection

Pilot

Interior Inspection (Pilot)

StepItemAction/Details
1OXYGENSwitch ON: check airflow
Switch OFF: verify no airflow
2VENT AIRFLOW thumbwheelSet to desired cockpit ventilation
3Tone VOLUME controlsSet
4TACAN function selectorOFF
TACAN ChannelSet
Mode switchSet
VOL knobCounterclockwise
5ICS panelVOL: as desired
Amplifier: NORM
Function selector: COLD MIC
6STAB AUG switchesOFF
7UHF function selectorOFF
8Wing-sweep switchMAN
⚠️ Wings may move if control system is powered
9Left and Right ThrottlesOFF
10Speed brake switchRET
11Exterior lights master switchSet as required
12FLAP handleSet to current flap position
13ASYM LIMITER switchON (guard down)
14L and R ENG MODE SELECT switchesPRI
15BACKUP IGNITION switchOFF
16THROTTLE TEMP switchNORM
17THROTTLE MODE switchBOOST
18L and R INLET RAMPS switchesAUTO
19ANTI SKID SPOILER BK switchOFF
20FUEL panelWING/EXT TRANS: AUTO
REFUEL PROBE: RET
DUMP: OFF
FEED: NORM (guard down)
21LDG GEAR handleDN
22NOSE STRUT switchOFF
23Parking brakePull
24Radar altimeterOFF
25AltimeterSet to current elevation
26Left and Right FUEL SHUT OFF handlesIn
27ACM panelACM: OFF (guard down)
MASTER ARM: OFF (guard down)
28Weapon selectOFF
29HUD and VDI filtersAs required
30Standby attitude gyroCaged
31G-meterReset
32ClockWind and Set
33Fuel BingoSet
34Circuit breakersChecked
35Brake accumulator pressureCheck (should be in green)
36HYD HAND PUMPCheck for pressure build-up
37HOOK handleSet to current hook position
38DISPLAYS panelMODE: T.O.
HUD DECLUTTER: OFF
HUD AWL: ACL
VDI MODE: NORM
VDI AWL: ACL
HSD MODE: NAV
STEER CMD: DEST
DISPLAYS POWER: OFF
39ELEV LEAD knobSet
40INBD and OUTBD spoiler switchesNORM (guard down)
41L and R generator switchesNORM
42EMERG generator switchNORM (guard down)
43Air-conditioning controlsTEMP mode: AUTO
Thumbwheel: desired (5–7 = medium)
CABIN PRESS: NORM
AIR SOURCE: OFF
44WSHLD AIR switchOFF
45ANTI-ICE switchAUTO/OFF
46COMPASS panelMode: SLAVED
Hemisphere: set N/S
LAT knob: set
47ARA-63 panelCHANNEL: Set
POWER: OFF
48MASTER LIGHT panel controlsAs required
49MASTER TEST switchOFF
50EMERG FLT HYD switchAUTO (guard down)
51HYD TRANSFER PUMP switchSHUT OFF (guard up)
52CANOPY air diffuser leverCABIN AIR
53VIDEO CONTROL switchOFF

Pre-start (Pilot)

StepItemAction/Details
1Ground crewConnect starter air and external power
2Wing sweep circuit breakersIf not in OV SWP:
- Pull CBs (LE1, LE2)
- Use emergency WINGSWEEP handle
3ICSCheck
4Landing gear indicatorsCheck
5MASTER TEST switchCheck LTS, FIRE DET/EXT, INST responses
6Ejection seatsArmed
7CANOPY handleClose
8ACM panelGun rate: Set
SW COOL: OFF
MSL PREP: OFF
MSL MODE: NORM
Status windows: Check
9EMERG STORES JETT lightOut
10LADDER lightOut (ladder stowed)
11RIONotify ready to start

RIO

Interior Inspection (RIO)

StepItemAction/Details
1OXYGENSwitch ON: check airflow
Switch OFF: verify airflow ceases
2VENT AIRFLOW thumbwheelOFF
3SYS TEST - SYS PWR ground panelClosed
4KY-28 or KY-58Set to P/OFF
5ICS panelVOL knob: Set
Amplifier: NORM
Function selector: COLD MIC
6TACAN function selectorOFF
7U/VHF MODE selectorOFF
8LIQ COOLING switchOFF
9EJECT CMD leverSet per squadron policy
10ARMAMENT control panelConfigure:
- WPN type: OFF
- ATTK MODE: MAN
- DLVY MODE: STP / SGL
- ELECT FUZE: Safe
- A/G GUN: OFF
- MECH FUZE: Safe
- SEL JETT: Safe
- JETT OPTIONS: MER TER
- INTERVAL / QTY: Set
- Stations 1–8: Safe
- MSL OPTIONS: NORM
- MSL SPD GATE: NOSE QTR
11Standby attitude gyroCaged
12NAV MODE knobOFF
13ClockWind and Set
14WCS switchOFF
15IR/TV power switchOFF
16RECORD switchOFF
17RADAR WARNING RCVR PWR switchOFF
18DECM selector knobOFF
19AN/ALE-39 PWR/MODE switchOFF
20DATA LINK ON-OFF-AUX ON switchOFF
21APX-76OFF
22INTERIOR LIGHTS panelCheck
23IFF MASTER knobOFF
24MODE 4 switchOut
25IFF ANT and TEST panelConfigure:
- IFF ANT switch: Off
- IND LT-DDI BIT switch: Off
- GND CLG switch: OFF
26RADAR BEACON switchOFF
27RADAR BEACON MODE switchSingle or Double
28POWER SYS TEST switchOFF
29DATA/ADF switchOFF

Pre-start (RIO)

StepItemAction/Details
1External power and airVerify connected
⚠️ Do not start WCS or displays without power
2ICSCheck two-way communication with pilot
3DL, TACAN, and U/VHFSet per mission requirements
4Fuel quantityCheck
5Console and instrument lightsCheck and adjust
6LTS testVerify all caution, advisory, ECM, and DDI lights illuminate
7Ejection seatsVerify pilot's seat is armed and your seat is armed
8CANOPY handleClose canopy when pilot ready
9Ready signalInform pilot: ready to start

Engine Startup

Pilot

StepItemAction/Details
1AIR SOURCE switchSet to OFF
2HYD TRANSFER PUMP switchSet to OFF (Guard up)
3EMERG FLT HYD switchSet to LOW → Check ON flag
Set to HIGH → Check ON flag
Set to AUTO (LOW) → Verify both flags OFF
4ENG CRANK switchSet to R (Right engine)
At ~20% RPM: check oil/hydraulic pressure, START/VALVE caution light
5Right throttleAdvance to IDLE at 20% RPM
6ENG CRANK switchVerify it returns to OFF at ~50% RPM
START/VALVE caution light turns off
7R GEN caution lightTurns off at ~59% RPM
8R FUEL PRESS caution lightTurns off before idle RPM
9Engine instrument readingsRPM: 62–78%
EGT: ~500 °C
FF: 950–1400 Pph
NOZ: 100%
OIL: 25–35 psi
FLT HYD: ~3000 psi
10External electrical powerDisconnect (order plane captain)
11ENG CRANK switchSet to L (Left engine)
Switch OFF after combined hydraulic pressure reaches 3000 psi
12HYD TRANSFER PUMPSet to NORMAL
If no pressure in 10 sec → set to SHUTOFF
13RepeatPerform steps 4–9 for Left Engine
14Starter airDisconnect (order plane captain)
15AIR SOURCE switchCycle: L ENG → R ENG → BOTH ENG
Verify cockpit airflow
16HYD TRANSFER PUMPSet to NORMAL

RIO

StepItemAction/Details
1Monitor startupObserve pilot procedures and plane captain signals for safety

Post Start

Pilot

StepItemAction/Details
1STAB AUG switchesAll ON
2MASTER TEST switchSet to EMERG GEN
3VMCU operationCheck for momentary illumination (~2s) of:
- PITCH STAB 1/2
- ROLL STAB 1/2
- YAW STAB OP/OUT
- SPOILERS
- HZ TAIL AUTH
- RUDDER AUTH
- AUTO PILOT
- MACH TRIM
4Notify RIOAdvise test complete
5STAB AUG switchesAll ON
6AFTCL/R ENG MODE SELECT: SEC → PRI
7Emergency WING SWEEP handleIf not over-swept:
Move to 68°
Then full OV SW
Hold until HZ TAIL AUTH light goes out and OVER flag appears
Then stow
8Wing-sweep mode switchAUTO
9WING SWEEP DRIVE NO.1 and WG SW DR NO.2/MANUV FLAP circuit breakersIn
10WING/EXT TRANS switchOFF
11MASTER RESET pushbuttonDepress
12COMM/NAV/GEAR/DISPLAYSSet all to ON:
- UHF to TR+G or BOTH
- TACAN to T/R
- ARA-63 to ON
- DISPLAYS power switches ON
- RADAR ALT ON
13TrimSet to 000
14Standby attitude gyroErect
15MASTER RESET pushbuttonDepress
16MASTER TEST switchSet to OBC
17AutopilotEngage
18Speed brake switchExtend → Retract
19REFUEL PROBE switchExtend → Retract
20WSHLD AIR switchCycle
21OBCOFF
22WING/EXT TRANS switchOFF
23TrimRe-check and set to 000

RIO

StepItemAction/Details
1EMERG GEN checkEnsure completed before continuing
2ECS systemAllow ECS to run ≥ 3 minutes before powering avionics/AWG-9
3WCS switchSet to STBY (AWG-9 COND light should illuminate)
4LIQ COOLING switchSet to AWG-9 or AWG-9/AIM-54 (if loaded)
5IR/TV power switchSTBY or IR/TV
6CATEGORY knobNAV
7NAV MODE switchAlign
8CommunicationsU/VHF MODE: T/R G
DATA LINK: ON
9TACANSet function selector to T/R
10RADAR WARNING RCVR panelDisplay type: NORM
PWR: ON
TEST: SPL
MODE: LMT
11DECM knobSTBY
Wait for light to go off → HOLD 3 sec → ACT for OBC
12IFF MASTER knobSTBY
CODE: Set as required
Test panel: All test functions
ANT switch: AUTO
13AUTO BIT 2Verify complete (on TID)
14CAP (nav init)Enter own A/C lat/lon and elevation
15AltimeterReset
16Computer address panelEnter mission data: WP, FP, etc.
17DDD (radar display)Set
18TID controlsSet:
CONTRAST / BRIGHT
CLSN: OFF
ALT NUM / SYM ELEM / LAUNCH ZONE / VEL VECTOR: ON
DATA LINK / JAM STROBE: As required
19Multiple display indicatorTEST button: Press
BRIGHTNESS: Set
20DATA/ADF switchSet to BOTH
21Hand control panelLight test: Press
El Vernier: Set 0°
22AN/ALE-39BURST: 3
INTERVAL: 0.1
SALVO: 2
SALVO INTERVAL: 0.4
23CANOPY DEFOG/CABIN AIR leverSet to CABIN AIR
24D/L replyAs required
25AAI panelTEST/CHAL CC switch: Test → check DDD display
26Indicator lightsTest
27DDI BITTest
28After INS alignment completeNAV mode: INS
Program restart: Press
STBY/READY lights: OFF
TID NAV: INS
29DEST dataVerify
30BRG/DIST to destinationCheck
31Own A/C groundspeedCheck
32Magnetic variationCheck
33KY-28/KY-58Set as required
34Standby attitude gyroErect
35Notify pilotReady to taxi

Emergency Procedures

Engine Air-start

The F110-GE-400 engines can be air-started one-by-one or simultaneously.
Three restart methods are available:

  • Spool-down
  • Cross-Bleed
  • Windmill

All attempts should be made in the engine mode selected by the AFTC (normally PRI, or SEC if PRI fails).

Spool-down Air-start

Spool-down air-start should be attempted immediately after engine loss, before significant spool-down occurs.

  • May take up to 10 seconds for RPM increase and 90 seconds to reach commanded RPM.
  • If PRI fails, retry in SEC.

Spool-down Air-start Checklist

StepItemAction
1ThrottleIDLE or above
2If no relight: ThrottleOFF then IDLE
3ENG MODE SELECT switchSEC
4ThrottleIf no start after mode switch: OFF then IDLE
5After successful startSet ENG MODE SELECT to PRI if possible

Cross-Bleed Air-start

Use if:

  • Spool-down failed
  • One engine is already running
  • Target engine is near windmill RPM

Cross-Bleed Air-start Checklist

StepItemAction
1Non-running throttleOFF
2FUEL SHUT OFF handleVerify handle IN
3Running engine throttleMinimum 80% RPM
4BACK UP IGNITION switchON
5ENG CRANK switchSet to non-running engine
6Non-running throttleIDLE immediately after CRANK
7If no start: ThrottleOFF then IDLE
8ENG MODE SELECT switchSEC
9ThrottleOFF then IDLE
10After successful startBACK UP IGNITION: OFF
11ENG MODE SELECT switchPRI if possible

Windmill Air-start

Used when:

  • Airspeed ≥ 450 KIAS
  • Altitude permits sufficient airflow through engine

Windmill Air-start Checklist

StepItemAction
1AirspeedAt or above 450 KIAS
2ThrottleIDLE or above
3BACK UP IGNITION switchON
4If no relight: ThrottleOFF then IDLE
5ENG MODE SELECT switchSEC
6ThrottleOFF then IDLE
7After successful startBACK UP IGNITION: OFF
8ENG MODE SELECT switchPRI if possible

DCS

This chapter contains systems, settings and interfaces specific to the simulation of the Tomcat inside DCS.

Of special note are the explanation available to mission designers.

DCS

Special Options

Available under: OPTIONS → SPECIAL → F-14

ControlFunction
Radio Menu and PTT BehaviorConfigures radio PTT integration, useful for SRS
Use Head Movement in Jester MenuEnables VR/TrackIR head control to select petals
Boring JesterDisables Jester’s jokes and embellishments (not yet implemented)
Switch PD-STT to P-STT Lock in WVRJester switches to P-STT automatically within ACM range
Jester Menu CameraEnables live Jester camera feed in the radial menu

Mission Editor

Aircraft-specific settings and waypoints are configured in the Mission Editor.

Aircraft specific options are set up under the Additional Properties for Aircraft page available when setting up an aircraft group containing F-14s.

The waypoints, apart from waypoint 1-3 and Home Base are set up using the Navigation Target Points page also available when configuring an aircraft group containing F-14s.

Options

OptionSets
M-61 Burst ModeMax burst length; "Manual" fires until empty
AN/ALE-39 LoadoutCountermeasure loadout
Fill LAU-138 With ChaffLoad LAU-138s with chaff at spawn
INS Reference Alignment StoredWhether INS reference is pre-aligned at spawn
TACAN Channel Preset (0 = Auto)Preselected TACAN channel; 0 = nearest station
TACAN BandPreselected band (X or Y)
ILS Channel PresetPreselected ICLS channel
KY-28 Encryption KeyEncryption key loaded into KY-28
Laser Code 1st–4th DigitPreset code for laser-guided munitions

Waypoints Types

As the F-14's navigational system only has three numbered waypoints, most other waypoints are set using Navigation Target Points.

  • Waypoints 1–3: Set directly in the mission editor.
  • Home Base: Set to the landing waypoint.
  • All others: Set by naming Navigation Target Points as below:
WaypointName
Fix PointFP
Initial PointIP
Surface TargetST
Defended PointDP
Hostile AreaHA
Datalink Waypoint 1–3DLWP1, DLWP2, DLWP3
Datalink Surface TargetDLST
Datalink Fixed PointDLFP

Acronyms and Abbreviations

A

AbbreviationDefinition
ACLAutomatic Carrier Landing
ACLSAutomatic Carrier Landing System
ACMAir Combat Maneuver
ACQAcquisition
ADFAutomatic Direction Finder
ADIAttitude Director Indicator
ADLArmament Datum Line
AFCSAutomatic Flight Control System
AFTCAugmenter Fan Temperature Control
AHRSAttitude Heading Reference System
AICSAir Inlet Control System
AOAAngle of Attack
APCApproach Power Compensator
ASHAutomatic Stored Heading
ATCActive Transfer Command
ATLSAutomatic Thrust Limiting System
ATTKAttack
AVTRAirborne Video Tape Recorder
AWLAll-Weather Landing

B

AbbreviationDefinition
BATRBullet at Target Range
BDHIBearing-Distance-Heading Indicator
BITBuilt-in Test
BRCBase Recovery Course
BRSTBoresight
BRUBomb Rack Unit

C

AbbreviationDefinition
CADCCentral Air Data Computer
CAINSCarrier Aircraft Inertial Navigation System
CANTCOCan't Comply
CAPComputer Address Panel
CCIPContinuously Computed Impact Point
CICUComputer Integrated Converter Unit
CLSNCollision
CMContinuous Monitor
CRSCourse
CRTCathode Ray Tube
CSAContinuous Semi-Active
CSDCComputer Signal Data Converter
CTVSCockpit Television Sensor
CVAircraft Carrier
CWContinuous-Wave

D

AbbreviationDefinition
DDDDetail Data Display
DDIDigital Data Indicator
DECMDefensive Electronic Countermeasures
DEF PTDefended Point
DESDesignate
DESTDestination
DFDirection Finder
D/LData Link
DLCDirect Lift Control
DMEDistance Measuring Equipment
DPLRDoppler

E

AbbreviationDefinition
ECAExpanded Chaff Adapter
ECMElectronic Countermeasures
ECCMElectronic Counter-Countermeasures
ECMDElectronic Countermeasures Display
ECSEnvironmental Control System
EGTExhaust Gas Temperature
EIGEngine Instrument Group
ETAEstimated Time of Arrival
EXPExpand
FARFalse Alarm Rate

F

AbbreviationDefinition
FCLPField Carrier Landing Practice
FEMSFatigue Engine Monitoring System
FFFuel Flow
FLOLSFresnel Lens Optical Landing System
FMRFrequency Ranging
FOVField of View
FRLFuselage Reference Line
FSKFrequency-Shift-Keyed
FWDForward

G

AbbreviationDefinition
GACHGimbal Angle Crosshair
GCIGround Controlled Intercept
GCSGun Control System
GMGround Map
GPSGlobal Positioning System
GSSGun Scoring System
GTGround Track

H

AbbreviationDefinition
HBHomebase
HCUHand Control Unit
HDGHeading
HOJHome-on-Jam
HOSTHostile
HPRFHigh Pulse Repetition Frequency
HSDHorizontal Situation Display
HSIHorizontal Situation Indicator
HUDHeads-up Display

I

AbbreviationDefinition
IASIndicated Airspeed
ICLSInstrument Carrier Landing System
ICSIntercommunications
IFFIdentification Friend or Foe
IFRInstrument Flight Rules
IFTIn-Flight Training
ILSInstrument Landing System (ICLS)
IMNIndicated Mach Number
IMUInertial Measurement Unit
INSInertial Navigation System
IPInitial Point
IRInfrared
IRATIR Angle Tracking
ITERImproved Triple Ejector Rack
ITSIntegrated Trim System

J

AbbreviationDefinition
JAMJamming
JATJam Angle Track

K

AbbreviationDefinition
KCASKnots Calibrated Airspeed
KTSKnots

L

AbbreviationDefinition
LARLaunch Acceptable Region
LCDLiquid Crystal Display
LCOSLead Computing Optical Sight
LOSLine of Sight
LPRFLow Pulse Repetition Frequency
LSOLanding Signal Officer or "Paddles"
LTELaunch-to-Eject

M

AbbreviationDefinition
MMach
MAMissile Alert
MADMagnetic Azimuth Detector
MAG VARMagnetic Variation
MANManual
MANDMandatory
MDIGMultipurpose Display Indicator Group
MECMain Engine Control
MILMilitary
MLMissile Launch
MLCMainlobe Clutter
MLGMain Landing Gear
MOATMissile on Aircraft Test
MMGSMultiple Mode Gun Sight
MRLManual Rapid Lockon
MSLMean Sea Level

N

AbbreviationDefinition
NAV GRIDNavigation Command and Control Grid
NBRNumber
NFONaval Flight Officer
NFOVNarrow Field of View
NMNautical Miles
NOZNozzle
NTDSNaval Tactical Data System

O

AbbreviationDefinition
OBCOn-Board Check

P

AbbreviationDefinition
PaddlesSee LSO
PALPilot Automatic Lockon
PCDPrecision Course Direction
PDPulse Doppler
PDCPPilot Display Control Panel
PDRSLPulse Doppler Radar Slaved
PDSPulse Doppler Search
PDSTTPulse Doppler Single Target Track
PHAIM-54 Phoenix Missile
PLMPilot Lockon Mode
PRFPulse Repetition Frequency
PRIPrimary
PRSLPulse Radar Slaved
PSPulse Search
PSTTPulse Single Target Track
PTPoint

Q

AbbreviationDefinition
QADLCue-to-ADL
QDESCue-to-Designate
QHUDCue-to-HUD
QSNOCue-to-snowplow
QWPCue-to-waypoint

R

AbbreviationDefinition
RACHRadar Angle Crosshair
RDRRadar
RDROTRadar on Target
RECONReconnaissance
RIORadar Intercept Officer
RNGRange
RNGRTRange Rate
ROTRange on Target
RTGSReal-Time Gun Sight
RWSRange While Search

S

AbbreviationDefinition
SAMSurface to Air Missile
SASStability Augmentation System
SATSimultaneous Alignment and Test
SCPSensor Control Panel
SD/ASample Data/Active
SEAMSidewinder Expanded Acquisition Mode
SINSShip Inertial Navigation System
SPAIM-7 Sparrow Missile
STSurface Target
STABStabilization
STAB AUGStability Augmentation
STBYStandby
STCSensitivity Time Control
STTSingle Target Track
SWAIM-9 Sidewinder Missile

T

AbbreviationDefinition
TACANTactical Air Navigation
TARPSTactical Air Reconnaissance Pod System
TASTrue Airspeed
TCSTelevision Camera Set
TDSTactical Data System
TERTriple Ejector Rack
TGTTarget
THRLDThreshold
TIDTactical Information Display
TITTurbine Inlet Temperature
TTGTime-to-Go
TUIRTime Until in Range
TUMRTime Until Maximum Range
TUORTime Until Optimum Range
TWSTrack While Scan
TWSATrack While Scan Automatic
TWSMTrack While Scan Manual

U

AbbreviationDefinition
UHFUltra High Frequency
UTCCoordinated Universal Time

V

AbbreviationDefinition
VcClosing Velocity Rate
vCComputed MAG VAR
VDIVertical Display Indicator
VDIGVertical Display Indicator Group (HUD & VDI)
VECVector
VFRVisual Flight Rules
VIDVisual Identification
vMManual MAG VAR
VMCUVoltage Monitor Control Unit
VSLVertical Scan Lockon
VTRVideo Tape Recorder

W

AbbreviationDefinition
WCSWeapon Control System
WFOVWide Field of View
WILCOWill Comply
WODWind over the Deck
WOWWeight on/off Wheels

Y

AbbreviationDefinition
YYGeographic Reference Point for NAV GRID

Tutorials

Pilot Cockpit Overview

RIO Cockpit Overview

Pilot Cold Start

Front Seat - Startup, Taxi, Takeoff with Jester (Short)

Back Seat - RIO Startup (4 different ways)

Maneuvering and Flight Characteristics

Air to Air Refueling

Front Seat - ACM - Radar Acquisition Modes

Back Seat - RIO NAV GRID Tutorial

Back Seat - RIO AWG-9 Tutorial

Back Seat - RIO IFF Tutorial

CVW-11: DCS F-14B Tomcat RIO School

Front Seat - Weapons - AIM-9 Sidewinder

Front Seat - Weapons - Zuni Rockets with Jester

Imprint

Heatblur Simulations™
Ulica Wrzosowa 11, 72-602, Świnoujście, Poland

Contact: support@heatblur.se

https://store.heatblur.com/

The Heatblur F-14 Team

Nicholas Dackard, Creative Director and Lead Artist
Daniel Malmquist, Lead Engineer (Flight Dynamics and JESTER-AI)
Bert van Leeuwen, Senior Programmer (Weapons, Radar, Systems and Multi-crew)
Krzysztof Sobczak, Senior Programmer (Systems, Avionics, RWR and Radios, Nav and LANTIRN)
Andrew O'Donnell, Senior Programmer (Flight Dynamics, Systems and Engines)
Aleksander Studen-Kirchner, Producer (QA, Content and Director JESTER-AI)
Johan Malmquist - Lead Research and Lead Author Manual
Andreas Sandin - Lead Design, Web-Design and Liveries
Adrian Caparzo, Video Editing and Trailers
Grayson Frohberg, Voice of the JESTER-AI

Post Release

Daniel Tischner, Senior Programmer (UI, Systems and AI)
Dominik Głowacki, Senior Programmer (Systems, Avionics, AI)
Szymon Skarzyński, Senior Programmer (Systems, Avionics, AI)
Joshua Nelson, Programmer (Weapons)
Yannis Leon Bößmann, Junior Programmer
Nicola Faggiani, Artist, 3D Model
Davi Bernardino, Artist, 3D Model and Textures
Ben Mährlein, Liveries and Art
Kenneth Ellis, Research
Daria Kurhuzova, Administrative Assistant

See You In The Skies

F14 from behind